+ All Categories
Home > Documents > INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The...

INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The...

Date post: 11-Feb-2018
Category:
Upload: phungkhue
View: 227 times
Download: 9 times
Share this document with a friend
267
INFORMATION TO USERS This manuscript has been reproduced trom the microfilm master. UMI films the text directJy tram the original or copy submitted. Thus, some thesis and dissertation copies are in typewriter face, while others may be from any type of computer printer. The quality of this reproduction is dependent upon the quality of the copy submitted. Broken or indistinct print, colored or poor quality illustrations and photographs, print bleedthrough, substandard margins, and improper alignment can adversely affect reproduction. ln the unlikely event that the author did not send UMf a complete manuscript and there are missing pages, these will be noted. Also, if unauthorized copyright material had to be removed, a note will indicate the deletion. Oversize materials (e.g., maps, drawings, charts) are reproduced by sectioning the original, beginning at the upper left-hand corner and continuing trom left to right in equal sections with small overlaps. ProQuest Information and leaming 300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48106-1346 USA 800-521-0600
Transcript
Page 1: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

INFORMATION TO USERS

This manuscript has been reproduced trom the microfilm master. UMI films

the text directJy tram the original or copy submitted. Thus, some thesis and

dissertation copies are in typewriter face, while others may be from any type of

computer printer.

The quality of this reproduction is dependent upon the quality of the

copy submitted. Broken or indistinct print, colored or poor quality illustrations

and photographs, print bleedthrough, substandard margins, and improper

alignment can adversely affect reproduction.

ln the unlikely event that the author did not send UMf a complete manuscript

and there are missing pages, these will be noted. Also, if unauthorized

copyright material had to be removed, a note will indicate the deletion.

Oversize materials (e.g., maps, drawings, charts) are reproduced by

sectioning the original, beginning at the upper left-hand corner and continuing

trom left to right in equal sections with small overlaps.

ProQuest Information and leaming300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48106-1346 USA

800-521-0600

Page 2: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes
Page 3: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

NOTE TO USERS

Page (s) not included in the original manuscript isunavailable trom the author or university. The

manuscript was microfilmed as received.

Pg 10-15 in Chapter 10

This reproduction is the best copy available.

UMIe

Page 4: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes
Page 5: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

AN APPROACH TO SEISMIC DESIGN OFECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES

by

Sanda Koboevic

A Thesis Submitted ta the Faculty of Graduate 5tudies and Researchin Partial Fulfilment of the Requirements of the Degree of Dactar af Philasophy

Department of Civil Engineering and Applied MechanicsMcGill University, Montreal, Canada

May, 2000

(Ç)Sanda Koboevic, 2000

Page 6: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1+1 National Ubraryof Canada

Acquisitions andBibliographie Services385 Welinglon Street0IIawa ON K1A 0N4C8nadIl

Bibliothèque nationaledu Canada

Acquisitions etservices bibliographiques

385. rue wellingtonoaawa ON K1A 0N4CM8da

The author bas granted a non­exclusive licence aIloWÎDg theNational Library ofCanada tareproduce, loan, distnbute or sencopies oftitis thesis in microfonn,paper or electronic formats.

The author retains ownership ofthecopyright in this thesis. Neither thethesis nor substantial extracts from itMaY he printed or otherwisereproduced witbout the author'spermission.

L'auteur a accordé une licence nonexclusive permettant à laBibliothèque nationale du Canada dereproduire, prêter, distribuer ouvendre des copies de cette thèse sousla forme de microfiche/film, dereproduction sur papier ou sur formatélectronique.

L'autem conserve la propriété dudroit d'auteur qui protège cette thèse.Ni la thèse ni des extraits substantielsde celle-ci ne doivent être imprimésou autrement reproduits sans sonautorisation.

0-612-69895-5

Canadl

Page 7: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

ABSTRACT• __iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii&iiiiliiiiiiiiiiiii_-

This dissertation investigates a novel approach to seismic design of eccenttically braced

frames. The proposed design procedure incorporates non-lînear time-history analysis directiy

into the design process. ~Iember forces introduced by a chosen earthquake record are

monitored throughout the rime history, and the frame elements are selected 50 that they

have adequate resistances for peak forces. This process is carried out iteratively. For the

earthquake records used, the proposed procedure leads to a design which achieves desired

seismic behaviour, characterized by the stable elastic response of columns and braces, and

with inelastic action confined primarily to links.

The procedure was implemented by means of three computer programs, two of which were

developed as part of this srudy. The sensitivity of the procedure to initial section selection

was studied and a methodology ta obtain an appropriate site-specifie earthquake record to

use in the analysis was proposed.

The application of the procedure was illustrated thraugh examples of three Chevron-type

EBFs, these having four, eight and fourteen storeys and being located in Victoria, B.C. It

was demonstrated that the proposed design method is simple and efficient, and cao be used

either as an alternative design method or in combination with current design practice.

Analytical results indicate that frames designed using this alternative approach have

improved behaviour compared to those designed in accordance with the present Canadian

design requirements, in particular regarding the response of columns and braces.

In the second part of the srudy, the analytical tools devel'~ped were used ta futther

investigate and enhance the understanding of seismic behaviour of EBFs. Modifications of

seismic design requirements for EBFs, suitable for incorporation in the Canadian Standard

1

Page 8: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

• for design of steel buildings, CSAjCAN-S16.1 were examincd. The inelastic response of an

eight-storey EBF designed following these modified requirements is compared ta that of a

corresponding structure designed using the iterative procedure. Attention was furtber

directed ta seismic force profiles, magnitudes of axial forces and moments for use in the

design of columns, force modification factors and the relationship between inelastic inter­

storey drifts and inelastic link deformations.

u

Page 9: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

• RÉsuMÉ._iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliilliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiilliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiilliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliill&iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii-

Cette dissertation traite d'une approche dans la conception parasismique de cadres à

contreventements excentriques (CCE). La nouvelle procédure qui est proposée inclut

l'analyse non-linéaire dans le temps. Les charges sur les membrures, provenant d'un

accélérogramme de tremblement de tette choisi préalablement, sont observées durant

l'événement, et les sections sont choisies de façon à ce qutelles aient une résistance adéquate

pour les charges maximales.

La procédure a été établie au moyen de trois programmes d'ordinateur, deux desquels furent

développés au cours de cette étude. La sensibilité de la procédure au choix des sections

initiales a été étudiée, et une méthodologie pour obtenir des accélérogrammes représentatifs

pour le site donné est proposée.

Ltapplication de la procédure est illustrée à travers trois exemples de CCE en chevron, ceux­

ci ayant quatre, huit et quatorze étages et situés à Victoria, Columbie-Britannique. il a été

démontré que la méthode de conception proposée est simple et efficace, et peut être utilisée

comme méthode alternative ou de pair avec la méthode courante de conception. Les

résultats analytiques montrent que les cadres conçus selon cette approche alternative ont un

meilleur comportement que ceux qui sont conçus selon les normes canadiennes de

conception parasismique, en particulier la réponse des colonnes et des diagonales.

Dans la seconde partie de ce projet, ces outils analytiques ont été utilisés pour davantage

étudier et améliorer la compréhension du comportement parasismique des CeE. Des

modifications aux exigences de conception parasismique des CeE, adéquates pour être

incorporées dans les normes canadiennes pour le dimensionnement des charpentes en acier,

CAN/ACNOR-S16.1, sont examinées. La réponse inélastique d'un CCE de huit étages

conçu selon ces exigences modifiées est comparée à celle d'une structure conçue en utilisant

U1

Page 10: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

la procédure itérative. Une attention fut ensuite donnée aux profils des charges sismiques, à

l'amplitude des charges axiales et des moments de fle.,Qon qui sont utilisés dans la conception

des colonnes, aux coefficients de réduction de force et à la relation entre les défonnations

interétages et les déformations inélastiques des chaïnons.

iv

Page 11: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS._iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii---iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii------

During my Ph.D. studies, a number of individuals and organizations have been supportive in

academic, financial and/or persona! matters, and 1 thank all of them for their assistance.

It was a great privilege to work under the direction of Prof. R.G. Redwood, and 1 sincere1y

thank him for the guidance, invaluable support, inspiration and encouragement tbroughout

the course of this project.

1 aIso gratefully acknowledge the finandai support provided by the Fonds pour la formation

de chercheurs et l'aide à la recherche (FCAR) of the Province of Quebec, the Steel

Structures Education Foundation (SSEF) and the Natural Science and Engineering Research

Council of Canada. (NSERq.

The provision of software by Prof. J. Rides of Lebigh University, Profs. R. Tremblay and P.

Léger of École Polytechnique de Montréal and L. Chouinard of McGill University is

gratefully acknowledged. Profs. P. Léger and L. Chouinard are aIso thanked for their

valuable conunents and discussions. The acceleration data provided by Profs. G. Atkinson

of Carleton University and D. ~fitchellof McGill University is aIso much appreciated.

~Ir thanks are extended to my fellow graduate students, in particular X. M. Han and C.

Christopolous for their input in this study.

Finally, 1 would like to heartily thank my parents, Manja and Boris, my fiancé Patrick and my

brother Damir and for their love and support. To them 1 dedicate this thesis. 1 especially

thank Patrick for finding the right words to inspire me and keep me going.

v

Page 12: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

TABLE OF CONTENTS• iiiiiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii &iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiii&

ABSTRACT 1

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS V

TABLE OF CONTENTS Vl

LIST OF SYMBOLS XlI

LIST OF TABLES XlV

LIST OF FIGURES xx

L INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REvIEW

1.1 Background on EBFs 1-2

1.2 Review of previous experimental and analytical studies 1-2

1.2.1 Experimental studies 1-2

1.2.2 Analytical studies 1-7

1.3 Design of EBFs 1-8

1.3.1 Design philosophy and procedures 1-8

1.3.2 Canadian design procedure for EBF 1-10

1.4 Evaluation of Canadian design procedure 1-12

1.4.1 Response of the links 1-12

1.4.2 Response of other members of the frame 1-13

1.5 Objectives of the research program 1-15

1.6 Organisation of the thesis 1-15

2. OUTUNE OF THE PROPOSED PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF

ANALYI'ICAL TOOLS

2.1 Introduction 2-1

2.2 Basic steps of the proposed design procedure 2-2

VI

Page 13: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.3 Development of the analytical tooIs 2-3

2.3.1 The analysis module 2-3

2.3.1.1 General considerations 2-4

2.3.1.2 Modelling of the links 2-5

2.3.1.3 Modelling ofother frame members 2-5

2.3.2 The design module 2-6

2.3.2.1 Main functions and limitations of the program 2-6

2.3.2.2 Databases 2-7

2.3.2.3 Input files 2-9

2.3.2.4 Output files 2-10

2.3.2.5 Organisation and the features of the program 2-10

2.3.2.5.1 Functions 2-10

2.3.2.5.2. Subroutines 2-1

2.3.2.5.3 Basic steps of the program 2-11

2.3.3 The data modification module 2-13

2.3.3.1 General considerations 2-13

2.3.3.2 Features of the program 2-14

2.3.3.3 Program limitations 2-15

2.4 Snmmary 2-16

3. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE TO INITIAL DESIGN

3.1 General considerations 3-1

3.2 Selection of the trial design 3-2

3.2.1 Approaches to select a trial design 3-2

3.2.2 Initial member selection 3-3

3.2.2.1 Building features and loading 3-3

3.2.2.2 Link beam selection for initial structures 3-4

3.2.2.3 Selection ofbraces and columns in trial design 3-4

3.3 Selection of earthquake record and modelling assumptions 3-4

3.4 Final section selection obtained in iterative design procedure 3-5

3.4.1 Eight storey structure 3-5

vu

Page 14: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3.4.2 Four and fourteen storey structures 3-6

3.5 Discussion of the results 3-6

3.6 Summary 3-7

4. SELEctION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAIΠRECORD

4.1 Introduction 4-1

4.2 Proposed methodology to define a design acceleration record 4..2

4.2.1 Outline of the method 4..2

4.2.2 Determination ofM and R for initial selection of historie records 4..3

4.2.2.1 A computer program for assessment of seismic huard 4..3

4.2.2.2 Assessing the distribution of seismic hazard for Victoria, B.C 4-4

4.2.3 Selection of historical sttong motion records 4-4

4.2.3.1 Search strategy 4-4

4.2.3.2 Description of the darabase 4-5

4.2.3.3 Selected historical records for Victoria, B.C. . 4-6

4.2.3.4 Scaling of the earthquake records 4-6

4.2.4 Elastic spectra for historica1 records 4..8

4.2.5. Indices to characterise earthquake records 4..9

4.2.6 Generation of the artificial acceleration records 4-10

4.2.6.1 Short description ofprogram SIMQKE 4-10

4.2.6.2 Input data 4-11

4.3 Comparison ofhistorical and generated records 4-11

4.3.1 Comparison of earthquake indices 4-11

4.3.1.1 Low a/v records 4-12

4.3.1.2 Intennediate a/v records 4-13

4.3.1.3 Synopsis 4-14

4.3.2 Comparison of structural ine1astic response 4-14

4.3.3 Generated records seleeted for design 4-15

4.4 Comments on artificial records matching new uniform. hazard

spectta for Canada 4-16

4.5 SIJmmary 4-17

V1I1

Page 15: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

s. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

5.1 Design. of initial strllctures 5-1

5.1.1 Building layouts and frames elevations 5-2

5.1.2 Load calculations 5-2

5.1.2.1 Gravity load 5-2

5.1.2.2 Seismic load 5-2

5.1.2.3 Wind load 5-3

5.1.3 Ductility design 5-3

5.1.3.1 General 5-3

5.1.3.2 ~[odellingassumptions and section selection 5-4

5.1.4 Sttength verification 5-4

5.1.5 Stiffness verification 5-6

5.1.6. Verification of the inelastic shear rotation, y 5-6

5.2 Final designs 5-7

5.3 Study of the inelasoc response 5-8

5.3.1 General 5-8

5.3.2 Response of the initial structures (Set 1) 5-8

5.3.2.1 Four-storey frame 5-8

5.3.2.2 Eight-storey frame 5-10

5.3.2.3 Fourteen-storey frame 5-11

5.3.3 Response of the final structures (Set 2) 5-13

5.3.3.1 Response of the links 5-13

5.3.3.2 Response ofother members of the frame 5-14

5.3.3.3 Inter-storey drift 5-15

5.4 Comparison of two design procedures 5-15

5.6 Summary 5-16

6. STUDY OF THE SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR OF EDF' S

6.1 Future EBF seismic design requirements: proposal for CAN/CSA-SI6.1 ......6-1

ix

Page 16: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6.1.1 Summary of proposed modifications 6-1

6.1.2 Evaluation of proposed design requirements 6-3

6.1.2.1 Four-storey frame 6-4

6.1.2.2 Eight-storey frame 6-6

6.1.2.3 Fourteen-storey frame 6-7

6.1.3 Sltmmary .•.•.•..••...........•.......................•.......•.•................6-9

6.2 Study of the laterai force distribution 6-10

6.2.1 General 6-10

6.2.2 Discussion of the results 6-12

6.2.2.1 Four storey frame 6-12

6.2.2.2 Eight-storey frame '" 6-13

6.2.2.3 Fourteen storey frame 6-15

6.2.3 Summary 6-15

6.3 Column axial forces and moments 6-16

6.3.1 General 6-16

6.3.2 Column axial forces 6-17

6.3.2.1 Axial forces from non-linear analysis 6-17

6.3.2.2 Combination mIes 6-18

6.3.2.3 Amplification factors 6-19

6.3.3 Column bending moments 6-20

6.3.3.1 Bending moments from non-linear analysis 6-20

6.3.4 Summary 6-21

6.4 Study of the seismic force modification factor 6-22

6.4.1 General 6-22

6.4.2 Oversttength factor, Rs 6-23

6.4.3 Ductility factor,~ 6-24

6.4.4 Sltmmary ......•.....................•........................................6-27

6.5 Relationship between the inelastic link rotation y, and inter-storey drift A 6-28

6.5.1 General 6-28

6.5.2 Relationship between the maximum 'Y and maximum A 6-29

6.5.3 Drift limits to conttollink behaviour 6-30

x

Page 17: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6.5.5 SlJmmary .............•.•.•..•...................................•.••..••..•.•6-32

7. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

7.1 Sllmmary ....•..........................•......•.........•........•.•..•...............7-1

7.2 Conclusions 7-2

7.2.1 Deve10pment and application of the proposed design procedure 7-2

7.2.2 Study of EBF seismic behaviour using developed analytical tooIs 7-4

7.2.2.1 Proposed modifications of EBF design requirements in

CSA/CAN S16-1 7-4

7.2.2.2 Distribution of the lateral force 7-4

7.2.2.3 A..cial forces and moments for ductility design of columns 7-5

7.2.2.4 Seismic force reduction factors 7-5

7.2.2.5 Relationship between inelastic Ïnter-storey drift and

inelastic ün.k rotation 7-6

7.3 Concluding comments and recommendations for future work 7-6

7.4 Original conttlDutioQS 7-8

8. REFERENCES 8-1

9. APPENDIX A 9-1

10. APPENDIX B 10-1

xi

Page 18: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

UST OF SYMBOLS• iiliiiiiii iiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii_..-liiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiiiiii_

A

AFr

AI

~.

a

oDAP

d

E

EBF

e

g

HSS

~

~

~

~

amplitude of the pulse

squashload

Arias intensity

area of the web

peak ground acceleration

factored compressive force in the link

nominal compressive resistance of the link

deadload

duration of the acceleration pulse

depth of the section

earthquakeload

eccentrically braced frame

length of the 1ink

concenttated force at the top of the structure to account for contribution of

higher modes

yield sttess of steel

scaling factor (Schiff"s method)

scaling factor (Schiff" s method)

acceleration due to gravity

hollow structural section

storey height

effective stiffness

effective length factor for in-plane action

effective length factor for out-of-plane action

ratio ofymax/~ evaluated for each storey

average value of Ky evaluated for each storey

ratio of Mdcl

X1l

Page 19: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

L

~[

NAP

NBCC'inc:ar

NBCCmodaI

N1

NLTHA

NZC

P

Pr

PGA

PGV

PHA

PHV

PPS

PS~.

PSa

PLU

R

R

RMSA

average vaIue of~ evaIuated for each storey

span of the Iink beam; live load

bending moment in member; earthquake magnitude

maximum range of inelastic shear rotations

nominal bending resistance of the Iink

column plastic moment

faetored bending resistance of the member

effective mass

number of acce!eration pulses

NBCC linear lateraI force distribution

NBCC lateraI force distribution obtained from modal analysis for NBeC

design specttum

modified NBCC linear lateraI force distribution

number of pulses with the amplitude within the selected range

non-linear rime history anaIysis

number of zero crossings

axial force in member

factored axial force in link

peak ground acceleration

peak ground velocity

peak horizontal ground acceleration

peak horizontal ground velocity

predominant period of shaking

pseudo-velocity

pseudo-acceleration

equivalent horizontal forces to account for second order effects of dead and

live load acting on the deformed structure

force reduction factor; epicenttal distance

total reduetion factor factor, R*1lU

root mean square ofaccelerogram

redundancy factor

X1U

Page 20: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

r

S

SHA

TP

U

UHS

v

v 1:,2".Il

V c,nonlIl

v nonlIl

overstrength factor

damping factor

ducti1ity factor

response ratio (demand-to-resistance ratio of the member)

seismic response factor of NBCC

seismic hazard analysis

pseudo-acceleration speetrum. intensity

pseudo-ve1ocîty speetrum intensity

square-root-sum-of-the-squares summation mIe

simple summation mIe

fundamental structural period

effective period

structural period using NBCC empirical formula

rime of the occurrence of the pulse

calibration factor

uniform hazard speetra

factor to account for moment gradient (bending about x axis) and for

second-order effects ofgravity load acting on the defonned member

shear force in member; design base shear force

design base shear at ma....wnum displacement

desÎgn lateral strength of the structure associated with seismic loading

elastic base shear

factored shear force in the 1ink

maximum shear force in the link induced by earthquake

nominal shear resistance of the 1ink

factored shear resistance of the link

ma..ximum lateral strength of the structure

elastic strength demand

maximum e1astic base shear obtained from push-over analysis at two percent

roof drift index

ma..ximum e1astic base shear obtained from NLTHA

maximum base shear obtained from NLTHA

xiv

Page 21: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

V 1!.u

v

W

WWF

w

a

flfnmc:Il Y<I1·119rfr:unr:

latera1 strength of the strUcture obtained from push-over analysis at two

percent roof drift inde.x

peak ground velocity; zonal velocity ratio

wide t1ange section

welded wide Bange section

wind load (1 in 30 years)

thickness of the web

ratio oflink resistance to demand, Vr!Vf

integration parameter in Newmark's method; constant (m uoits length)

reIated to the expansion of the shear yield surface of the link due to isotropie

strain-hardening

inelastic shear rotation; integration parameter in Newmark's method

maximum inelastic shear rotation

storey drift

design displacement

inter-storey elastic drift

maximum inelastic displacement

maximum shear yield sttength of link after complete hardening

yield displacement

storey drift angle

mean value

overall ductility factor for multi-storey building

ductility displacement ratio associated with maximum ineIastic link rotation

just reaching the desÏgn limit of O.09rad

storey ductility displacement ratio

standard deviation

resistance factor

coefficient to account for increased bending resistance of a laterally

unsupponed beam segment when subjeet to a moment gradient

xv

Page 22: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

UST OF TABLES._iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii~

Gravity loading (specified) on EBF 3-9

Seismic loading for EBF (Victo~B.q 3-10

Iink beam selection for initial structures 3-10

Table 3.1

Table 3.2

Table 3.3

Table 3.4

Table 3.5

Table 3.6

Table 4.1

Table 4.2

Table 4.3

Table 4.4

Table 4.5

Table 4.6

Table 4.7

Eight-storey frame: Initial and final section selection 3-11

Four-storey frame: Initial and final section selection 3-12

Fourteen-storer frame: Initial and final section selection 3-12

Contributions to seismic risk C%): PGV equal to O.3m/s 4-19

Summary of selected historie earthquake records 4-20

Scaling factors for earthquake records 4-21

Indices to charaeterise earthquake records: Law a/v records 4-22

Indices to charaeterise earthquake records: Intennediate a/v records 4-23

Charaeteristics ofacceleranon pulses: Low a/v records 4-24

Comparison of response of links ro historical and artificial records:

Low a/v records 4-25

Table 4.8 Comparison of response oflinks to hisrorical and artificial records:

Inrennediare a/l,r records 4-26

Table 4.9 Characteristic ground motion parameters: artificial records matching

new UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998) 4-27

Table 4.10 Indices to characterise earthquake records: artificial records matching

new UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998) 4-28

Table 4.U Link response parameters: artificial records matching new

UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998) 4-29

Table 4.12 Scaling factors Fab': artificial records matching new UHS for Canada

(Atkinson et al, t998) 4-30

Table 4.13 Link response parameters: Scaled artificial records matching

new UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998) 4-31

XVI

Page 23: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 5.6

Table 5.4

Table 5.5

Table 5.7

Table 5.8

Table 5.1

Table S.2

Table S.3

~

Seismic load calculation (Zone 5) 5-17

Wind load calculations 5-18

Four-storey frame: Ductility design - snmmary of selected sections

(current codified design procedure) 5-19

Eight-storey frame: Ductility design - summary of selected sections

(current codified design procedure) 5-19

Fourteen-storey frame: Ductility design - summary of seleeted

sections (current codified design procedure) 5-20

Fourteen-storey frame: Verification of sttength and inelastic inter-storey

drift - summary of selected sections (current codified design procedure) 5-21

Proposed iterative design procedure: Summary ofselected sections 5-22

Four-storey frame, Set 1: Iink response parameters and inter-storey

inelastic drift 5-23

Table 5.9 Four-storey frame, Set 1: Response of columns and braces

(duration ofexcess loading) 5-24

Table 5.10 Set 1 structures: Maximum. inelastic rotations of outer beam segments 5-25

Table 5.11 Eight-storey frame, Set 1: Link. response parameters and inter-storey

ine1astic drift 5-26

Table 5.12 Eight-storey frame, Set 1: Response of columns and braces (duration

excess loading) 5-27

Table 5.13 Fourteen-storey frame, Set 1: Link response parameters and

inter-storey inelastic drift 5-28

Table 5.14 Fourteen-storey frame, Set 1: Response ofcolumns and braces

(duration of excess loading) 5-30

Table 5.15 Set 2 structures: Nonnalized maximum Iink shear forces 5-31

Table 5.16 Set 2 structures: Maximum inelastic link rotations, "'(mu (rad) 5-31

Table 5.17 Set 2 structures: Maximum range of inelastic link rotations,

max "'(range (rad) 5-31

Table 5.18 Eight-storey frame: Comparison of link response,

Set 1 and Set 2 structures 5-32

xvü

Page 24: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.4

Table 6.5

Table 6.6

Table 6.7

Table 6.8

Table 6.9

Table 6.10

Table 6.U

Table 5.19 Four-storey frame and eight-storey frames, Set 2: Response of columns

and braces (duration of excess loading) 5-34

Table 5.20 Set 2 structures: Maximum ine1astic rotations of outer beam segments 5-36

Table 5.21 Set 2 structures: Inter-storey inelastic drift (mm) 5-37

Table 6.1 Four storey frame: Summary of se1eeted sections (Design A) 6-33

Table 6.2 Four-storey frame, Design A: Predicted values ofYand A 6-33

Table 6.3 Four-storey frame, Design A: ~faximum. normalized link shear forces

and ine1astic rotations 6-33

Four-storey frame, Design A: Duration ofexcess loading 6-34

Four-storey framey Design A: Inter-storey inelastic drift (mm) 6-34

Comparison of inter-storey inelastic drifts (Designs A, By q 6-35

Eight-storey frame: Summary of selected sections (Design A) 6-35

Eight-storey frame, Design A: ~la.ximum normaIized link shear forces

and inelastic rotations 6-36

Eight-storey frame, Design A: Dutation of excess loading 6-37

Eight-storey ttame, Design A: Inter-storey inelastic drift (mm) 6-38

Eight-storey frame: Comparison of predieted and observed

inter-storey inelastic drift (mm) 6-38

Table 6.12 Fourteen-storey frame: Summary of selected sections (Design A) 6-39

Table 6.13 Four-storey frame: Distnbution oflateraI forces (kN) 6-40

Table 6.14 Eight-storey frame: Distribution oflateraI forces (kN) 6-40

Table 6.lS Founeen-storey frame: Distribution oflateraI forces (kN) 6-40

Table 6.16 Column a.'CÏa1 forces: Results from ~TLTHA (kN) 6-41

Table 6.17 Column axial forces in ductility design phase: Comparison

of combination mies 6-42

Table 6.18 Column axial forces in ductility design phase: Comparison

of amplification factors 6-43

Table 6.19 Column end moments: Results from NLTHA (J.L) ••...••••••••••••••••••••••6-44

Table 6. 20 Column end moments as a percentage of plastic moments of column

sections, Mp ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••6-44

Table 6.21 Overstrength factor, Rs 6-45

XV1ll

Page 25: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

~

Table 6.22 Ductility factor, ~ and displacement duetility ratio, J,trnme •••••...•....•...•6-45

Table 6.23 Weighting coefficients to calculate J,tfumc ••••••••..•.••••••••••••••••••••••••••.6-45

Table 6.24 Coefficients Ky based on ma."<Ïm.um ymax and maximum~ 6-47

Table 6.25 Coefficients Ky based on (J.1+<J) Ymax and (J.1+<J)~ 6-49

Table 6.26 Drift indexes associated with desired performances of the links 6-51

XIX

Page 26: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

LIST OF FIGURES.liiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiil&

Fig 1.1

Fig 1.2

Fig 1.3

Fig 1.4

Fig 1.5

Fig 1.6

Fig 1.7

Fig 1.8

Fig 1.9

Fig 1.10

Fig 1.11

Fig 1.12

Fig 2.1

Fig 2.2

Fig 2.3

Fig 2.4

Fig 2.5

Fig 2.6

Fig 3.1

Fig 3.2

Fig 3.3

Fig 4.1

Fig 4.2

Typical EBF configurations 1-16

Typica1 force distributions in link beams under lateralload 1-16

Rigid-plastic collapse mechanism 1-16

Hysteretic behaviour of (a) unstiffened shear link and (b) stiffened shear

link (after Popov and Engelhardt, 1988) 1-17

Hysteretic behaviour of stiffened flexurallink (after Popov et al, 1989) 1-17

Static equilibrium of link (after Popov and Engelhardt, 1988) 1-17

Shear links with unequal end moments with (a) no axial force;

(b) axial force (after Popov and Engelhardt, 1988) 1-17

Link element with inelastic subhinges 1-18

Subhinge yield surfaces with resulting hinge force-deformation response 1-18

Force-defonnation relationship for (a) shear and (b) flexure to model

kinematic hardening of the links (after Rides et al., 1994) 1-19

Simplified static approach to calculate link shear forces 1-20

Link defonnations for 6 and 10-storey EBF subjected to 1.5 El Centre

and Chile earthquakes (after Popov et al., 1992) 1-20

Proposed design procedure: sequence of one iteration 2-17

l.\.fodelling of EBF 2-17

Typical interaction surface for beam-column element 2-17

Yiclding surfaces for clement groups (1), (2) and (3) 2-18

Modelling of rigid offsets 2-18

Modelling of beam-to-brace connection 2-18

Typicallayouts and clevations for four, eight and fourteen storeys EBFs 3-13

Time-history ofTAFf record (N21E component) 3-14

Elastic response spectta (Taft record, N21E component) 3-15

Earthquake source zones in Canada (after Basham et al, 1985) 4-32

Contribution to seismic risk: PGV equal to 0.3 mis 4-33

xx

Page 27: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Fig 4.3

Fig 4.4

Fig 4.5

Fig 4.6

Fig 4.7

Fig 4.8

Fig 4.9

Fig 4.10

Fig 4.11

Fig 4.12

Fig 4.13

Fig 4.14

Fig 5.1

Fig 5.2

Fig 5.3

Fig 5.4

Fig 6.1

Fig 6.2

Fig 6.3

Fig 6.4

~

Contribution to seismic risk: PGA equal to O.3g 4-34

Pseudo-velocity response spectrum: Whole set of selected

historical records 4-35

Pseudo-velocity response spectrum: Law a/v records 4-36

Pseudo-velocity response specttUtn: Intermediate a/v records 4-37

Smoothed PSv response speettum: Law a/v group of records 4-38

Smoothed PSv response speetrum: Intennediate a/v group of records 4-38

Intensity funetion: Low a/v records 4-39

Intensity function: Intermediate a/v records 4-39

Time-histories of generated acceleration records matching smoothed

specttum for low a/v records 4-40

Time-histories of generated acceleration records matching smoothed

spectrum for low a/v records 4-41

Comparison of structural response to historica1 and generated

records: Ma.ximum normalized link shear forces 4-42

Comparison of structural response to historical and generated

records: ~faximum range of inelastic shear deformations 4-43

Forces introduced in other members of the frame by yielded

and strain-hardened links 5-38

Four-storey frame, Set 1: ~'1aximum normalized link shear forces 5-39

Eight-storey frame, Set 1: ~Iaximum normalized link shear forces 5-39

Fourteen-storey frame, Set 1: Maximum normalized link shear forces 5-39

Four-storey frame: Comparison of nwcimum normalized link shear

forces for Designs A, B and C 6-52

Four-storey frame: Comparison of nwcimum ine1astic link shear

deformations for Designs A, Band C 6-52

Eight-storey frame: Comparison of nwcimum normalized link shear

forces for Designs A, B and C 6-53

Eight-storey frame: Comparison of nwcimum normalized link shear

forces for Designs A, B and C 6-53

xxi

Page 28: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Fig 6.5

Fig 6.6

Fig 6.7

Fig 6.8

Fig 6.9

Fig 6.10

Fig6.U

Fig 6.12

Fig 6.13

Fig 6.14

Fig6.t5

Fig 6.16

Fig 6.17

Fig 6.18

Smooth pseudo-acceleration spectta for: (a) Law a/v records and

(b) Intermediate a/v records 6-54

Four-storey frame: Lateral force distribution (maximum positive and

maximum negative force) 6-55

Four-storey frame: Lateral force distribution (absolute maximum force) 6-55

Eight-storey frame: Lateral force distnDution (maximum positive and

maximum negative force) 6-56

Eight-storey frame: Lateral force distnDution (absolute ma..ximum force) 6-57

Eight-storey frame: Lateral force distnDution obtained &om

modal ana1ysis using response specttum derived for historical

records (intennediate a/v group) 0. o •• o ••••••••••6-58

Fourteen-storey frame: Lateral force distribution (maximum positive and

maximum negative force) o ••••••••• 0 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-59

Fourteen-storey frame: Lateral force distribution (absolute max. force) ...6-60

Fourteen-storey frame: Suggested lateraI force profile 0 •• 6-61

General force-displacement response of the structure 6-62

Force-deformation relationships 0 ••••••••••••••••• 0 ••••••••••6-63

Typical qualitative relationship between~ and Q

(after Fisbinger and Fajfar, 1994) 0.6-64

DO Ob' f d tili'15tn utton 0 storey uc ty, f.ls[~. . ......•................•.................6-65

Fundamentals of direct displacement-based design method

(after Priesdey, 1998) 0 6-66

xxii

Page 29: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 1

INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW.lIiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiil iiiiiliii iiiiIIiiiiiiiiiiii�_

The eccenttically braced framing system is a very reIiable type of framing to resist

economically earthquake loads. To date however, few of these structures have been built in

Canada. Design provisions have been available for over a decade and the slow acceptance of

the system may be, in part, due to a design process which could he perceived as complicated.

Improv-ement of code provisions, facilitation of design procedures and increased confidence

in the aseismic behaviour of eccenttically braced &antes (EBFs) would conttibute to

increasing the popularity of the system among praeticing engineers and extending its use in

seismica1ly active regions.

This thesis investigates an approach to the seismic design of eccentrica1ly braced frames in

which ooo-linear rime history analysis is incorporated into the design process. The study will

demonstrate that this alternative design method is feaSlble and cao lead to improved seismic

response of the system when compared to design based 00 current Canadian design

procedures. The investigation was conducted in two parts. In the fust part of the study, an

attempt was made to develop a simple and efficient design procedure that could eventually

be used by practicing engîneers, either as an alternative design method or in combination

with current design praetice. In the second part of the study, the analytical tools developed

were used to funher investigate and enhance the understanding of seismic behaviour of

EBFs.

Previous studies on seismic behaviour and analysis of EBFs that provided the basis for the

present research are discussed in this Chapter. The development of seismic design

requirements is outlined along with details of cw:rent Canadian design procedures. The

e..uent to which these design procedures yield structures with desirable response is examined

and the motivation to explore alternative design approaches is discussed.

1-1

Page 30: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

1.1 Background on EBFs

The EBF an be considered as a hybrid structural system that combines the stiffness of

conventional concenttically braced frames with ductility and energy dissipation capacity of

conventional moment resisting frames. This combination of high stiffness with e.~cellent

ductility and energy dissipation capacity is the most attractive fearure ofEBFs for earthquake

resistant design.

Figure 1.1 iIlusttates some typical EBF configurations. The distinguishing feature of the

system is the way in which braces are connected to the beam such that a portion of the

beam, called the link, is defined. The link is the key element in the ductile behaviour. In a

well-designed system, inelastic activity and energy dissipation are restticted primarily to these

elements, which are detailed to sustain large inelastic deformations without loss of sttength.

The length of the link, e, is a critical parameter affecting the inelastic behaviour of the link

because the yielding mechanism, the energy dissipation capacity and the ultimate failure

mechanism are all closely related to it. For very shon links, the shear dominates inelastic

behaviour, whereas for longer links, the flexure dominates. The inelastic behaviour of shear

links is generally considered more reliable and predietable than that of flexural links, and

their application in EBFs is preferred.

During severe overloads, links act as ductile fuses and limit forces transmitted to other

members of the frames. Columns, braces and beam segments outside the links are expected

to respond primarily elastically without e.xperiencing instahility. Preclusion of less ductile

modes of failure, such as hrace or column buckling is an important factol in achieving stable

hysteretic hehavioUI of this system.

1.2 Review ofprevious experlmental and analytical studies

1.2.1 Experimental studies

Extensive experimental and analytical Iesearch was undertaken at University of Califomia,

Berkeley in the 1980's by Popov and bis co-workers. After verifying the concept of eccenttic

1-2

Page 31: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

bracing for seismic loads on small fnunes, studies were direeted towards investigating the

cyclic behaviour of individual short shear links (Hjelmstad and Popov, 1983; MaIley and

Popov, 1984). Kasai and Popov (1986a) formulated criteria for Iink web buckling control

under cyclic loads. The studies that followed (Rides and Popov, 1987a) concentrated on

cyclic behaviour of short links in EBFs with composite floors. A series of tests camed out

by Engelhardt and Popov (1989,1992) provided deeper understanding of behavioUI of EBFs

\Vith long links.

In addition to component testing, a full-sÎ2e EBF was tested in Tskuba, Japan (Roeder et al,

1987) as well as a O.3-scale replica on a shaking table at Berkeley (Whittaker et al. 1987). Both

structures showed excellent overaIl behavioUI when subjected to severa! severe ground

motions.

The principal findings of these tests were outlined by Popov and EngeIhardt (1988), and cao

be summarized as follows:

(i) Shear yielding mechanisms of short links are preferred to jlexural yielding

mechanisms oflong links.

Figure 1.2 illustrates typica1 distribution of bending moment rvr, shear force V and a.-cial force

P in the 1ink beam of a chevron configured frame. The link is commonly subjected to high

shear forces along the encire length, to high end-moments and to low a.~ force. For short

links, the shear force will reach the ultimate shear resistance while end moments are still

below the tlexural resistance, thus the link yields in shear. Since the shear force in the link is

constant, inelastic shear strains are quite unifonnly distributed along the length, which

permits the deve10pment of large link defonnations without e..xcessively high local strains.

The ine1astic shear rotation, y, is defined as the relative angle of rotation between the link

and beam segments outside the link, assuming the rigid-plastic collapse mechanism

illustrated in Fig 1.3.

1-3

Page 32: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

For long Iinks, the situation is the inverse, and flexural hinges form at the link ends when

moments reach the ultimate link flexura1 resistance. The development of inelastic link

rotation is accompanied by very high fle.~ straÏns at link ends, which in tum cao lead to

premature fallure of the link by fracture of the link flange at relatively low inelastic rotations.

Shear yielding on the other hand, inhibits development of such e."<cessive flexural straÏns.

(il) [nelastie web buckling in shear links leads to signifieant loss in load-earrying

eapaeity and energy dissipation. Web buckling can be substantially delayed by

reinforeing the web with stiffeners.

Web buckling was identified as the most appropriate limit state to coosider for design, since

the buckling is the direct cause of deterioration of the link hysteretic hehaviour, and post­

buckling behaviour and failure are difficult to prediet.

Figs 1.4 Ca) and (b) illustrate the hysteretic behaviour of shear link specimens with and

without stiffeners, under quasi-staticaIly applied cycles of increasing relative end

displacements. The pinched hysteretic [oops seen in Fig 1.4 (a) indicate poor eoergy

dissipation and ductility. The specimen with stiffeners maintained full hysteretic loops over

the large number of severe loading cycles which demonstrates e."{cellent energy dissipation

capacity. Improvements in hysteretic behaviour due to the presence of the stiffeners were

aIso observed for flexurallinks.

(iii)Properly stiffèned shear links can aehieve greater energy dissipation and larger

inelastie defOrmations than f/exural links

Hysteresis loops obtained for a stiffeoed fle."<UnÙ link specimen illusttated in Fig 1.5, and for

a shear link specimen shown in Fig. 1.4(b), clearly show a much larger poteotial for energy

dissipation in shear links. The difference cao also he observed in maximum inelastic

rotations achieved The experiments demonsttated that shear link rotations under

1-4

Page 33: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

monotonically increasing loading could reach up to 0.20 rad without significant IOS5 in

strength. When subject to eyclic loading, the properly stiffened shear Iink attained inelastic

shear rotations, Ymax, of up to ±0.10 rad under cyclic loa~ while the flexurallinks developed

maximum ine1a5tic rotation capacity of around O.OSSrad It was also demonstrated that the

well-stiffened shear link could sustain the range of inelastic shear rotations, max y r:ange, of

0.1Srad. y rmgt: is defined as the sum of maximum positive and maximum negative inelastic

shear rotation.

(iv) Shear links strain-harden and the achieved ultimate shear strengths are in general

forty to fifty percent or more larger thon the initial shear yieldforce Vp

Many experiments, conducted primarily on shear links, have demonstrated ultimate link

strengths significandy higher than yield values. This overstrength cao be attributed to (a)

strain-hardening, (b) effects of composite floor systems and (c) actual yield stress of steel

being higher than the specified yield stress. The actual observed ultimate strength of links

was frequently 40 ta 50 percent greater than the yield strength, and sorne shear links

subjected to very large eyclic ine1astic rotations develaped ultimate shear sttengths of even

Iarger magnitudes, exceeding twÏce the yield sttength. For tlexural links, however,

experiments showed somewhat lower overstrength factors both for shear force and hending

moment.

(v) Interaction of shear and moment can he neglected when predicting the inelastic

behaviour ofthe Unie.

The above implies that, even in the presence of the high shear forces, the full plastic

moment can he developed, detennined on basis of plastic section modulus of the whole

section, rather than on flanges only. These experimental results contradict predictions from

simple plastic theory, but this finding was confinned in aIllink tests. Neglecting moment­

shear interaction pennits significant simplifications in analysis and design of links.

1-5

Page 34: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LlTERATURE REVIEW

(vi) Il is recommended thatfor shear links, the link length should not exceed 1.6Mp''Vp-

Fig. 1.6 illustrates forces acting on an isolated link, and the relationship between bending

moments and shear force based on static equilihrium. If end moments are eqWi4 and

perfecdy plastic conditions are assumed (i.e. no sttain-hardening and no moment-shear force

interaction)t then e =2MpN p represents the dividing link lengili between shear and flexura1

links. However, the significant strain hardening that develops in shear links affects bath the

shear force and the bending momen~ the latter causing large flexural strains at the link ends.

The experimental findings indicate that ta limit these strains, the end moments should not

exceed ta 1.2Mp• If the link is assumed ta achieve a shear force of 1.sVP' this results in e =

1.6l\Ip/Vp' It is expected that the links with length smaller than this value will exhibit shear

yielding.

(vii) Axial force in the link can cause significant deterioration in link behaviour. The

longer the finie, the more severe the deterioration. Links should he therefore selected

to minimize the axialforce, or e/se the length ofthe link should he decreased

Figs. 1.7 (a) and (b) illustrate the hysteretic behaviour of two identical specimens, one loaded

oaly with cyclic shear force, and the other with bath shear and axial cyclic force. The

presence of the axial force clearly led to the deterioration of inelastic rotational capacity and

energy dissipation. The frame geometry has significant influence on the level of the axial

force in the link. For a symmetric chevron configuration, illustrated in Fig 1.1 (a), the axial

force is practically zero. On the other hand, significant axial force May be introduced into

links in the frame configuration illustrated in Fig 1.1 (b).

If the axial force in the Iink is unavoidablet then the impact of the axial force must be

accounted for by reducing the length of the link, as weil as shear and bending resistance of

the link. However this is ooly significant when the axial force in the link, Pft exceeds by 15

percent or more the link squash load (AFy).

1-6

Page 35: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LlTERATURE REVIEW

12.2 Analytical studies

Accurate and efficient modelling of cyclic ine1astie link behaviour is required to perfonn

starie and seismie analysis of EBF. Analytica1 studies have mainly concenttated on

developing sucb a modeL The initial fonnulations (Roeder, 1977; Ymg, 1982; Hjelmstad,

1983) were not fuIly suceessful in capturing aIl relevant characteristics of link behaviour in

the elastic and inelastic domains. This line of research oJ1rnioated in the development of the

analytical model by Rides and Popov (1987b, 1994). This e1ement suecessfully models shear

and flexural yielding and includes anisotropie strain hardening, consisting of tlexura1

kinemaric hardening with combined isotropie kinematic shear hardening, as observed in

experimental behaviour.

The element is a single-component mode! and consists of a linear elastic beam with

nonlinear hinges at each end, as illusttated in Fig. 1.8. Each hinge has zero length and

consists of three subhinges capable of developîng shear and flexural deformations. AlI axial

defonnations are confined to the elastie beam. lnitially the e1ement stiffness is that of the

elastic beam. Subsequendy the combination of shear and moment causes hinges to yie1d, and

reduetion of element stiffness OCCUIS.

Each subhinge has an assocÏated yie1d surface and arranged as illusttated in Fig. 1.9. The

rigid-plastic force-deformarion relarionship for a series of subhinges is combined to produce

a multilinear strain-hardening function for each hinge, and thus for the whole element. Sïnce

shear yie1ding is not significandy influenced by bending moments in the case of the short

links, a simplification of the yielding surface as shawn in Fig. 1.10 is possible. In addition,

the axial deformations of the Iink are not considered in this fonnulation, as a low axial force

is a design objective.

A number of studies that followed investigated dynamic response of various EBF using the

developed analytical tools. Relevant findings of these "numerical experiments" are addressed

later in this Chapter.

1-7

Page 36: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REV1EW

Ramadan and Ghobarah (1995) developed a similar model for the computer code DRAIN­

2DX (prakash and Powell, 1992). 1bis mode! uses elements currendy available in the

element library, with special modifications made to mode! adequately isotropic sttain­

hardening.

The analysis in the study reported in this thesis was carried out using the shear link element

fonnulated by Rides and Popov (1987b, 1994) implemented inta a non-linear time-history

program ANSR-l ~[ondkar and Powell, 1975).

1.3 Design ofEBFs

The experimental and analytical research discussed above provided the basis for practical

applications and together served in the development of code provisions for EBF. In 1988,

the Structural Engineers Association of CaIifomia (SEAOC) completed the update of

seismic provisions for buildings which included EBFs. With sorne minor revisions, these

recommendations were incorporated in the 1988 Uniform Building Code (UBC). In paral1el

to this, tentative provisions for the design of EBFs were aIso included in the 1985 edition of

the National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP). In 1990, the American

Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), within its Load and Resistance Factor Design

(LRFD) Specifications, published the most complete and up-to-date provisions for EBF

design at the tîme. These design requirements were later updated (AISC, 1992, 1997).

Development of New Zealand and Canadian seismic design requirements was large1y based

on O.S. practice. In New Zealand, the provisions first appeared in 1989 New Zealand steel

structures Standard. In Canada, design requirements for EBF were fust included in 1989, as

a part of an Appendi'IC to CSA-S16.M89.

1.3.1 Design philosophy and procedures

The strength and ductility of a properly designed EBF are direcdy related to the sttength and

duetility of the links. Forcing the yielding to occur in, and to be confined to, ductile 1ink

elements is the primary goal of EBF design.

1-8

Page 37: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

Capacity design concepts provide a practical methodology to realize this objective. In this

approach, links are sized for factored earthquake loading specified by a design code. Other

members of the frame are seleeted to resist the forces generated by fully yielding and strain

hardening links; that is, for the capacity of the links. In doing so, links are made the weakest

element of the frame. Two important aspects should be kept in mind. Firsdy, links must be

desÎgned and detailed to sustain the yielding in a stable ductile manner. Secondly, an effort

should be made to select Iink sections with resistances exceeding the design forces by only a

sma1l margin, as design forces in the other members of the frame are directIy related ta the

link beam resistance.

Sizing members in an EBF to meet these design objectives is best acrueved by use of plastic

design procedures. One such procedure, based on the portal method of analysis, was

proposed by Kasai (1986b). Figure 1.1 1 illustrates the method to find the link shear force for

a Chevron-type of eccentric bracing. Once the link sections are selected, the forces in other

members of the frame can be detennined using statics. Amplification factors are applied ta

the link yield resistance ta account for the link strain-hardening. The magnitudes of these

factors are discussed in the next section within the framework of Canadian design

requirements for EBF. The frame geometry has critical impact on the magnitudes of axial

forces in braces and outer beam segments. The brace inclination angle directIy affects the

le,"el of the a.~ force in the outer beam segments; the flatter the brace, the larger the axial

force in the beam. Excessive a.xial forces in the outer beam segment can therefore be

avoided by using steeper braces.

In addition ta high axial forces, large bending moments are transferred ta outer beam

segments from the link end. Maintaining the sttength and stability of the beam under these

loading conditions becomes difficult and in sorne cases, limited yielding of these members

May he unavoidable. Engelhardt and Popov (1989) bave demonstrated that this situation cao

he accepted if the stability of the outer beam segment is assured through adequate lateraI

bracing. In this case, the brace-to-link beam conneetion bas ta resist moments, and the

combined flexural resistance of the beam and the braee must he adequate to pennit full

development of the link end moment. This is an interesting design option since it avoids the

1-9

Page 38: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1. INTRODUCTION AND UTERATURE REVIEW

need to strengthen the beam outside the link while not overly increasing the brace section

s1Zes.

If no significant yielding or instability occurs in the outer beam or brace, the ultimate link

end moment is distributed between the two members in proportion to their dastic flexural

stiffness. The axial forces can have a significant effect on the flexural stiffness of both

members. An dastic analysis typically shows that the beam cames 80-95% of the link end

moment. The moments in braces in this case are very small compared to those that might be

generated if the yielding of the beam occurs. Note that the outer beam segment and brace

must be treated as beam-columns in all stability and sttength verifications.

In the design of columns, gravity loads have to be considered in addition to the loads

generated by links. The application of the capacity design approach is no longer

straightforward, as the capacity design forces in columns are affected not ooly by one link,

but by all the links above the level in consideration. Since it is unlikely that aIl the links will

attain the ultimate force simultaneously, predictïng axial forces in columns requires

considerable judgement.

After sizing the members, the rotation demand on the links must be checked to insure that

the required frame ductility can he attained. Energy dissipation mechanisms, constructed by

assuming rigid plastic behaviour of the frame members, can be used to estimate the plastic

rotation demand on the links. Figure 1.3 illustrates the collapse mechanism for the Chevron­

braced configuration and gives the relationship between the overall storey drift angle, 9, and

the inelastic rotation angle y. According to this mechanism, the link rotation angle, whether

arising from flexural or shear yielding, depends entirely on the maximum storey drift and the

geometry of the structure.

1.3.2 Canadian design procedure for EDF

Canadian requirements for seismic design of EBFs are provided in NBCC (1995) and eSA

(1994). Structural detailing provisions given in CSA (1994) are hased on U.S. practice (AISe

1-10

Page 39: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

1992) with a number of modifications for Canadian conditions. Relevant exttacts from CSA

and NBCC design requirements are given in Appendi~A.

For severe seismic regions, it is convenient to select a trial design on the basis of seismic

loading and duetility requirements, and subsequendy verify the resistance of frame members

for ail other load combinations at the ultimate limit state. For zones of low seismic load, the

reverse may he more appropriate.

The design procedure in the Canadian standard follows the principles of capacity design.

Link beam sections are selected to have adequate factored shear resistance CYr=cPO.55~Fyt

where cP=O.9) for forces introduced by a factored NBCC seismic load. An amplification

factor of 1.5 is applied to the link factored resistance for the calculation of axial forces and

moments in braces and beam segments outside of the link. AIl members of the frame other

than links are assumed to develop their nominal resistances (cP=1.0).

T 0 predict the axial force in columns, the Canadian standard specifies an amplification factor

of 1.25 instead of 1.5 used in the design of braces and outer beam segments. The cumulative

force in the columns is based on the summation of link forces at allievels above the one in

consideration, and it includes appropriately factored gravity loading.

The inelastic link rotation angle y, is determined following the procedure illustrated in Fig

1.1, with the storey drift, â, taken as 0.5 times the inelastic storey drift under factored

earthquake loarling. The inelastic drift is obtained by multiplying the elastic storey drift by a

force reduction factor, R (R=4.0 for EBFs). The ca1culated values of y are then compared to

limits specified in the Standard which are a fonction of the link length. For example, for

short links (e<1.6M/VJ 'Y must not exceed 0.09 rad. Ibis step completes the "ductility"

phase of the design of EBF.

The prelimioary design sections chosen above are then checked for "strength" and

"stiffness"; that is, for the ultimate and serviceability limit sza~es under aIlload combinations,

including wind and earthquake forces. If link beams are modified in this process, members

1-11

Page 40: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

J. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

of the frame other than links have ta be verified for increased forces generated by newly

selected link sections, and redesigned ifnecessary.

1.4 Evaluation ofCanadian design procedure

In arder to evaluate the degree ta wmch the present design procedure acmeves the desired

behaviour, severa! EBFs were designed for different locations in Canada (seismic Zones 3

and 5), and their inelastic response was examined when subjected ta severe ground motions.

Details of this study were reported by Koboevic and Redwood (1997). The Chevron-type

bracing configuration was adopted as it avoids problems associated with connection of link

to column. Attention was restricted to shor4 shear links for reasons explained in previous

sections.

1.4.1 Response of the links

The response of the links was examined in terms of maximum shear force developed,

ma.xim.um inelastic shear rotation, and location of inelastic activity along the frame height. It

was found that, for a number of ground motions conesponding to Zone 5, higher forces

and deformations developed in the upper storeys of the frame and e.xceeded the values

anticipated in the design process.

While the magnitudes of Iink shear forces and defonnations were comparable with findings

in previous studies, the location of damage was not consistent. Earlier studies of EBF

response reported a concentration of link inelastic activity in the Iower storeys of the frame,

which is contrary to the present findings. The inspection of selected link sections of earlier

frames studied by Rides and Popov (1987b) and Rieles and Bolin (1991) indicated 000­

uniform proportioning of the links. The ratio oflink resistance to demand, a, (a=V/Vdwas

oot uniform over the height of the structure. Higher values of a were ohserved in upper

storeys, and the damage was consistendy greater in lower storeys. Larger values of Cl in the

top links may he necessary, since the design of these members could be governed by

different requirements (gravity load, satisfaction of Class 1 section requirements, selectïng a

pure shear link etc.)

1-12

Page 41: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

Popov et al. (1992) pointed out that incorrect proportioning of links (non-uniform

distribution of a over the height) might yield dUs undesirable structural behaviour with

energy dissipation and large inelastic deformation concenttated in ooly a few storeys.

Achieving uniform distribution ofa should thus be an important design objective.

Design of an eight storey EBF in Zone 5 (Koboevic and Redwood,1997) was done in strict

conformity with this recommendation. Although the energy dissipation WaS better

distributed between the links in different storeys, the top storey link still developed excessive

shear forces and deformations. These results show trends similar to those reported by Popov

et al. (1992) for six and ten storey frames which were designed to have uniform a (see Fig.

1.12). Popov et al. conduded that the results obtained indicate improvement in behavior

compared to EBF with non-uniform distribution of a, but it is questionable if the

effectiveness of this requirement can be fully proven. It seems that, at least for the systems

of this particular storey height, there is a potentially larger concentration of inelastic activity

at top storeys, in spite of unifonn proportioning of the links.

1.4.2 Response ofother members of the frame

The study of the frames designed following Canadian design procedures also indicated

overload in other members of the frame, mosdy in the upper storeys. The overload of

columns and braces is particularly a concem, as avoiding instability of these members is a

prerequisite for stable hysteretic behaviour of EBFs.

In spite of a large amount of experimental and analytical research camed out on EBFs, little

cao be found in the literature on the overall behaviour of the system. Even when efforts

were made to address tlùs issue (popov et al. 1992, Rides and Bolin 1990, 1991), reported

results still mainly addressed the response in terms of link behaviour, while less attention was

given to the response of the other members of the frame. It is not documented if the

desirable response of these members was achieved and if so, to what extent the response of

the link was sensitive to the choice of brace and column sections. Results reported in

Koboevic and Redwood (1997) indicate the potential for unsati"factory seismic behaviour of

columns and braces designed following the current Canadian procedure. For several

1-13

Page 42: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/./NTRDDUCTIDN AND LITERATURE REVIEW

earthquake records, top tier columns and braces of the frame studied e.'Chibited loss of

stability.

Reasons for the inadequate column response can be partially attrihuted to the following:

(i) The overstrength factor of 1.25 applied to the faetored link resistance V,. does not seem

to be adequate for columns in upper tiers. Even if the link response overloads did not

exceed the design value of 1.5VrJ it could he anticipated that the columns in the upper

storeys would be overloaded, since they are designed using the lower amplification

factor. While this is a reasonable assumption for lower columns, it is unconservative for

columns at the top two or three storeys.

(u) The results of the analysis indicated significant column end moments, which arise from

relative storey movements and column continuity. The moments occurring

simultaneously with maximum axial force were found to be as high as 36% of the

column bending resistance near the top. Ma..ximum response axial forces were very close

to the desÎgQ forces, and the magnitude of end moments was sufficiendy large to explain

the column distress.

Although the assumption that columns are continuous avec the height is realistic, the

Canadian standard considers ooly axial force for design of columns in EBFs. It would he

desirable ta incorporate the moments into the design process, but there is little available

guidance in determining their magnitudes. Kasai and Han (1997) address the question of

inclusion of moments in "ductility" phase of column design in EBF. They propose that the

following expression be satisfied in column design:

[1.1] Cr=::;; D.8SC,

where Cr is the column compressive force arising from link yield and gravity load and Cr is

the nominal compressive resistance. Equation (1.1) refleets the observation that the

contribution ofmoment to the axial force-moment strength interaction is statistica1ly at most

1-14

Page 43: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REYIEW

15% for the columns of Chevron-type EBFs. This recommendation is based on resul~ of

non-linear time-history analysis condueted for Chevron-type of EBF bracing with different

configurations and dynamic characteristics, for four earthquake records (Kasai and Goyal,

1992; Kasai and Han, 1997). This behaviour is examined in greater detaillater in this thesis.

1.5 Objectives of the research program

The study discussed in the above section indicated possible deficiencies of the design

approach presently in use in Canada. Although the principles of capacity design were

applied, the structures did not always e."{hibit the desired behaviour.

The objective of this research project was to identify ways of improving design procedures

for EBFs to achieve a more desirable overall seismic response. To realize this objective, an

approach to design was proposed in which non-lïnear time-history analysis was incorporated

into the design process. The efforts were concentrated on two specifie goals. The first was to

develop an improved design procedure, simple and efficient, that could be used alone or in

combination with existing codified requirements for seismic design of EBFs. The second

was to make use of the analytical tools developed to study further seismic behaviour of this

structural system and consequendy make recommendations to improve the design procedure

currendy used in Canada.

1.6 Organization of the thesis

The thesis consists of seven cbapters. Cbapter 1 bas presented the background on seismic

behaviour, design and analysis of eccentrically braced frames, reviewed basics of the current

Canadian design procedure, and defined objectives of the study. In Chapter 2, the proposed

designed procedure is outlined, and the computer programs, developed to implement the

proposed metho~ are presented. Chapter 3 reports on the study of the sensitivity of the

proposed design procedure to the choice of the initial structure. Chapter 4 describes the

methodology to select the appropriate earthquake record for use in the design procedure.

Chapter 5 illusttates the application of the procedure for four, eight and fourteen storey

frames. The developed roois are then used ta investigate further the behaviour of EBF, and

1-15

Page 44: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/. INTRODUCTION AND LITERATURE REVIEW

the findings are presented and discussed in Chapter 6. Finally, Chapter 7 su.mma.rizes the

study undertaken and presents conclusions and recommendations for use of the results of

this work in future and ongoing research efforts.

1-16

Page 45: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Ca) (b)

Fig. 1.1 Typical EBF configurations

0 1 [j01 ~-

h

1·L

Fig. 1.2 Typical force distributions in linkbeams of EBFs under lateralload

1-17

Fig. 13 Rigid-plastic coIlapse mechanism

Page 46: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

------- .. - - -~ ~ - -----200

~ 100

200

-zoo

(a)

_ 100

"-~ 0 1----I---I-...-+-+--f-4--IJ-+---1

'"z...-100

Fig. L4 Hysœretic behaviour of (a) unstiffened shear Iink; (h) stiffened shear Iink(after Popov and Engelhardt, 1988)

1_ e ~I

~ ( 11===============11 ) ~V V

Ve -Ma +~

5I'[C 5..•• I.U~

~,.~ : '-._"1

1 •

1 1: r'.

le

100

·,oc.'0 •• OJ: ... ":1

(bl ~, ....r.

ie. 0

1

Fig. lS tfysteretic behaviour of stiffenedflexurallink (after Popov et al, 1989)

Fig. 1.6 Starie equilibrium of link(after Popov et Engelhardt, 1988)

50 (h)

.. ---'

en0..~ 0

> r-

i

-50 u....-.-~,--1..--.-'--L--J----..&-~,1-1 0

S(IN)

(h)

Fig. 17 Shear links with WleQUal end moments with (a) no axial force; (h) axial force(after Popov et Engeihardt, 1988)

1-18

Page 47: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Extema1 DodeElastic beam

tema1 node

r Hinge at Dode 1

bjExtemal ocde~

Ci)~-----4f

~ Internal node

Subhinges JFig. L8 Link element with inelastic subhinges

F 6F1 Asubsequent yidd points

.----.--=.:__. l------- _a-I~

M

Fig. L9 Subhinge yield surfaces with resulting hinge force-deformation response

1-19

Page 48: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

v

~

~

~

~

~

Lllr

.

Fig. LlO (a) Uncoupled yield surfaces for subhinges

M

t4V p

1.26 V p

1.0 V p

(a)

Kv~

K"'l =GA·le

K \': =0.03 KYI

KVJ =O.015KVJ

K n =0.002K VI

ye

1.2M p

t.UMp

t.OM p

Sym.

Me.-- ~~, KUI=6B/e

..,4;•• --iiIM-) Kil: =0.01 K III

1 e 114 .. 'KIG=0.015Ku,

KMI =0.002K 1011

e

(b)

Fig. LlO Force-deformarion relarionships for (a) shear and (b) flexure to mode!kinematic hardening of the links, after Rides et al (1994)

1-20

Page 49: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 2

OUTLINE OF THE PROPOSED PROCEDURE ANDDEVELOPMENT OF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

......iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiililliiiiiiiiiiiili_iiiiiIIiiiiiiiiiiiiililiiiiiiiiliiiiiilliiiliiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiiiliiiiiiiliili

In this Chapter, the proposed procedure for seismic design of eccentrically braced frames is

presented. The approach is based upon the seismic response of the frame members obtained

from non-lïnear time-history analysis (NLTHA). A method is developed to iocorporate

NLTHA directIy ioto the design process. Basic steps of the proposed procedure are

outlined. Discussion is then directed towards the analytical tooIs developed to improve the

efficieney of the procedure and enable its praetica1 application.

2. 1 Introduction

In order ta achieve a more satisfactory seismic design for Chevron-type eccenttic bracing, it

is clear that new design requirements must he imposed, io addition to those presently

specified in the provisions of the Standard. These need to account for the following:

(Q the inadequaey of the 1.25 oversttength factor when applied to the upper column tiers

(u") the high shear forces and deformations developed in the links, especia1ly in the upper

storeys

(m") the moments induced in columns

A modification to the design process to overcome these deficiencies is proposed. An

iterative process is used, incorporating the evaluation of dynamic responses in the selection

of frame members. The response parameters are obtained from non-lïnear time history

2-1

Page 50: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOF ANALYTICAL rooLS

analysis. To date, this is the most sophisticated analysis technique available for modeling the

building systems and investigating their dynamic response. Very detailed infonnation on the

structural response parameters can be obtained if the strUctural and material behaviour is

realistically modeled and the ground motion input is adequately represented. These are

important aspects to consider when assessing the accuracy of the results obtained.

While the NLTHA bas been often used in research applications and for verification of

simpler analysis techniques, seldom bas the effort been made to incotporate it directly into

the design process. With emerging concepts of performance-based seismic engineering, it

can he expected that the roIe of NLTHA in design applications will significantly increase in

the future.

2.2 Basic steps of the proposed design procedure

The proposed design procedure is summarized as follows:

(i) The preliminary sizing of the frame members is carried out fÏrst. Links sections are

selected to bave the adequate inelastic shear resisrance ta support faetored NBCC

seismic load. Other members of the frame are designed for Code specified loads.

(ii) Non-linear rime history analysis is conducted next for a selected earthquake record.

Links are always modeled as inelastic elements and 50 can be the outer beam segments,

since sorne yielding in these members may he acceptable. Columns and braces are

modelled as elastic elements, since avoidance of distress in these elements is a design

objective.

(ili) The response of members for which no yielding or loss of stability is admissible is then

examined at every rime step for which the output is provided. If at any instant, the

combination of moment and axial force inttoduced by earthquake exceeds the section

resistance, the member is redesigned.

2-2

Page 51: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLlNE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOF ANALITlCAL TOOLS

(iv) The non-linear time-history analysis is repeated for the same earthquake record with

modified section properties.

(v) Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until convergence is reached; that is, aIl the members have the

desired behaviour for the chosen earthquake records.

2.3 Development of the analytical tools

A first step towards the practical application of the previously descnbed procedure is the

development of efficient analytical tools. The procedure has been implemented by means of

three separate computer programs. These include: Ci) an analysis module, (11") a design module

and (th") a data preparation module. An programs are WIÏtten in FORTRAN and rua on a

PC-DOS platform.

An e..'<isting non-linear time-history program has been adopted as the analytical module, and

programs (11) and (th") have been written within the scope of this study to achieve the

incorporation of time-history analysis into the design procedure for Chevron-type EBF. The

programs developed are intended for use with the analysis module selected, but could be

easily adapted for sorne other similar non-linear time-history analysis program.

A full iteration consists of running programs (i), (11") and (m") in sequence as illustrated in Fig.

2.1. The three steps are automatically repeated (with user interaction when required) until

there are no more section modifications. 1bis situation indicates that the convergence is

reached.

2.3.1 The analysis module

The finite element based NLTHA program AN5R-l was chosen as the analysis module. The

modularity of the program allows for easy inclusion of new elements into the element

library. The selected version contains a beam-column element as weil as a shear link element

fonnulated by Rides and Popov (1987b, 1994). 1bis is believed ta he the most reIiable tool

presendy available ta analyze EBFs with short, shear links.

2-3

Page 52: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

In the following sections, general comments on the ANSR-l model and analysis procedure

used in this study are presented. More detailed information on modelling of particular

structures studied are given in Chapter 5.

2.3.1.1 General considerations

The modelling assumptions and the efficiency and stability of the solution procedure are

very important factors in a non-linear dynamic analysis. Recommendations from the

literature (Rides and Popov, 1987b, 1994) were followed in the present study when

modeling the links and selecting the solution schemes.

The choice of a solution scheme depends on the type and severity of non-lineariries affecting

the behaviour of the structural system. Rides and Popov (1987b) identify the material oon­

linearity as the one most predominandy affecring EBF configurations of low to moderate

height. The results reported by Koboevic and Redwood (1997) confinn that the geomettic

non-linearity arising from P-â effects did not have a significant impact for these EBF

configurations.

The integration of the incremental equations of motion in the ANSR-l program is carried

out using Newmark's method. The integration parameters ~ and y were chosen to be 0.25

and 0.5 respectively which characterize a "constant average acceleration" scheme. To

minimize erroIS and increase the accuracy of the results iterative procedures are used within

the rime step. Constant stiffness or modified Newton-Raphson iteration was adopted as the

most appropriate iterative procedure available in ANSR-l for the non-lïneat dynamic

analysis of EBFs. After numerical trials, a rime step of 0.015 was seleeted for the analysis.

Staric analysis of the frame for gravity loads preceded the dynamic analysis.

The model of each EBF consisted of lineal elements in a pianu frame, with horizontal,

vertical and rotational degrees of freedom dcfined for each node. The generallayout of the

model is shown in Fig. 2.2. The translational degrees of freedom were restrained at the

supports to simulate pinned boundary conditions. In addition, the link end nodes were

constrained to have the same horizontal displacements, which is consistent with the design

2-4

Page 53: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

objective to rninimize the axial force in a well-designed EBF. At each floor, the associated

mass was lumped at the outside nodes as illustrated in Fig. 2.2. Tributary gravity loading was

assigned at the same nodes as concentrated forces.

2.3.1.2 Modeling of the links

The links were modeled using the shear-link model developed by Rides and Popov

(1986,1994), (see section 1.2.2). To represent kinematic strain hardening, Rides and Popov

suggest that the flexural and shear capacities as well as stiffness of the subhinges be selected

so that the monotonie force-deformation response of the Iink matches that shown in Fig.

1.10 (b). The relationships illustrated in Fig. 1.10 (b) are based on experimental results, and

represent typical values observed for short links.

To model isotropie shear hardening, it is necessary to specify the values of two parameters,

â Vrtl2X and 13. The former variable represents maximum shear yield strength after complete

hardening, and the latter is a constant in units of length related to the expansion of the shear

yield surface due to isotropie hardening. VaIues for both parameters, based on experimental

results, were specified as 2.68Vp and 8.336 respectively as recommended by Rides and

Popov (1986) for steel links.

Observations from the same study were applied when modeling the damping. To minimize

excessive viscous damping shear forces from developîng in the links, leading to

unrealistically large axial forces in column and braces, a non-proportional damping concept

was adopted where the link elements were assigned oaly mass-proportional damping based

on 3 percent of critical viscous damping.

2.3.1.3 Modeling of other frame members

Beams outside the link, braces and columns Were modeled using standard two-dimensional

beam-column elements. The element considers moment-axial force interaction, accounting

for inelastic flexural deformations, but not buckling. A typical interaction surface is

illustrated in Fig. 2.3. Aexural and compressive capacities for ail the elements were taken as

equal to the nominal resistances of CSA (1994) (Le., +=1.0). Straïn hardening of 2 percent of

2-5

Page 54: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOFANALYTICAL TOOLS

elastic stiffness was assumed. Rayleigh damping was assigned based on 3 percent of critical

as recommended by Rieles and Popov (1994).

Braces and columns were always modeIled as elastic since achieving elastic response without

the loss of stability is a design goal Outer beam segments could be modelled as either elastic

or e1astic-plastic depending on whether the yielding in these elements is accepted. Conditions

under which a limited yielding may be judged acceptable were discussed in Section 1.3.1.

Both braces and beams were assumed to be pin conneeted to the columns. The intersection

of the beam and brace centerlines was assumed to coincide with the Iink end and the size of

the connection was taken into account by assigning rigid end links to braces and outer beam

segments. The effects of distributed gravity loads on the beams were examined for beams

and braces. Sïnce the program does not provide an option to specify loads between the

nodes, these effects were accounted for by defining the initial forces. 1bis is discussed in

more detaillater in Chapter 5.

2.3.2 The design module

2.3.2.1 Main functions and limitations of the program

The design module has three functions. The first one is to verify the strength and stability of

all members of the frame other than the links when subject to the forces induced by

earthquake loading. The members are examined under simultaneous values of bending

moment and axial force throughout the loading history, using the provisions of Clauses 13.8

and 13.9 of CSA (1994) and nominal resistance (,=1.0). This is a necessary step in the

verification of the seismic response for braces and columns, since the stability of these

members can not be checked direcdy using the analysis module.

The second function of the program is to enable the selection of new sections if the

comhination of the forces in the element exceeds the nominal resistance. Two different

modeling situations cao he tteated, namely Case 1, where an the elements other than links

are expected to have elastic response without 10ss of stability, and Case 2, where yielding is

2-6

Page 55: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOFANALYTICAL TOOLS

pennitted in outer heam segments. This phase requires the user's intervention to choose the

section from the list provided by the program. Ta ensure economical selection, only the

sections with response ratios (ratios of earthquake-induced loads to resistances) in the range

between 0.85 and 1.00 are listed.

The third function is to verify whether the unmodified sections are well utilized It is

assumed that the section with the response ratio of at least 0.85 cao he considered

economical. The response ratio is calculated for the maximum forces from the rime-history

analysis as weIl as the maximum forces obtained from the static analysis for the goveming

load combinations. The latter is clone to ensure that the selected sections will provide

adequate strength. In the case of an unecononùcal section, the user has an option to select a

new section with response ratio in the desired range.

The program has been developed for the frame configuration illusttated in Fig 2.2. The

oumber of storeys cao vary and riering can he imposed. It was assumed that one-step starie

analysis for gtavity loads preceded the dynamic analysis.

The ANSR-l program provides separate output files for different types of elements. As two

types of elements were used to model the members of the frames studied, two output files

containing the rime history of element forces are provided; one for the link elements and the

other one for the beam-column elements. One of the assumprions in the development of the

desÏgn program was that the latter file contains only results for the outer beam. segments,

braces and columns. If sorne additional beam-column elements are specified, such as for

example a fictitious column to account for p-~ effects, adjustments need to be made. Instead

of modifying the program, the output file cao be preprocessed to eliminate anyadditional

elements.

2.3.2.2 Databases

To facilitate the use of the design program, severa! section datahases have been prepared

These databases contain the selection of sections listed in the Handbook of Steel

Construction (CrSC,1997). The format in which data is presented is illustrated in Appendix

2-7

Page 56: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

B. In view of recent cessation ofW shape production in Cana~ structural sections available

from both Canadian and non-Canacfian mills are included Those sections that were

previously available oaly from Canadian steel mills are now available from other producers.

AIl sections seleeted in the present study are assumed to be made of G40.21.350W steel with

specified minimum yield strength, Fy, equal to 350MPa. A preference was established in the

choice of the section shapes for different frame member groups. Link beams were chosen

from wide t1ange (W) sections, columns were selected as cither W sections or welded wide

flange (WWF) sections, and braces were designed as hollow structural sections (HSS). Thus,

three section databases were compile~ one for each member group. Alternative databases

may be created by a user and other schemes regarding prefened section shapes may be

chosen as along as only one type of section shape is selected for a member group.

The requirements gtven 1Il Clause 27.6 of CANjCSA-S16.1-94 regarding the class of

sections for different member groups in EBFs have affected the compilation of the

databases. Clause 27.6.1.1 stipulates that the link beam has to satisfy Class 1 requirements.

Sînce for the symmetric chevron type of eccentric bracing, no axial force is expected in the

~ the class of the section for the link is defined for bencling ooly. Thus, ooly the Class 1

sections in bending were retained in the database for link beam sections.

Even when the selected link beam section complies with Class 1 requirements in the link

segment, this is not necessarily the case for the outer beam segment. Although it is the same

section, the outer beam segment generally experiences large axial forces in addition to

bending moment and this can affect the class of the section. The final verification of the

section class for the outer beam segment including the effect ofaxialload is made by the

design program.

The databases for brace and column sections were assembled in a similar manner. Clause

27.6.10 specifies that braces should comply with Class 1 or 2 requirements. No explicit

requirements are defined regarcling the class of the section for columns, but it was assumed

in this study that the column sections should aIso be Class 1 or 2. The sections in the

2-8

Page 57: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTUNE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOF ANALYT/CAL rooLS

darabases for columns and braces were initially selected to be Class 1 or 2 in bending.

Similarly to beam segments outside the~ the true class of the section for those member

groups is affected by the presence of the axial load. Axial load is included in the final

verification of section class made subsequendy by the design program.

The initial limitation of sections in databases based on the cIass of the section in bending is

important for two reasons. The design program accounts for the presence of axial force

when evaluating the class of the section ooly if the element is in compression. If the axial

force is tensile, the section class is based on bending only, and the adequate section class is

provided automatically since the darabase cantains only appropriate sections. The second

rationale behind the preliminary darabase reduction is to minimize the rime a user has to

spend on database preparation, which is proportional to the number of sections included (m

the database).

2.3.2.3 Input files

Basic information required by the design program is stored in three files provided by the

user. It is presumed that the ANSR-t output file for beam-column elements is available. The

faonat of input files prepared by a user is given in Appendix B. In the following text, they

are referred to as input file 1, input file 2 and input file 3.

Input file 1 stores general information. These contain the name of the ANSR-l output file,

duration of the earthquake record, the rime interval for wlùch the output is saved, the type

of the analysis, the modeling case considered and the total number of elements required ta

respond elastically. The first and the Iast element number for beams, braces and columns

and the databases for each member group are aIso included.

In input file 2, material properties and specific data for &ame clements constrained ta have

the same cross-section are defined. The infonnation includes: the first and the last number

of element within the group with same section specificatio~ section designation, specified

minimum yield sttength, modulus of elasticity and shear modulus. In addition, the unbraced

lengths and effective length factors are defined.

2-9

Page 58: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTL/NE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOF ANALYT/CAL TOOLS

Input file 3 provides the maximum forces in the frame elements obtained from the sratic

analysis for all load combinations. As previously mentioned, one of the functions of the

design program is to verify the efficiency of the sections chosen. Data provided in input file

3 are used ta impose a lower limit on section size. For each group of elements consttained ta

have the same section, the following values are defined: axial force, bending moments at

both ends and the elastic shear force. The required inelastic shear in the Iink is also specified

and included in data for link beam elements. Note that the verification of the axial force­

moment interaction equations in the design program is based on the nominal and not on the

factored resistance of the sections (i.e. cP =1.0 instead of 0.9). Consequendy, the magnitude

of the forces given in the input file 3 should be appropriately specified ~.e., magnitudes of

forces should be divided by 0.9).

2.3.2.4 Output files

The design pIogram provides three output files. These are illustrated in Appendix B. The

sections selections obtained after each iteration are listed in output files ICa) and l(b). The

format of this file is identical to that of input file 2. The history of seleeted sections is stored

in output files 2(a) and 2(b). Output file 3 records the maximum response ratios for all

considered elements for earthquake induced forces. The critical combination of axial force

and bending moment causing the maximum response ratio and the rime of their occurrence

are also provided.

2.3.2.5 Organization and the features of the program

The flowchart of the design program is given in Appendix B. The program is sttuctured as a

base program with severa! subrourines and functions. The names of all functions and

subIoutines along with their identification numbers are indicated in the flowchart.

2.3.2.5.1 Fonctions

Five functions are used by the design program. Functions 1, 2 and 3 are related to the

calculation of the parameters in the force-moment interaction equations. These parameters

are:

2-10

Page 59: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

(1) a factor ta account for moment gradient and for second-order effeets of axial force

acting on the deformed member~ U lx

(2) a coefficient to account for the increased moment resistance of a Iaterally unsupported

segment when subject to a moment gradient, col. and

(3) the factored moment resistance of a member~ Mf"'

Function 4 evaluates the class of the section in the presence of axial compressive load. The

computation of the parameters, that is the recall of the functions~ is done at every rime step

so that the cunent combination of forces in the element is taken into account. The purpose

of function 5 is to assign the appropriate database to an element under consideration based

on infonnation provided in input file 1 and 2.

2.3.2.5.2. Subroutines

The design program has five subroutines. Subroutines 1 and 2 are used to create an internai

input file containing relevant section properties. The format of this file and a detailed

description of data is given in Appendix B. The purpose of subroutine 3 is to verify the

compliance with requirements of Clause 13.8 and 13.9 of CSA (1994) for each e1ement. 'Ibis

check is done for the combination of axial force and bending moment at every rime step for

which the output is saved. The subroutine retums the values of calculated response ratios. If

the maximum response ratio for the element under consideration exceeds the acceptable

limit (r >1.0), subroutine 4 provides a list of sections with response ratio in the desired range

(0.85 < r < 1.0) from which the user can choose. The purpose of subroutine 5 is to provide

a similar list of sections for the elements that were not modified in the iterative process and

that are considered to be underutilized ~.e., r < 0.85).

2.3.2.5.3 Basic steps of the program

In this section, the basic operations performed by the design program are described. The

discussion focuses on one e1ement at one rime step of the loading bistory.

Input file 1 is read first. 'Ibis is followed by the preparation of the intemal input file using

subroutine 1 and the input file 2. For each clement expected to respond e1astica11y without

2-11

Page 60: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OFANALYTICAL TOOLS

10ss of stability, the data are obtained from the intemal input file. The appropriate database

is detennined using function 5, and the bending moment and a.œ force are read from the

ANRS-l output file for beam-column elements. Parameters needed to check the force­

moment interaction equation are caIculated using funetions 1, 2, 3, and 4.

The response ratios for the element under consideration are evaIuated next employing

subroutine 3. If the maximum response ratio found e.~ceeds the value of one, the Iist of

sections of the right class and with response ratio in the desired range is supplied by

subroutine 4. The user can make a choice to either keep the existing section (this is a useful

option when the response ratio bas barely c..'Cceeded the limit, e.g. r=1.01) or to choose a line

from the list corresponding to the new section. If a new section is selected, the internaI input

file is immediately updated for all e!ements constrained to have the same cross section as the

element under consideration. Hence, even within the same rime step, the verification of

subsequent elements is done using realistic section properties.

The procedure is repeated for each element and for each rime step in the loading history. At

±;: end of pfutSë 1 of the program applicatio~ the final section selection is wtitten in output

file 1(a). A record of maximum response ratio for each element is aIso kept. AlI modified

sections in the list now have a response ratio within the selected limits, since the preferred

response ratio range is incorporated into the selection process.

Sections that are not changed in phase 1 may not have maximum response ratios within the

chosen economicallimits. 1bis is because the initial members were selected on the basis of

forces under static load combinations which produced more severe effects than those from

dynamic anaIysis. In phase 2 of the program application, the maximum response ratio for

the group of the elements constrained to have the same cross-section is detennined. These

are compared with maximum response ratios under static loads (the latter provided in input

file 3). If neither of the two calculated values exceeds 0.85, subroutine 5 provides a Iist of

acceptable sections with response ratios within the preferred limits. At the end of the phase

2, the final sections selected are written in output file 1(b). The maximum response ratios

2-12

Page 61: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOFANALYTICAL TOOLS

with the critical combination of bending moment and axial force induced by dynamic

earthquake loading are written in output file 3.

Note that the process of member selection could be fully automated, but the interactive

feature provided allows the user greater flexibility and the opportunity to employ engineering

judgement.

2.3.3 The data modification module

2.3.3.1 General considerations

Although the ANSR-t program is an efficient and reliable tool for non-linear time-history

analysis, it is not very user-friendly, particularly regarding the preparation of input. The

process is lengthy and tedious, with a high potential for mistakes. 1bis is a common problem

for a number of similar non-commercial programs (DRAIN-ID, DRAIN-2DX) presendy

used in research applications.

The data modification module is deve10ped to automatically update the analysis module

input file for the sections selected by the design program. It is particulat1y useful in situations

when the series of analyses has to be repeated for frames with the same geometty but

different sections. The tlowchart of the program is given in Appendix B. It should he noted

that ooly details related to the element description such as section stiffness, element yielding

surfaces and rigid offsets are dealt with. Other information including frame geometty,

solution procedure specifications, static and dynamic loads, mass and element identification

is taken from the template of the ANSR-l input file. In addition to updating the data, this

module cao aIso be used to prepare the input file for any other section selection for

Chevron-type EBF configurations.

Three input files in addition to the template of the ANSR-l input file are required to run the

data modification program. The input file 1 defines the tirst and the last element number for

beams, column and braces and identifies section databases. This file is in fact equivalent to

the input file 1 for the desÏgn program, and is described in section 2.2.2.3. The second input

2-13

Page 62: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

file is equivalent to the internal input file prepared by the design program and is readily

available once the program has been e."<ecuted. If the ANSR-l clara file is to be made for an

arbitrary section selection, a segment of the design module can he used to create input file 2.

Input file 3 contains dara describing the inclination of the braces in the frame. These are

used in updating the rigid offsets at brace-to-beam connection. The format of all files is

given in Appendix B.

2.3.3.2 Features of the program

The main idea used in developing the data modification module was to transform an ANSR­

1 template input file ioto a direct-access file. In a direct-access file each line begins with a

numerical identifier, which, when recalled, allows direct access to the line. In this way any

line that has to be updated can he easily located. Once aIl the necessary modifications have

been completed, the numerical identifiers are removed, and the updated input file is ready

for use in the analysis.

Severa! lines in the ANSR-1 input file are so called control lines. They define the main

parameters for different sections of the file including the section on geometry of the

structure, load specifications, element specification etc. These parameters can then be used

to esrablish the number of lines in different sections of the file. In order to make the dara

modification program as general as possible, the parameters from controllines are read by

the program and then used to determ.ine the numerical identifiers of the lines to update.

ModeIing of the frame is done using two types of elements, a shear 1ink element to model

links and a standard beam-column element for all other members of the frame. The

assumption is made that the element specification sections are organized in the following

arder: (1) columns, (2) outer beam segments, (3) hraces and (4) links.

Stiffness and yielding surface dara are modified for aU member groups. A characteristic

yielding surface for shear links is presented in Fig. 1.4 in Chapter 1. Figures 2.4(a) and 2.4(b)

illustrate a typical shape of the yielding surfaces for groups (2), and (1) and (3) respeetîvely.

For the links and outer beam segments the modification of the yielding surface is

2-14

Page 63: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENT OF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

straightforward and involves oaly the update of the ultimate resistances. The combination of

tensile force and bending moment is judged criticalt for the outer beam segments and the

influence of the c1ass of the section on the shape of the upper portion of the yielding surface

is neglecred. For columns and hraces the combination of compressive force and bending

moment is usually goveming, thus the shape of the yielding surface is affected by the c1ass of

the section. To account for this, the locations of points A and B (see Fig. 2.4) for member

groups (1) and (3) are aIso updated, based on the class of the section in bending detennined

automatically by the program.

For member groups (2) and (3), the data modification program aIso revises infonnation on

the size of a brace-to-beam connection. It was assumed in this study that the link ends at the

intersection of brace and heam centerlines. In general, plastic hinges in frames will not fonn

at this location but rather near the faces of the joints. This effect cao he approximated in

AN5R-t by assuming rigid, infinitely sttong connecting links between the nodes and the

element ends, as illustrated in Fig. 2.5. The length of the connecting rigid links is defined

through the element end eccentricities, which vary depending on the brace and beam

sections and the angle of inclination between them. Using data from the input files 1 and 2,

the data modification program calculates the end eccentticities for the beam and the brace in

each storey, and updates the values in AN5R-l input file.

2.3.3.3 Program limitations

The data modification program was developed for Chevron-type EBFs not exceeding 35

storeys. It can be used to either update the existing ANSR-t input file for the sections

selected by the design program, or ta assist in the preparation of the input file for an

arbittary section selection. In bath cases, the template of the ANSR-t input file must be

available, as only the parts of the file related ta the element description cao he automatically

updated.

1 If, for a given compressive load, the beam section is Class 1, the contribution of the bendingmoment ta force-moment interaction is reduced by 2S percent. This is Dot the case if the axialload istensile. Since the beams are fully laterally supported, for bath Class 1 and Class 2 sectionscombinatian of moment and tensile force will always be criticaL

2-15

Page 64: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTLINE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOF ANALYTICAL TOOLS

It is assumed that the elements of the frame are ammged in four main groups, columns,

beams, braces and links. The program requites that the beams be denoted as the second

group and the links as fourtb. Within each main group, elements can be divided into a

maximum of five subgroups. The number of subgroups is a variable specified by a user, but

it has to be equal for ail main element groups. If additional groups of elements are to be

specifiec:L their description should follow the link data. It should be noted that no provision

is made in the program to update properties of sucb additional groups.

It is further assumed that the number of stiffness types matches the number of the yielding

surfaces. For example, if two columns have the same cross-section but different effective

lengths, in general, they could be described specifying one stiffness type and two yielding

surfaces. The data modification progrant on the other hand would require specification of

two stiffness types, although the data for the two would be identical.

For member groups 2 and 3, the number of end eccentticity types is assumed to he twice the

number of stiffness types. The number of different end eccentricities types is limited by

ANSR-l to fifteen within one sub-group. Since the source code for the analysis program was

not available, it was not possible to increase this limit. Ir was decided instead to divide the

main groups of elements into subgroups and constrain the maximum. number of clements in

one subgroup to fourteen. As indicated in Fig. 2.6, in every storey, braces, columns and

outer beam segments in the left and right sides of the frame have identical stiffness type and

yield surface but a clifferent end eccentticity type. By limiting the number of the clements in

the subgroup to fourteen, the number of stiffness types and yielding surfaces is constrained

to seven, and the number ofend eccentricities types to fourteen.

2.4Summary

This Chapter bas inttoduced the proposed approach for seismic design of eccenttically

braced frames. The itetative method is based upon seismic response of the frame members,

and it incorporates non-linear time-history analysis direetly into the design process.

2-16

Page 65: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

2.0UTUNE OF PROCEDURE AND DEVELOPMENTOFANALYTICAL TOOLS

The procedure is implemented by means of three computer programs. ANSR-l was selected

as the analysis module. Two computer programs have been written to integrate non-lïnear

cime history analysis into the design procedure for the Chevron-type of eccenttic bracing.

The purpose of the design module is to examine the forces in elements introduced by

earthquake loading, compare them with resistances and choose alternative sections if

resistance is exceeded. The data preparation module is developed to revise the input for the

analysis for the sections seleeted by the design program.

A complete iteration consists of mnning the analysis module, design module and data

modification module in sequence. The three steps are automatically repeated (with user

interaction when required) until there are no more section modifications. For further details

on developed programs, inc1uding flowcharts, formats of required output files and similar,

see Appendix B.

The automated design process described in this Chapter allows rapid design ofchevron type

EBFs and produces structures that conform to the desired seismic response attributes under

the 2-:rin !l of~hquake records selected for design.

2-17

Page 66: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1 (i) ANALYSIS MODULE

1(li )DESIGN MODULE

~-~

Ci) DATA PREARATIONMODULE

Fig. 2.1 Proposed design procedure: sequence of one itteration

M

Fig. 2.3 Typical interaction surface forbeam-column element

BeL - Beam-column elementsLK - Link elements

Fig. 2.2 rvlodelling of EBF

2-18

Page 67: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

M

B

p -Class 1

-Class2

A

M

C

(a) Element group (2) (b) Element groups (1) and (3)

Fig. 2.4 Yielding surfaces for element groups (1), (2) and (3)

Rigid links

NODEj

Fig. 2.5 Modelling of rigid offsets

ST - stifness typeYT - yie/ding surface typeROT - rigid offsets type

ROTt: el. 3-4 : 0.0, -ex, 0.0, 0.0

ROT2: cl. 6-5 : 0.0, ex, 0.0, 0.0

ROT3: el. 1-4 : 0.0, -ex, 0.0, -ey

ROT4: el. 2-6: 0.0, ex, O.O,-ey

Fig. 2.6 ModeUing of beam-to-bnce cono.ection

2-19

Page 68: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 3

SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE TO INITIAL DESIGN......iiiiiiii_iiiiiiiiiiIiili__iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiilliiliiiiiiiiiiiiii_iiiiiiiiiiiiiliiliiiliii_iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii_iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii

Two important aspects need to be considered before the proposed design procedure can be

used efficiendy in practica1 applications. These are: (~ the sensitivity of the final sections

selection to the initial trial designy and (11) the selection of an earthquake record to use in the

analysis. This Chapter describes the study conducted to investigate the fonner aspect.

The sensitivity of the design procedure to initial section selection is examined for three

chevron type EBFs with fouryeight and fourreen storeys located in Zone 5. The approaches

to define the trial designs are discussed. For each &aIne height, at least two different initial

designs are used. The iterative procedure is then applied for a chosen earthquake record. The

final sets of sections obtained for each frame configuration are compared to assess the

influence of the trial design in their selection. Recommendations are then made regarding the

appropriate approach to generate the initial structure for design applications.

3.1 General considerations

Low sensitivity of the proposed iterative procedure to the choice of the initial frame

structure is desirable. Ideallyy for the same modeling assumptions and earthquake record

chosen, the convergence should always be toward a unique structure regardless of the initial

member selection. A study was can:ied out to investigate whether the initial selection

influences the member sections in the final structure designed using the iterative procedure

and if so, to what extent. Attention was a1so directed towards the identification of an

appropriate method to select the initial frame members for practical design applications.

3-1

Page 69: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE TO INITIAL DESIGN

To realize the latter objective, it was necessary to detennine logical approaches to select the

initial structure. A number of basic design requirements impose limitations on the seemingly

limitless choice of sections. In the following paragraph, seIected design criteria are discussed

in light of their impact on the selection ofsections for different member groups of the frame

This study focuses on EBFs with pure shear links and thus the following criteria should be

adopted in the design, as discussed in section 1.3.2: for a selected link length, ooly the

sections for which the ratio of factored bending resistance (MJ ta factored shear resistance

CVJ is less than 1.6 can be selected; Vr should be as close as possible ta the force demand

CV?J to limit forces transmitted to the other members of the frame; the ratio a =Vr!Vr is

maintained as constant as possible over the height of the building; the same section should

he rnaintained through the whole length of the link beam, and the link beam should he at

least Class 1 section, while columns and hraces have to comply with Class 1 or 2

requirements. In addition, the selected frame sections must provide adequate strength for aIl

serviceahility and ultimate limit states under aIl loading combinations inc1ucling wind and

earthquake, and an economical structure should result.

3.2 Selection of the trial design

3.2.1 Approaches to select a trial design

The above limitations were taken into account when defining the initial frame sections. Two

different approaches to choosing the initial design were adopted. The first approach is more

suited for studies that evaluate the adequacy of present code provisions for chis structural

system. The second approach is more appropriate for practical applications, since it is

simpler and less rime consuming for a designer.

In the fust approach, a trial design is in strict conformity with Canadian design provisions

for EBFs. Sections are selected on the basis of the seismic loacling and duetility requirements

and subsequendy verified for al1 other relevant load combinations inclucling second order

effects. The duetility design is cattied out using an EBF seismic design program (EBFSD)

deveIoped by Han, Redwood and Kasai (1997). Verification of the strength and the stiffness

3-2

Page 70: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE TO INITIAL DESIGN

of the frames for the relevant load combinations is done using program SODA (Acronym

Software Inc., 1996)). The main features of both programs are explained in more detail in

Cbapter 5. This approacb is referred to as Design Case1.

In the second approach, link beam sections are selected first to bave adequate inelastic shear

resistance for forces introduced by the NBCe seismic load. Other members of the frame are

then selected to comply with sttength and stiffness requirements. Thus, only the links fully

satisfy ductility requirements of Clause 27.6. Similarly to Design Case 1, link sections are

selected with the belp of the program EBFSD. Design of other members of the frame and

verification of seleeted link sections is then carried out by SODA. This approacb is referred

to as Design Case 2.

Previous studies of an eight-storey EBF (Koboevic and Redwood 1997) bave indicated that

in severe seismic zones it is possible ta achieve a design compliant with ail ducrility

requirements, that at the same rime has very high response ratios for forces arising from

tradirional load combinations used in strength and stiffness design. In other words, it can

happen that the differences between the initial designs obtained following these two

approaches are not too pronouncecl, and therefore the sensitivity of the procedure to the

choice of initial structure cannot he fully investigated. For these reasons, another trial design

denoted as Design Case 3 was also studied. Sections selected in this case are anticipated to

be very different frOID those of the final structure. Since mioimizing the link oversttength is

a design objective, the same link sections as those of Design Cases 1 and 2 were adopted.

For columns and hraces on the other hand, Design Case 3 assigns the same sections in ail

storeys, these corresponding to the ones required in the first storey of Design Case 2.

3.2.2 Initial member selection

3.2.2.1 Building features and loadiDg

The structures are located in Zone 5. Typical layouts and elevanons are shown in Fig. 3.1.

Gravity and seismic loading was calculated in accordance with NBeC (1995), and a snmmary

of the loads for ail three frames is given in Tables 3.1 and 3.2 respectively. The selected

building layouts and load calculanons are described in more detail in Chapter 5.

3-3

Page 71: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

J. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE ro INITIAL DESIGN

3.2.2.2 Link beam selection for initial structures

For each frame configuration studie~ 1ink beams in Design Cases 1,2, and 3 had the same

cross-sections since their selection was based on the same requirements. The chosen sections

are listed in columns (a), (c) and (e) of Table 3.3. This table also indicates the values of link

resistance-to-force demand ratio (a).

Comparing the values for a listed in columns (b), (d) and (f) of Table 3.3, two observations

can be made. The top storey link for all three configurations has somewhat greater a than

the links in other storeys. For the four and eight-storey frames, strength requirements

govemed the link design in the top storey, and this cao explain the larger section being

sdected at this location. For the fourteen-storey frame, while gravity load played a role, the

heavier top link beam was also necessary to ensure the selection of pure shear link. For the

fourteen-storey frame, a is in general larger than for the other two frame configurations.

This is mosdy the result of the attempt to have a uniform distribution of Cl over the height

of the structure.

3.2.2.3 Selection ofbraces and columns in trial design

Columns (a), (c) and (e) of Table 3.4 snmmarize the initial selection of brace and column

sections in the eight-storey frame for Design Cases 1,2 and 3 respectivdy. Sections sdeeted

for the four and fourteen starey frames are presented in columns (a) and (c) of Tables 3.5

and 3.6. For these [wo frame configurations, oaly Design Cases 2 and 3 were studied.

Selection of braces and columns was mainly based on the required strength for the

traditional goveming load combinations, including second order effects. In the case of taller

frames however, design cao be significandy influenced by sorne other requirements,

particularly inter-storey plastic drift limitations. Keeping in mind the objective of this study,

this requirement was neglected in the design of 14 storey EBF in order ta provide a

consistent comparison, based on stren~of the results for all three frame configurations.

3.3 Selection ofearthquake record and modeling assurnptions

A systematic approach ta selection of earthquake records will he discussed in Chapter 4. For

the purpose of the study discussed in this Chapter, component N21E of the Taft

3-4

Page 72: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3. SENSITIVITY DF PROCEDURE rD INITIAL DESIGN

ea.rthquake, recorded in Lincoln School on June 12, 1952 was seleeted as the input

acceleration record. In a previous study (Koboevic and Redwood, 1997) this record was

identified as one of the records causing the most severe disttess in an 8-storey sttueture

designed for Zone 5. The rime history of the record and elastic response speetrum are

illusttated in Fjgs. 3.2 and 3.3 respectively.

The analysis was carIÎed out for the situation in wbich yielding is permitted in links and

accepted to a smaller extent in outer beam segments (see 2.3.2.1). Acceptance of yield in the

outer beam segment implies that the srability of this member must be ensured. Links and

outer beam segments were therefore assumed to be fully laterally supported and could thus

he modeled as inelastic elements. Because of this modelling approach, the link beam sections

were not modified during the iterative procedure; hence, the final 1ink beam selection is

equivalent to the initial section described in Table 3.3.

Modeling of other elements and post-analysis verification for stability followed the

approaches discussed in more detail in Chapter 5.

3.4 Final section selection obtained in iterative design procedure

3.4.1 Eight storey structure

Final selection of sections obtained in the iterative procedure for aIl three design cases is

indicated in columns (b), (d), and (t) ofTable 3.4. Two iterations were necessary to converge

ta solution in Design cases 1 and 2 and three in Design case 3. The resulting designs are in

confomùty with modelled behaviour, that is, the inelastic activity is confined primari1y to the

links, limited yie1ding is observed in outer beam segments (maximum accumulated inelastic

rotation less chan 0.1 rad) and braces and columns responded elastically without 10ss of

stahility.

The final sttuctures obtained in each of the three cases show remarkable similarity. The

variation of the mass is less than 3%, and aIl structures have simiIar fundamental period

(1.86s in Design cases 1 and 2, and 1.85s in Design case 3). A somewhat heavier column

3-5

Page 73: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE ro INITIAL DESIGN

section in the top rier was selected in the Design case 3, and a smaIl difference was observed

in brace sections at leve1s 5 and 6. 1bis variation is due to the range of acceptable response

ratios set in the design module to define an economical selection. For the same combination

of loads, different sections MaY he satisfactoty and the difference in section resistances could

yield up to 25% of difference in response ranos. For example, the maximum response ratio

for the brace at level 5 in Design case 2 (HSS30SX203X8) is 0.99, while the ma.XÏlnum

response ratio of the brace at the same level in Design cases 1 and 3 (HSS30SX203XI0) is

0.86. The examination of the history of selected sections within each iteration cycle showed

that it was in faet possible to conduet the selection so as to obtain identical structures in all

three cases.

3.4.2 Four and fourteen storey structures

Final section selection for the four- and fourteen-storey structures is summarized in columns

(b) and (d) of Tables 3.5 and 3.6 respectively. For the four-storey structure, the procedure

yielded the same final design in both cases studied. The final design was obtained after five

cycles for Design case 2, and three cycles for Design case 3.

For the fourteen-storey structure, the procedure converged in three and four iterations for

Design cases 2 and 3 respectively. The two final designs had aImost identical fundamental

periods ([14=3.05s) and less than two percent difference in mass. A smaller variation of

brace sections is observed in storeys 1, 9,10 and Il for the two final designs. Analogously to

the eight-storey structure, this cao be associated with the limits imposed on response ratios

for economical reasons.

3.5 Discussion of the results

Results presented in the previous section indicate very smal1 differences in the final designs

in all cases studied for the different frame configurations. These variations are due to the

range of response ratios imposed by the design module to ensure economical section

selection. The selected sections could have up to 25 percent difference in response ratios for

the same loading conditions. The narrower the accepted range, the less difference in the final

designs would be observed. For engineering applications the observed differences are small

3-6

Page 74: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE rD INITIAL DESIGN

and can he neglected. Bearing this in mind, it can be concluded that for widely different

initial frame members, for a given geometty and earthquake record, the iterative procedure

yields the same structure. The study demonsttated that the proposed procedure is not

sensitive to the initial memher selection of the frame.

The approach leading to Design case 2 was identified to he the Most appropriate way to

select the initial structure when the iterative procedure is used as design tooL In this

approach, members are designed following common methods used in limit states design, and

only the links requite special verification for inelastic shear. A designer does not have to

apply capacity design principles to select the initial structure. The approach is practica1 and

rime saving.

T0 provide consistent comparison of results, the inter-storey drift limitation was neglected as

a design requitement in initial section selection for the fourteen-storey frame. However, if

the procedure is to be used for design of taller frames, it is recommended that inter-storey

drift limitations be incorporated into the initial member selection, since their influence on

the size of members may be significant.

The modeling case in which the elastic behaviour of outer beam segments is anticipated was

also e..xamined. This approach however led to significant increase of Iink sections, which in

tum affected the sizes of other members of the frame and resulted in heavier design.

3.6 Summary

In this Chapter, a study of the sensitivity of the iterative procedure to the initial design bas

been described. The primary objective was to detennine whether, for a given earthquake

record and frame geometty, different strUctures seleeted to initiate the iterative design

process yielded the same final design. In addition, an attempt was made to identify the Most

suitable approach to initial member selection when the iterative procedure is used as design

tooL

3-7

Page 75: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3. SENSITIVITY OF PROCEDURE TO INITiAL DESIGN

The study focused 00 four, eight and fourteeo storey EBFs located in Zone 5. For the

chosen earthquake record the iterative procedure was carried out to produce inelastic

behaviour of links and stable elastic response of braces and columns. For each frame height,

the iterative procedure was initiated for different initial structures, and the final section

selections were compared. Oo1y small variations in seleeted sections were observed, aIl

within the limits judged acceptable for engineering application. Thus, it was demonstrated

that the proposed procedure is not sensitive to the initial member selection. The approach to

initial member selection, in which the columns, braces and outer beam segments are seleeted

according to sttength and stiffness requirements and the links are verified to have adequate

inelasric shear resistance for seismic load, is recommended as the most suitable for design

applications.

3-8

Page 76: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 3.1 Gavity loading (spccificd) on EBF

Four-storey frame Eight-storey frame Fourteen-storey frame

Dead load Live load Dead load Live load Dead load Live loadStorey

Column Beam Column Beam Colurnn Beam Column Bearn Column Bearn Column Bearn

(kN) (kN/m) (kN) (kN/m) (kN) (kN/m) (kN) (kN/m) (kN) (kN/m) (kN) (kN/m)

14 42.07 Il.31 230.85 22.9513 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.5612 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.56Il 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.5610 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.569 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.56

~ 8 262.00 16.50 101.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.561\0

7 262.00 16.50 71.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.566 262.00 16.50 66.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.565 262.00 16.50 64.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.564 14.18 6.45 56.70 9.60 262.00 16.50 59.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.563 91.13 12.15 48.60 9.00 262.00 16.50 59.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.562 91.13 12.15 48.60 9.00 262.00 16.50 61.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.561 91.12 12.15 48.60 9.00 262.00 16.50 60.00 10.80 230.85 22.95 123.12 16.56

Page 77: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 3.2 Seismic loading for EBF (Victoria, B.e)

Storey

141312Il10987654321

Four-storey frame

170.90372.87256.84142.58

Latera1load (kN)

Eight-storey frame

493.90327.26282.12236.98191.84146.70101.5656.42

Fourteen-storey frame

350.0G269.04248.96228.8820G.8018G.72166.64146.56126.49106.4186.3366.2544.1724.09

Table 3.3 Link beam selection for initial structures

StoreyFour-storey frame Eight-storey frame Fourteen-storey frame

(a) Section (b)a (c) Section (cl) a Ce) Section (f) a

14 W310X28 2.2313 W310X45 1.4112 W460X52 1.66Il W530X66 1.7910 W530X74 1.669 W610X82 1.698 W200X42 1.15 W610X92 1.677 W310X60 1.07 W610X92 1.546 W360X72 1.05 W610X92 1.445 W460X67 1.11 W610XI0l 1.314 W130X28 1.49 W460X68 1.05 W610XI01 1.263 W310X60 1.17 W530X74 1.18 W610XI01 1.222 W360X79 1.17 W530X74 1.11 W610X92 1.241 530X66 1.14 W6tOXI0l 1.06 W610Xt25 1.12

3-10

Page 78: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 3.4 Eight-storey frame: Initial and final section selection

Design Case 1 Design Case 2 Design Case 3

Storey (a) Initial (b) Final (c) Initial (cl) Final (c) Initial (f) Final

8-7 W200X52 W250X67 W200X52 W250X67 WWF450X228 W250X80II)

§ 5-6 W310XI07 W310X118 W250XI01 W310X129 WWF450X228 W310X129<5 3-4 WWF350X176 WWF350X155 WWF350X155 WWF350X155 WWF450X228 WWF350X155u

1-2 WWF400X273 WWF450X228 WWF400X243 WWF450X228 WWF450X228 WWF450X228......._.._---_ _-------------------------------_ -----_ _-_ __._-_._-_.._---_.._--_ _- _-------_ _----------_.._----------_ _--- _-------_._------------------------_._----------------- .....__ _-_.-.----.---.--.-_._--------------_._---_..--------._----------------------_ _-_.._-_ ------.- -.-----_ - -.-•..................._-_.._-- _--------..__ _ __._..__ --_.-._._--_ _.._ _._ .

8 HSS 178X178XI0 HSS 178X178X13 HSS 254X152X6 HSS 178X178X13 HSS 305X305Xll HSS 178X178Xt37 HSS 203X152XI0 HSS 254X152X13 HSS 254X152X8 HSS 254X152X13 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 254X152X136 HSS 254X152Xl1 HSS 305X203X8 HSS 305X203X8 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203XI0

~ g 5 HSS 305X203XtO HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203X8 HSS 305X203X8 HSS 305X305Xll HSS 305X203XI0~ ~ 4 HSS 305X203Xl1 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203XI0

3 HSS 305X305XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203XI02 HSS 305X305XtO HSS 305X203Xl1 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203Xl1 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203Xl11 HSS 305X305XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203Xl1 HSS 305X305Xl 1 HSS 305X305X11 HSS 305X305Xl1-_ _._--- _ _ __ _----_ _--------------------------------_._---_._ __._._-------.--------._--_.------------.._---_..__.._--------_.._------_.._---.--------_.

Mass (kg) 19701 19243 18109 19412 27542 19712Pcriod (s) 1.89 1.86 1.98 1.86 1.79 1.85

Page 79: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 3.5 Four-storey frame: Initial and final section selection

StoreyDesign Case 2 Design Case 3

(a) Initial (b) Final (c) Initial (d) Final

ë 3-4 W200X71 W310X118 W310X118 W310X118u 1-2 W130X28 W310X52 W310X118 W310X52

4 HSS 203X203X8 HSS 305X203Xll HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 305X203Xl1rn

3 HSS 203X203X6 HSS 254X152Xl 1 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 254XI52Xl1~u= 2 HSS 203XI5~'X.5 HSS 203X152XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 203X152XI0...~

1 HSS 152XI02X5 HSS 203X15~XI0 HSS 305X203XI0 HSS 203XI02XI0

~Iass (kg) 4235 6378 7780 6378Period (s) 1.12 0.91 0.89 0.91

Table 3.6 Fourteen-storey frame : Initial and final section selection

SroreyDesign Case 2 Design Case 3

(a) Initial (b) Final (c) Initial (d) Final

13-14 W200X52 W200X52 WWF650X499 W200X5211-12 W310X79 W2S0XI0l WWF650X499 W360XI10

rn 9-10 W310X143 W360X162 WWF650X499 W360X162ce 7-8 W360X216 W360X216 WWF6S0X499 W360X216~

ë 5-6 WWF400X303 WWF400X303 WWF6S0X499 WWF400X303u3-4 WWF4S0X409 WWF450X409 WWF6S0X499 WWF450X4091-2 WWF650X499 W\VF650X499 WWF650X499 WWF650X499

14 HSS 203XI5~"X5 HSS 203X15~Xl1 HSS 305X305Xll HSS 203X15~Xl1

13 HSS 254X15~'X8 HSS 305X203X10 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203XI012 HSS305X203X6 HSS305X203Xll HSS 305X305X11 HSS 305X203Xl1Il HSS305X203X8 HSS305X203XI0 HSS 30SX305Xl1 HSS 305X203Xl110 HSS305X203XI0 HSS305X203Xl1 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203X139 HSS305X203Xl1 HSS305X203XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203Xl1

rn8 HSS305X203Xl1 HSS305X203Xl1 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203Xll~

ue 7 HSS305X305XI0 HSS305X305X13 HSS 305X305X11 HSS 305X203X13;.Q

6 HSS305X305XI0 HSS305X305X13 HSS 305X305Xll HSS 305X203X135 HSS305X305XtO HSS305X305X13 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X203Xt34 HSS305X305Xt0 HSS305X305XI0 HSS 305X30SXll HSS 305X30SXI03 HSS305X305Xll HSS305X305XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X30SXI02 HSS305X305XI0 HSS305X305XI0 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X305X101 HSS305X305Xl1 HSS305Y-305Xl1 HSS 305X305Xl1 HSS 305X305X13

~fass (kg) 48061 49577 78511 S0450Period (s) 3.07 3.05 2.85 3.04

3-12

Page 80: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

e=800mm

1. 9000 .1

8r­ft1

><ft1,....

8000

e = 800mm

oo\0ft1

><r-

t--t

I--t

. "1 : ~ I~

'''~'I';: IQ.". '-;". ~

e = 600mms c: 1

6000

8r­ft1

><ft1

11.1=~

It-

It-

1.. (1 X (IIHIII .1Fig. 3.1 (b) Layout: eight-storey frame

cntpl for

• EDF~

11:1BDJ

111:1

( entpl"'or

BBP)

!!z II:!~, lm l' l' I~

1.. 5 X 9()(H' ~I

1.. 5 X I)()I"I .1

~:.<..,.

Fig. 3.1 (a) Layout: four-storey frame

~:.<..,.

~1....~

Fig. 3.1 (c) Typical Ooor plan for fourteen-storey frame Fig. 3.1 (d) Typical elevations for 4,8, and 14 storey EBF

Page 81: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

0.50

0 . .30-e.o";" 0.10

oS!Ji! -0.10CIUU

-<-0•.30

5.00 10.00 15.00 20.00

Time (s)

Fig. 3.2 Time history ofTAFr record (N21E component)

0.10

0.50

0.40

1.10

1.20

­CIl

"'-E 0.80-~

0.40

1.00 2.00 100 4.00

Period (s)

(a) Pseudo-acceleration spectrum

Periocl (s)

(b) Pseudo-velocity spectrum

Fig. 3.3 Elastic response spectra (TAIT record, N21E component)

3-14

Page 82: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 4

SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD._iiiIiiIiiiiiiiilliiiiliiil-----IiiiiIIiiIiII~iiiiiiiiiii-iiiliiiiiii&ii&iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliii-iiiiiiii--..

This Chapter describes the methodology used to select the earthquake record for the

iterative design procedure. Artificial records mat would reflect relevant local seismic

conditions are generated for a seiected design location in Western Canada. The

combinations of earthquake magnitudes (M) and epicenttal distances (R) that contribute

most significantly to the peak ground parameters at the site are obtained from seismic huard

analysis. Historical records, with the appropriate combination of ~I and R are seiected, and

elastic response spectra are determined. The artificial acceleration records are then generated

to match mese spectra. Comparison of historie and simulated records is performed to

evaluate if the simuIated records can he considered representative of a Western North

American seismic event.

4.1 Introduction

The proposed design procedure is criticalIy dependent on adequate representation ofground

motion. The characteristics of appropriate acceleration records such as intensity, frequency

content, duration etc, should he similar to those expected at the design location for the levels

of risk associated with the design limit state under consideration. In addition, to limit the

design effort it is desirable to define a unique acceleration record.

The characteristics of earthquakes that influence structural response the most, are frequency

content and the duration of stIong shaking. These two parameters depend on both the level

of seismic motion and the seismo-teetonic environment at the specific location. Seismo­

tectonic conditions are usually descrihed by the magnitude (M) and epicentral distance (R).

Based on field measurements, attenuation relationships that relate intensity parameters to

4-1

Page 83: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUA/ΠRECORD

magnitude and distance have been developed for specific regions taking into account the

effects of the local geology and of fault mechanisms likely to be involved. Frequency content

and duration of an eatthquake are a1s0 reIated to magnitude and distance. Seismic events

with larger magnitudes recorded doser to the source of the earthquake are usually shoner in

duration and richer in high frequencies compared to those recorded at a larger distance. 1bis

aU indicates that the prediction of the characteristics of ground motions of interest in

structural engineeing cao he made hased on the magnitude and epicentral distance.

In NBCC (1995), the severity of the expected ground motion at the specific location is

expressed for design purposes through peak horizontal ground acceleration (PRA) and peak

horizontal ground velocity (PHV). They are obtained from the seismic hazard analysis (SHA)

for a selected site and for a specific probability of exceedance. These calculations are based

on the assessment of magnitude-recurrence relationships for a panicu1ar seismo-tectonic

region and on appropriate attenuation Iaws. Since SHA integrates the contribution of aU

possible earthquakes, the seismic hazard curves cao be decomposed for a seleeted design

location to detennine the magnitudes and epicenttal distances that make dominant

contributions to the ground motion parameter at the speci.fied probability ofexceedance.

4.2 Proposed methodology to define a design acceleration record

4.2.1 Oudine of the method

Heiderbrecht and Naumoski (1988) suggested that the decomposition of seismic hazard

eurves obtained for PHA. and PHV at a selected location could be used to assist selection of

the actual sttong motion records to indude in the dynamic analysis. The records are chosen

to match the combination of M and R that dominates the seismic hazard at the design

location. This approach has been adopted in the present study, as the tirst step of the

method used to generate the design acceleration record for the iterative procedure. Historical

records selected in this way are specific to the and reflect the local seismic conditions.

These records are used to define appropriate spectta, based on which artificial records are

generated. Validation of artificial records is then carried out by comparison of their intrinsic

4-2

Page 84: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

properties with those of the historica1 records and by comparisons of structural response

parameters.

In the following sections, each of these steps is described in more detail and the application

of the proposed methodology is illustrated for a seleeted site in Western Canada (Victoria,

B.C).

4.2.2 Determination ofM and R for initial selection ofhistorie records

The initial scanning of historic acceleration records is based on the magnitudes and

epicenttal distances that make dominant contributions to the ground motion parameter at

the specified probability of exceedance. Peak horizontal ground velocity, rather than peak

horizontal ground acceleration is selected as the appropriate ground motion parameter, since

the structures considered in this study have fundamental periods in the velocity-sensitive

region of specttum, i.e., T>O.Ss.

4.2.2.1 A computer program for assessment ofseismic hazard

A computer program EQDES developed by Tremblay (1994) was used to obtain the

distribution of seismic risk as a funetion of magnitudes and distances for PHA and PHV.

The distribution is ohtained for ground motion parameters equal to those specified for the

site. The calculations are performed according to the probabilistic approach originally

developed by Comell (1968). In this approach, the occurrence of future seismic eveats is

predicted based on seismic sources for which magnitude-recurrence relationships are known,

and the amplitude of the ground motion parameter at a given site is obtained using

attenuation relationships derived for the region.

The numerical scheme adopted in the program EQDES is similar to the one in the program

EQRISC (McGuire et al. 1976). The latter was used by Basham et al (1982, 1985) for

establishing the seismic maps provided in NBCC (1995). The same database as the one used

by Basham is adopted for this study. The database contains information regarding the

characteristics of the seismic source zones (location, depth and recuuence formula), a list of

4-3

Page 85: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

the source zones to consider for a selected location and the attenuation relationship. Source

zones commonly considered for Westem Canada are illusttated in Fig. 4.1.

4.2.2.2 Assessing the distribution ofseismic huard for Victoria, B.C.

The decomposition of the seismic hazard curve for PHV was carried out for Victoria, B.C.

For comparison, the distribution of seismic hazard was aIso examined for PHA. Program

EQDES requites the specification of location in tenns of longitude and latitude and the

value of the ground motion parameter for a specified probability of exceedance. NBCC

(1995) allocates Victoria to seismic zone 5 with respect to both PHV and PHA. In this zone,

these two parameters take on values of 0.3 mis and 0.3g respectively with 10 percent

probability of exceedence in 50 years.

The distribution of seismic hazard in tenns of magnitudes and epicentral distances obtained

for PHV and PHA is illusttated in Fig.4.2 and 4.3 respeetively. As indicated in Fig. 4.2,

earthquakes with magnitudes between 6.5 to 7.0, at epicentral distances in the range of 25 to

75 km contributed most significandy to PHV. Table 4.1 gives a percentage of contribution

to seismic hazard for magnitude and epicenttal distance within these ranges. The analysis

aIso indicated that eighty percent of the total contribution to PHV originated &om the

adjacent earthquake source of Puget Sound (pGT on the map). The remaining twenty

percent originated from Cascadia and Northem Vancouver Island source zones.

Sîmilar observations were made regarding PHA. Fig. 4.3 shows that PHA is mosdy the result

of the nearby events (25 to 50 km) with magnitudes varying between 6.0 and 7.0. AgaÏn,

Most of the contributing earthquakes are &om Puget Sound source zone (90%).

4.2.3 Selection of historical strong motion records

4.2.3.1 Search strategy

To proceed with the selection of representative historica1 strong motion records for a

selected location a search strategy and a set of selection criteria were defined. The ranges of

magnitudes and epicenttal distances that contribute most strongly to PHV at the design

location were identified as essential search parameters. As descnbed above the seismic

4-4

Page 86: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

events with magnitude range 6.5 ta 7.0 and epicentral distance range from 25 to 75 km were

used for the study.

Another search entenon considered was the ratio of the peak ground acceleration of the

record, a, and peak ground velocity, v. It was demonstrated by Tso et al (1992) that the

acceleration-to-velocity (a/v) ratio provided useful information regarding the relative

frequency content and duration of sttong shaking for ground motions from different seismic

environments. Earthquake records are commonly divided into three groups based on their

a/v ratio, low a/v group (a/v < 0.8, with a normalized by g and v in mis), intermediate a/v

group (1.2<a/v<0.8), and high a/v group (a/v>1.2). The zonal a/v ratios used in NBCC

(1995) for seismic regionalization indicate that in Western Canada ground motions are

typically expected to be in either low or intennediate a/v ratio groups characterized by low

frequency content, high amplitudes and long duration. Thus, limiring a/v ratio ta values

below 1.2 was the second search criterion used in selection of the bistorical sttong motion

records.

In order to eliminate the effects of local site amplification on the characteristics of the sttong

motion records the search was aIso confined to accelerograms recorded on finn ground.

Wherever possible, free-field records were selected, otherwise the structural records obtained

on building ground floors were induded.

4.2.3.2 Description of the database

An ensemble of historical records was selected &om the Earthquake Sttong Motion

Database (NGOC, 1996).2 The main infonnation about each record in the database are

summarized in the catalogue contained in S~ICAT (1996), a data inventory package

2 The database contains over 15000 digitized and processed accelerograph records, dating from 1933

to 1994, from bath the United States and other seismicaIly active countties in the worId The

accelerographs are recorded in a variety of structural and geologica1 environments. The strong

motion data are organized into sets grouped by either triggering events or geographic regions. Most

of the data sets include three types of processed records: uncorrected, correeted and response

spectra.

4-5

Page 87: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

developed for PC-DOS platfoon. These include the trigger events, recording sites,

magnitudes, epicenttal distances, peak ground motion parameteI5 etc. SMCAT allows the

user aIso to search the catalogue according to a specified set of parameteI5 and to rettieve

the acceleration records from the database.

4.2.3.3 Selected historical records for Victoria, B.C.

Infonnation on historical records seleeted from the Earthquake Sttong Motion Database is

SlImmarized in Table 4.2. These include the general characteristics of the records and data on

peak horizontal acceleration and peal ground velocity. Six records were seleeted from low

a/v ratio group, and eight from the intermediate a/v ratio group.

4.2.3.4 Scaling of the eanhquake records

For easier comparison of structural response to different historical records, accelerograms

are usually scaled so that they have similar levels of intensity. If the record is used to examine

the seismic design requirements, its intensity level should aIso correspond to that dcfined by

NBCC (1995). Earthquake records can he scaled based either on ground motion parameteI5,

or on response quantities. In this study two scaling approaches were examined, one using

the peak ground velocity as a normaliziog parameter, and the other using the speettum

intensity.

In the first approach, the peak ground velocity of the record is matched to PHV specified

for the seismic zone under consideration and accelerations are scaled accordingly,

maintaining unchanged the a/v ratio of the historica1 record. Resulting scaling factors for the

set of selected historical records are given in column Ca) ofTable 4.3. The study by Tso et al.

(1992) has demonsttated that nonnaliziog acceleration records with respect to the peak

ground velocity yields much less dispersion in elastic response spectra for earthquake records

with different a/v, particularly in the velocity-sensitive range.

In the second approach, the elastic response spectra of acceleration records are used to

detennine scaling factors. Sïnce the maximum strain energy stored in a linear elastic system is

proportional to the pseudo..velocity (pS\"), the speettum itself cao be considered a measure of

4-6

Page 88: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECT/ON OF DES/GN EARTHQUA/ΠRECORD

the severity of the earthquake. The speetrum intensity is defined by Housner (1959) as the

area under the pseudo-velocity curve between 0.1 and 2.5 s. Nau et al (1984) found that this

scaling approach can reduce dispersion of both elastic and inelastic spectra for low to

moderate ductility.

The scaling factors are calculated in a two step procedure~ as proposed by Schiff (1988). In

the first step, the earthquake records are normalized to have identical specttum intensity, SI".,

in the velocity sensitive range. Five percent of damping was assumed in calculation of S~ for

reasons of compatibility with the NBCC design specttum. The integration limits were set to

0.5 and 3 s, as these couelate with the fundamental periods of the structures investigated.

Scaling factors FI were found by dividing S~ of each record by the maximum value of SI... in

the group. Resulting factors are shown in column (c) of Table 4.3. When scaled by the factor

FI. the spread between the elastic response spectra of different records is reduced in the

medium to long period range.

The absolute ordinate of the spectra is detennined in the second step, which shifts the

spectra as a group and anchors it to NBCC design speetrum. The scaling factor F2J unique

for ail records, was computed by dividing the pseudo-acceleration spectral intensity, SIu of

NBCC desÏgn specttum. by the average of SIa for historical records scaled by FI. SIa was

calculated as an area under the pseudo-acceleration spectral curve for 5% damping, between

0.25 and 0.5 s. These limits roughly correspond to the acceleration-sensitive region of

specttum. The value of F2 and the final scaling factors F1xF2 are listed in column (d) and (e)

ofTable 4.3.

Comparison of columns Ca) and Ce) of Table 4.3 indicates that both methods yielded similar

scaling factors. It was decided therefore, to proceed with the first scaling method described,

based on PHV. This method is simpler~ and is more commonly used among researchers. It

was !ater found that the records exhibiting the greatest difference between columns Ca) and

(e) were among the least influenrial in causing damage.

4-7

Page 89: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

4.2.4 Elastic speetra for historical records

The elastic response spectra were obtained for the seleeted historical records, scaled with

factors shown in column (a) of Table 4.3. lbree percent damping was used for reasons

explained in section 2.3.1.3. Response spectta for pseudo-ve1ocity obtained for the whole set

of selected historical records are shown in Fig. 4.4. Response speetra were also derived for

low and intermediate a/v records separately and the results are presented in Figs 4.5 and 4.6

respectively. The NBCC pseudo-velocity design specttum for Victoria, B.C. is indicated in all

figures.

Response spectra for the low and intermediate a/v group of records show significant

difference in shape. For the low a/v group, larger amplification of PS\. is observed in the

period range from 1 to 2 sec which coincides with the expected first natural periods for

eight- and four-storey EBFs. The shape of the specttum in this region is "pulse-like", which

may indicate higher potential for inelastic damage. For intermediate a/v records, the shape

of the spectrum is more jagged and larger amplitudes of PS,.. are observed at lower periods,

from 0.4 to 1.2s, reaching the maximum at around 0.5s. The second natural periods for eight

and fourteen storey EBF are expected to faIl into this range. Because of this pronounced

difference in spectral shapes, it was decided to treat separately groups of records with

different a/v ratio. The decision was also made to use mean PS~ spectra as the target spectra

for generation of artificial acceleration records, as this correlated better with the NBCC

design spectrum.

The locally weighted linear least squares procedure proposed by Cleveland (1979) was used

to obtain a non-parametric estimate of the mean value of the spectral ordinates as a funetion

of the period. In non-parametric procedures, the prior knowledge of a functional

dependence hetween periods and spectral ordinates is not required, and the impact of

different degrees of smoothness on the estimates cao he easily investigated. Estimates of the

uncertainty on the non-parametric regression can aIso he obtained, in general as a function

of the period.

4-8

Page 90: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

An advanrage of the locally weighted linear least squares procedure over other non­

parametric smoothing procedures is that peaks and valleys are not overly smoothed by the

procedure. Smoothness is conttolled through a kemel or weighting function, commonly

taken as the normal distribution function. The degree of smoothness in this case is

controlled by the standard deviation of the distribution. In the extteme, when the standard

deviation approaches infinity, the results are identical to those of linear regression. Objective

functions based on cross-validation can be defined to select the optimal degree of

smoothness; however, a visual assessment is often sufficient in practice.

The smoothed PS... response spectta obtained for both groups of records are illustrated in

Figs 4.7 and 4.8 along with the original PS... spectra. The optimal degree of smoothness was

achieved for a standard deviation equal to 0.3.

4.2.5. Indices to characterize earthquake records

Elastic and inelastic response of structures to earthquake excitation is influenced by a

number of ground motion characteristics such as (i) amplitude of the motion, (u) frequency

content of the excitation, (w) duration and rime of occurrence of the maxima, and (iv)

number and charaeteristics of important acceleration pulses. To understand better these

characteristics, and thus facilitate the generation of artificial record representative of Western

Canada the following ground motion indices were examined as suggested by Christopoulos

(1998) and Tajebi (1994):

(i) Peak ground acceleratioo (pGA) (g)

(u) Time ofoccurrence ofPGA (5)

(tii) Root mean square of accelerogram, RMSA

(iv) Number of zero crossings (Nzq, used to calculate: Ca) oumber of acceleration pulses

(NAP =NZC-l) and (b) predominant period of shaking (pPS =total duration of the

record divided by the O.5NZq

(v) Arias intensity, AI

(Vl) Mc-Caon and Shaw duration: the rime span between the upper cut-off rime (rime

beyond which the derivative of the cumulative root mean square of accelerogram is

4-9

Page 91: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUA/ΠRECORD

always decreasing) and the lower eut-off rime (rime beyood whicb the reverse

derivative of the cumulative root mean square of accelerogram is always decreasing)

(vil) Bracketed duratioo: the rime betweeo the first and the Iast excursioo of absolute value

of acceleratioo above the eut-off acceleration (set in this study to O.OSg)

(viU) Hudser duratioo: rime oecessary to attain 5% and 90% of total eoergy (aIl based on the

Arias Intensity)

(lx) Trifunac-Brady duration: the rime necessary to accumulate between 5% and 95% of

total energy (based on Arias Intensity)

(x) Spectral inteosity based 00 pseudo-acceleration: in this study takeo as the area under

the pseudo-acceleratioo spectral curve for 3% of damping between periods 0.25sec ta

O.ssec.

(Xl) Specttal intensity based 00 pseudo-velocity: in this study takeo as the area under the

pseudo-velocity spectral curve for 3% ofdamping between periods O.Ssec to 3.0sec.

Results expressed in terms of Mean and standard deviation obtained for low and

intermediate a/v groups of records are presented in columns (a) and (b) of Tables 4.4 and

4.5 respecrlvely.

4.2.6 Generation of the artificial acceleration records

4.2.6.1 Short description ofprogram SIMQKE

Program SIMQKE (Gasparini et al., 1976) was employed to geoerate statistically

independeot accelerograms compatible witb smooth spectra shown in Figg. 4.7 and 4.8. For

each specttum, three different accelerograms were created.

The basis for the spectrum-compatible motion generation is the relationship between the

respoose spectrum values for selected damping and the Ilexpected" Fourier amplitudes of the

ground motioo. Eartbquakes are synthesized by superimposing sinusoidal componeots with

fixed amplitudes and randomly varying phase angles. followed by the multiplication of the

resulting stationary trace by a user-specified intensity function representiog the variation of

ground motion with rime.

4-10

Page 92: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

Each earthquake simulation is unique as the seed number used for generation of the phase

angle is changed for every simulation. The response specttum corresponding ta the

synthesized motion is computed next and compared to a target speettum. The procedure is

repeated severa! times until a good agreement between target and response spectta for the

generated record is obtained. The final result is an accelerogram with desired peak ground

acceleration and frequency content, and with pseudo-velocity response spectrum matching

the desired input speetrum.

4.2.6.2 Input data

Beside the targeted pseudo-velocity spectnun, input data for program SIMQKE include the

desired peak ground acceleration and the range of frequency, description of intensity

function etc. Based on the analysis of the frequency content of historical records, the

frequeney range up to 5Hz was selected for the simulation. The intensity functions were

defined following recommendations by Christopoulos (1998). The duration of strong

shaking was estimated based on Trifunac-Brady definition of strong motion duration

evaluated for historical records. Selected intensity functions are illustrated in Figs 4.9 and

4.10.

To avoid any scaling, an attempt was made to obtain simulated records with peak ground

velocity equal to the one of the site (pGV=0.3m/s). In addition, the desired peak ground

accelerations were set so that the a/v ratios of simulated records would he within the limits

of the genera1ly accepted ranges used in classification (1.2<a/v<0.8 and a/v<O.8 for low and

intennediate groups respectively).

The rime-histories of generated accelerograms matching response spectra for low and

intennediate a/v group of records are shown in Fig. 4.11 and 4.12 respectively.

4.3 Comparison ofhistorical and generated records

4.3.1 Comparison of earthquake indices

The set of indices described in section 4.2.5 was evaluated for the simulated records and is

given in Tables 4.4 and 4.5 for low and intermediate a/v records respectively. Mean and

4-11

Page 93: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

standard deviation for the historical records are also given. The difference between the

parameter obtained for each simulated record and the historical mean is expressed as a

multiple of the standard deviation of the historical record in columns (f)~ (g) and (h) of the

tables.

The characteristics of acceleration pulses along with the duration of strong shaking may have

a significant impact on the inelastic dynamic response of structural systems. Chopra and

Lapez (1979) define an acceleration pulse as a segment of the accelerogram between any two

successive zero-crossing points. A single pulse with bigh acceleration may introduce large

deformations in a structure, and repeated application of long, intense pulses may lead to low

cycle fatigue and incremental collapse. Since in the present study, the records generated were

intended for use in non-linear analysis, the acceleration pulses were studied in more detail.

The following pulse characteristics were examined: the amplitude of the pulse, A (mm/sl,

duration of the pulse, D AP (s), the rime of the occurrence of the pulse Tp (s), the total

number of pulses (NAP), and the number of pulses with the amplitude within the selected

range (Nt~ N so, N too, N2f)J, NochJ, where the amplitude ranges are defined as fol1ows: Nt: A

S10 mm/52; Ns: 10 mm/s2 < A S 50 mm/52; N IO: 50 mm/52 < A S 100 mm/s2; N20: 100

mm/52 < A S 200 mm/5

2; and Nocher: A ~ 200 mm/s2. Results obtained for historical and

generated records for both a/v groups of records are summarized in Table 4.6.

4.3.1.1 Low a/v records

Two out of three simulated records have maximum PGA matching closely the mean PGA

for historical records. It would have been possible to achieve even better agreement since

the desired PGA was incorporated into the generation process, but a compromise had to he

made to obtain a resulting accelerogram with a/v ratio within the preferred range. The

maximum PGA occurs sooner for generated records. As can be seen from Table 4.4, very

good matches were ohtained for Trifunac-Brady and Hudser durations of sttong shaking,

somewhat poorer agreement was achieved for bracketed durations, while Mc-Cann-Shah

durations for ail generated records were found to he significandy higher than the Mean

obtained for historical records.

4-12

Page 94: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

Spectral intensities evaluated both for PSOI

and PSv show very good agreement, which

indicates an excellent spectrum compatibility achieved in the process of artificial records

generation. Higher values of AI and RMSA were observed for simulated records. On

average, accelerations cross the zero line more often for generated records and the

predominant periods are slighdy lower which MaY indicate the presence of higher

frequencies in the artificial records than in the historical ones. However, the consistency of

the frequency content was ensured, since modeIing of the appropriate frequencies (up to

5Hz) has been incorporated into the generation process.

As can be seen from the Table 4.6, the total number of acceleration pulses is higher for the

artificial records, the differences being of 5imilar magnitude for pulses with amplitudes up to

200 mm/52. The numbers of large pulses, with amplitudes between 200 and 500 mm/52 are

comparable. Unlike the historical records, the artificial records have largest acceleration

pulses which are aIso the longest. For both historical and simulated records, the amplitudes

and duration of the highest amplitude pulses are comparable. On the other band, the longest

pulses of the artificial records have higher amplitudes and shorter duration.

4.3.1.2 Intermediate a/v records

Comparison of columns (a) and (b) of Tables 4.4 and 4.5, shows that the intrinsic

charactetÏstics of law and intennediate a/v groups of histarical records are different. The

latter group bas somewhat higher PGA, shorter duration of strong shaking, higher number

of zero crossings, lower predominant period, higher AI and RlvISA, and smaller spectral

intensities for bath PSa and PSv' These observations further justify separate consideration of

the two groups, and the generation ofartificial records ta match two different spectra.

Table 4.5, indicates in general a good agreement between the historical and artificial records

from the intermediate a/v group. Compared to the low a/v group, hetter agreement was

observed for duration of strong shaking, number of zero crossing and predominant period.

Similarly to the low a/v group, AI and RMSA were found to he higher for generated

records.

4-13

Page 95: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

Table 4.6 shows that the total numbers of acceleration pulses compare weil for historical and

generated records. Historical records have somewhat higher number of low-amplitude pulses

(A< 10 mm/s~, and smaller number of pulses with amplitude ranging berween 10 and 200

mm/s2• The number of high-amplitude puIses (200mm/s2<A<SOOmm/s1 is similar.

Observations regarding the amplitudes and durations of the largest and longest acceleration

pulses are identical to those made for low a/v group, except that the amplitude of the largest

pulse is higher for the historical records.

4.3.1.3 S~oIJsis

For both groups of records, the comparison of intrinsic characteristics of historical and

generated records showed in general good agreement berween the two. Just as selected

historical records are considered representative for the design location, so can he the

artificially generated records. Since the generation process included the speetrum

compatibility, similar structural response is e.~1Jeeted, particularly in the elastic range.

However, sorne discrepancies hetween historical and generated records were observed in the

characterisrics ofacceleranon pulses (both groups of records) and duration of strong shaking

(low a/v group). Since bath of these parameters may have significant impact on the inelastic

structural response, it was decided to further evaluate the generated records based on the

results of non-lïnear analysis for an EBF structure.

4.3.2 ComlJarison of structural inelastic resIJonse

The dynamic response to aIl historical and generated records was studied for an eight-storey

EBF fully compliant with strength, stiffness and ducrility requirements of Canadian design

codes (see Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2). The ineIastic behaviour of links was examined in tenns

of maximum. induced shear forces nonnalized by the nominal shear resistance Clmu/V~, and

the rruL~um range of shear deformations, max y ange (i.e. the sum of the maximum positive

and maximum negative shear strains). Tables 4.7 and 4.8 snmmarize results obtained for low

and intermediate a/v groups. Mean and standard deviation for historical records are given

while those for simulated accelerograms are shown for cach record separately. The

4-14

Page 96: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUA/ΠRECORD

differences between the laner results and the mean of the bistorical records, expressed as a

multiple of the standard deviation, provide a basis for comparison.

As illusttated in Figs. 4.12 and 4.13, the distribution of mean CVmu/VJ and mean (ma.~ y ansJover the height of the frame has a different trend for the two groups of historical records.

For both groups, the largest forces occurred at the top storeys, but the ratio of the maximum

induced shear force ta resistance is more uniform for low a/v records. The variation of

defonnations over the height was much more pronounced for the intennediate a/v records.

The shear deformations observed at the top storey were two rimes the deformations found

for low a/v records in the same storey, but their magnitudes significandy decreased in the

mid-portion of the frame.

The same figures illustrate aIso the distribution of forces and deformations obtained for each

simulated record. In generaL good agreement between response parameters for historical

and simulated records was observe~ particularly regarding maximum induced forces. A

somewhat poorer match was achieved for shear defonnations for the low a/v group, but the

general trend was still weIl captured, and the data of columns (t) to (h) of Table 4.7 confirm

that these differences alllie within about one standard deviation.

The study of ineIastic response had demonstrated that the selected structure responded in a

similar manner to historical and generated records, in spite of sorne differences observed in

the characteristics ofacceleration pulses and duration of stroog shaking.

4.3.3 Generated records selected for design

Based on the study of intrinsic charaeteristic and comparison of inelastic structural response

described above, two of the generated records, one for each a/v ratio group, were chosen

for use in the iterative procedure for design location considered. They corresponded most

closely to the historical records, based 00 their intrinsic characteristic and response

parameters. The rime histories of selected records are illustrated in Figs 4.11(a) and 4.12 (a).

4-15

Page 97: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

4.4 Comments on artificial records matching new unifonn hazard spectra

for Canada

The Geological Survey of Canada (Adams et al, 1996) bas developed new national seismic

hazard maps. In addition to ground motions, the maps give unifonn hazard spectra (UHS)

for major ciries developed for finn ground with 10% probability of exceedence in 50 years.

It is anticipated that these maps will provide the seismological basis for earthquake design

requiremeots for the next edition of the National Building Code ofCanada.

Atkinson and Beresnev (1998) have simulated a set of ground-motion rime histories

compatible with the UHS for number of different cities in Canada including Victoria, B.C.

The objective was to provide appropriate accelerograms to engineers wishing to perform

dynamic analysis based on the time-history method. To match short and long period parts of

UHS, for each city two horizontal acceleranoo records were generated for a moderate nearby

earthquake, and two for a large earthquake farther away. For cities in British Columbia,

records were aIso simulated for an earthquake on the Cascadia subduction zone. AlI

generated records reflect appropriate magnitude-distance range and tectomc environment.

It was of interest to see whether these simulated ground motions could be used for the

iterative design procedure proposed herein. For Victoria, a total of eight records was

available, two rnatching short-period UHS (M=6 and R=20km), (Wo matching long-period

event (r\f=7.2 and R=70km), and four for Cascadia events (M=8.5). The characteristic

ground motion parameters are given in Table 4.9.

Selected intrinsic properties, shown in Table 4.10, were calcuIated and compared to those of

the historical records used herein. Simulated records representing Cascadia events have large

duration of strong shaking (frifunac definition), exceeding twice the value found for low a/v

historical records. Records matching UHS for Victoria, have shorter durations of strong

shaking compared to historical records of appropriate a/v ratio, the difference being

particularly pronounced for the (Wo simulated records matching the short-period part of

UHS. The predominant period for all simulated records is around 0.2s which compares well

4-16

Page 98: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

with the value found for intermediate a/v historica1 records, but is somewhat smaller than

the value found for low a/v records (0.3s). The difference is aIso observed in the spectral

intensity (SIJ. With the exception of two records representing Cascadia events, spectral

intensity was significandy smaller for simulated records.

IneIastic response of the eight-storey EBF discussed in the previous section was aIso

examined for all simulated records. Results obtained for maximum inelastic shear forces in

links, and maximum range of the inelastic shear defonnations are shown in Table 4.11. With

exception of one Cascadia record, the forces and deformations are smaller than those

observed for the bistorical records.

While simulated records were generated to match the new UHS (spectral accelerations) for

Victoria, historical records were selected on the basis of PHV prescribed by NBCC (1995).

Levels of earthquake load obtained for UHS do not necessarily have to match those of

NBCC, unless appropriate scaIing factors are applied (Humar and Rahgorzar ,1996). This

may partially explain the differences in results for inelastic response obtained for simulated

and historical records.

It should be noted that the peak ground velocities for accelerograms generated by Atkinson

and Beresnev (1998), do not correspond to PHV expected at the site according to

NBCC(1995). The scaling procedure used in the present study (see Section 4.2.3.4) would

requite adjustment of the accelerations so that the PGV matches PHV of the site. The

resulting scaling factors for sùnulated records are listed in column (a) ofTable 4.12. Column

(b) shows values of spectral intensity (SIv) determined for scaled records. These values

compare much better to results obtained for historical records. As cao be see from Table

4.13, a better agreement cao aIso be observed in terms of inelastic response, if these scaling

factors are applied.

4.5 Summary

This chapter bas presented the methodology used to define the earthquake record for the

proposed iterative design procedure. The objective was to define a unique acceleratioo

4-17

Page 99: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

4. SELECTION OF DESIGN EARTHQUAKE RECORD

record, specific to the site. The following steps have been suggested for structures with

fundamental periods in the velocity-sensitive region of the specttum: (i) find earthquake

magnitude and distances that conttibute Most significandy to the peak ground velocity at the

design locatio~ (u) select historical records to match detennined magnitude and distance

ranges, and (m) generate artificial record to match smoothed elastic response speetra derived

for selected historical records.

Typical western Canadian seismic events are expected to have low or intermediate a/v ratios.

Two sets of historical records where thus selected. The analysis of their intrinsic

characteristics and elastic response spectra bas demonstrated significant differences between

the two sets. Artificial records with elastic spectra compatible to smooth response spectra

were generated for each of the two groups. The evaluation of the simulated records was

accomplished through the comparison of relevant characteristics of the accelerograms to

those of the historical ones. Special attention was devoted to the examination of acceleration

pulses, as these influence the inelastic response of structures to a large extent.

In general, the results obtained showed good agreement between historica1 and generated

records. However, sorne discrepancy was observed in the characteristics of acceleration

pulses and duration of strong shaking, and additional study was undertaken to investigate in

more detail their impact on the inelastic structural response. The results of the non-linear

analysis carried out for a typical eight-storey EBF confirmed similarity in the inelastic

response of the structure when subjected to histoncal and artificial records of the same a/v

ratio group.

The proposed methodology thus yielded two artificial accelerograms, one for each a/v ratio

group. These can be considered representative of the chosen design location and are

appropriate for use in the iterative design procedure described in Cbapter 2.

4-18

Page 100: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.1 Contributions to seismic risk (%): PGV equal to O..3m/s

-R (km)

Magnitude

5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 Total

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 025 0 0 2 10 6 0 0 0 1850 0 0 2 15 17 0 0 0 3475 0 0 0 4 11 0 0 0 15100 0 0 0 2 8 0 0 0 9125 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 6150 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6

~ 175 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 4.......\0

200 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3225 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2250 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1275 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1----_..........-...._.._..._--_..-.--------.....__..._----...-----.........-....._---------..._.-._...._._----_._----.-_......._._-......._-------_...._.._......_.-------_....__..

Total 0 0 4 32 64 0 0 0 100

e

Page 101: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.2 Summary of selected historie earthquake records

e

Record, date (D/M/y), recording site Abbr. Comp. MR Structure Soil PHA PHV

(km) type type (g) (m/s)a/v

Alaskan subduction eq., 15/10/1965. Kodiae Naval Srat. AL1 N260E 6.8 60 Free field Slate 0.022 0,033 0.67Loma Prieta cq., 18/10/1989. Cril'ral Sprin~ll rCllcrvoir LPC1 137 7.1 62 Free field Sandstone 0.117 0.171 0.68 ;:.

.........Loma Prieta eq., 18/10/1989, (:rilltal Sprin~ll rCllcrvoir LPC2 227 7.1 62 Free field Sandstone 0.108 0.187 0.58 ;Loma Prieta eq., 18/10/1989,Sranfmd Univcrllitylab LPSl 270 7.1 51 Building (GF) Sedim. rock 0.202 0.367 0.55 jCoalinga eq., 05/02/1983. Parkfidd, Goldhill 2W Cl East 6.5 50 - - 0.074 0.121 0.61

_~~~!!.~~.~~.:,.~~~!.!2~!!!~~~~~~:.~.~~~~~!~~.~~ . ..~? ~~~.~ _ ~:?.__ ?..~ _ _.:. ._._ _.__ __: ._.~.:98~__.~.1 !.?_._.Q:?_~..__ _..Alaskan subduction eq., 15/10/1965, Kodiae Naval Stat. AL2 N350E 6.8 60 Free field Slate 0.017 0.019 0.89

Loma Prieta cq., 18/10/1989, Stanfmd Univcrllity lab LPS2 360 7.1 51 Building (GF) Semm. rock 0.288 0.284 1.01 <~ Milford Sound eq., 04/05/1976, Milford Sound horcl MS1 N49E 6.7 37 Building (GF) - 0.080 0.083 0.96 ~

~ Milford Sound eq., 04/05/1976, Milfmd Sound hurd M52 541 E 6.7 37 Building (GF) - 0.090 0.100 O.90 ~

Norlhridge eq., 17/01/1994,Griffi'h .."""rva.OIY NGOl 270 6.8 25 Free field Granite 0.297 0.257 1.15 ~

Northridge eq., 17/01!1994, (.riffith obllcrvatury NG02 360 6.8 25 Free field Granite 0.167 0.139 1.20 w

Northridge cq., 17!01/1994,llunl-.rtinhtlon bcaeh NHBl 360 6.8 74 Free field - 0.120 0.1 t t 1.08 ~Northridgc cq., 17!01!1994,lIun~tin~lUn bcaeh NHB2 270 6.8 74 Free fJ.1ed - 0.112 0.104 1.08

Page 102: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.3 Scaling factors for earthquakc records

Record (a) Fal\' (b) Si v (II.S.<h) (c) FI (d) Si. ~1.25•.1I.51) (c) Sit·C:f1Ih~*F. (d) F2* (c) FI*F2

ALI 9.14 126.6 II.03 125.4 5534.2 9.47AL2 15.71 77.2 18.09 106.3 7693.3 15.52LPCI 1.74 832.1 1.68 600.3 4030.8 1.44LPC2 1.61 742.1 1.88 665.9 5013.5 1.61LPSI 0.82 1396.8 1.00 1072.3 4289.2 0.86

LPS2 1.05 1211.5 1.15 1906.7 8793.3 0.99

MSI 3.60 245.1 5.70 629.9 14358.90.858

4.89MS2 3.00 284.9 4.90 556.0 10903.8 4.21NHBl 2.70 341.2 4.09 905.9 14834.2 3.51NHB2 2.89 330.4 4.23 816.9 13814.1 3.63

t NGOI 1.16 724.4 1.93 1781.3 13738.9 1.65....NG02 2.16 567.1 2.46 990.7 9760.6 2.11Cl 2.47 576.1 2.42 518.4 5027.6 2.08C2 2.60 568.5 2.46 522.8 5138.1 2.11

*NOTE: average (SI.·vc:ngc*F.) =8780.8 (mm/s) =O.895gSI. NIJCC =0.768gF2 =0.768/0.895 =0.858

e

Page 103: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 4.4 Indices to characterise earthquakc records: Low a/v records

Historical records Artificial records Difference (a)Indices

(a) J! (b) a (c) LGI (d) LG2 (e) LG3 (t) A•.<iI (g) AJ.(j2 (h)Aun

PGA Cg) 0.19 0.02 0.18 0.30 0.20 0.5 5.6 0.5Time of occurrence of PGA (s) 10.05 2.61 24.18 4.35 6.62 5.4 2.2 1.3MeCann-Shah duration (s) 13.45 3.88 21.99 22.35 21.24 2.2 2.3 2.0Bracketed duration (s) 17.76 5.82 22.45 22.37 23.12 0.8 0.8 0.9Trifunac duration (s) 19.41 4.13 20.35 20.26 19.74 0.2 0.2 0.1Hudser duration (s) 20.17 2.83 23.27 22.79 23.23 1.1 0.9 1.1Number of zero crossing 172 43 250 205 234 1.8 0.8 1.7Predominant period (s) 0.344 0.089 0.230 0.280 0.239 1.3 0.7 1.2

~AI (frifunae duration) 0.0457 0.002 0.0553 0.0569 0.0565 4.1 4.8 4.7RMSA (frifunac duration) 0.0411 0.011 0.0622 0.0656 0.0630 1.8 2.1 1.9

SI. (11.25•.(1.5.) (mm/s) 1336.7 211.5 1211.8 1202.3 1207.8 0.6 0.6 0.6

SIy (n.S•.J.) (mm) 1512.4 204.4 1498.7 1520.6 1544.2 0.1 0.0 0.2

Page 104: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 4.5 Indices to characterise earthquakc records: Intermediatc a/v records

Historical records Artificial records Difference (in 0)Indices

(a) fl (b) (J (c) INGI (d) ING2 (c) ING3 (f) A 1NCi1 Cg) A 1NCi2 (h) A1N(1l

PGA Cg) 0.294 0.06 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.10 0.10 0.10

Time of occurrence of PGA (s) 9.40 1.81 15.90 10.80 17.54 3.60 0.77 4.50McCann-Shah duration (8) Il.55 4.78 15.64 15.77 14.96 0.86 0.88 0.71

Bracketed duration (s) 17.68 5.97 17.39 17.13 17.10 0.05 0.09 0.10

Trifunac duration (5) 12.38 3.23 14.56 13.83 13.89 0.67 0.45 0.47

Hudser duration (s) 15.12 3.13 16.96 16.57 17.53 0.59 0.46 0.77Number of zero crossing 191 46 193 205 202 0.04 0.30 0.24

Predominant period (s) 0.23 0.051 0.219 0.209 0.215 0.22 0.41 0.29t- AI (frifunac duration) 0.0817 0.021 0.0933 0.1006 0.0935 0.56 0.91 0.56~

RMSA (frifunac duratioll) 0.0835 0.034 0.1267 0.1399 0.1215 1.28 1.68 1.13

SI. (U.25I-U.SI) (mm/s) 2319.5 608.7 2201.6 2206.6 217.16 0.19 0.19 0.24

Sly (O.SI-Jil (mm) 1185.3 203.5 1127.2 1121.9 109.30 0.04 0.05 0.07

Page 105: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.6 Characteristics of accclcration pulses: Low and intermediatc a/v records

Largcst pulse (max. A) Longest pulse (max. duration) Number of pulses

A li cl Time of D . A li cl Time of D . N 10 N50 NI00 N200 N500 Nu1hc:rmp tu e uratlon mp tu e uratlonoccurrence occurrence

Historical J.l 428.8 10.09 0.57 207.0 18.92 0.81 83 48 16 17 8~ records 518.7 13.92 0.71 298.2 22.64 1.00 120 61 25 24 Il'" J.l+aClS

~ LGl 314.5 22.33 0.32 312.9 26.25 0.50 101 76 37 24 5.s Artificial~ records

LG2 479.4 7.03 0.64 479.4 7.03 0.64 68 78 26 21 7

LG3 457.4 19.35 0.60 457.4 19.35 0.60 85 82 33 26 7

t p Historical J.l 470.5 10.85 0.33 181.3 11.98 0.91 94 47 21 18 11'"~ ClS records J.l+o 537.8 13.86 0.47 337.9 19.28 1.69 125 66 25 22 14 1

~ INGl 394.4 8.15 0.36 394.4 8.15 0.36 52 56 40 36 8.s ArtificialING2 306.0 14.41 0.30 78.6 18.01 0.36 46 73 38 30 14

~ recordsING3 385.5 17.19 0.40 385.5 17.19 0.40 62 56 33 35 9

e

Page 106: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 4.7 Comparison of response of links to historical and artifidal records: Low a/v records

(a) Maximum normalized shear forces

Vmn./VpStorey Historical records Artifidal records Difference (in multiples of 0)

(a) f.l (b) 0 (c) LGl (cl) LG2 (e) LG3 (t) AUji (g) AUi2 (h)âun

8 1.55 0.08 1.60 1.62 1.57 0.59 0.80 0.15

7 1.65 0.08 1.64 1.60 1.60 0.09 0.53 0.53Cl 1.56 0.13 1.62 1.56 1.53 0.45 0.02 0.22

5 1.43 0.17 1.45 1.42 1.40 0.13 0.03 0.184 1.44 0.19 1.41 1.49 1.38 0.15 0.22 0.333 1.41 0.18 1.31 1.37 1.46 0.59 0.24 0.26

t 2 1.46 0.17 1.38 1.48 1.43 0.52 0.06 0.201 1.46 0.13 1.46 1.53 1.58 0.02 0.54 0.96fJl

(b) Maximum range of inclastic rotations

Max y!JOse (rad)Storey Historical records Artifidal records Difference (in 0)

(a) f.l (b) 0 (c) LGI (d) LG2 (e) LG3 (f) â UH (g) A•.c12 (h)Aun

8 0.110 0.027 0.097 0.126 0.096 0.47 0.61 0.517 0.105 0.036 0.099 0.135 0.091 0.28 0.72 0.516 0.085 0.031 0.094 0.070 0.059 0.30 0.46 0.81

5 0.060 0.022 0.040 0.041 0.041 0.90 0.85 0.854 0.056 0.025 0.044 0.049 0.039 0.48 0.28 0.683 0.034 0.016 0.021 0.035 0.028 0.79 0.09 0.342 0.054 0.032 0.020 0.045 0.063 1.06 0.29 0.271 0.069 0.037 0.031 0.078 0.066 1.01 0.26 0.07

Page 107: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.8 Comparison of response of links to historical and artificial records: Interrnediate a/v records

(a) Maximum normalized shear forces

Vrna,jVn

e

t0\

Storey

87654321

Historical records Artificial records Difference (in multiples of (J)

(a) J.l (b) (J (c) ING t (d) ING2 (e) ING3 (t) AIN(;I Cg) A 1Nn2 (h) A IN(l1

1.66 0.04 1.68 1.67 1.62 0.59 0.35 1.061.56 O. t 0 1.54 1.50 1.51 0.05 0.32 0.231.36 0.15 1.32 1040 1.39 0.22 0.26 0.201.13 0.17 1.10 1.18 1.15 0.18 0.30 0.141.12 0.16 1.06 1.16 1.13 0.35 0.26 0.041.17 0.09 1.15 1.12 1.06 0.22 0.65 1.281.29 0.08 1.23 1.15 1.16 0.73 1.81 1.69t.30 0.08 1.16 1.22 1.18 1.71 0.92 1.48

(b) Maximum range of inelastic rotations, max y ran~

Max y ~n .... (rad)Storey Historical records Artificial records Difference (in a)

(~)~ (b) ~__ (c) INGl (d) ING2 (e) ING3 (t) A1N(iI (g) A 1NG2 (h) A IN(;,

8 0.180 0.057 0.201 0.174 0.153 0.37 0.10 0.477 0.077 0.028 0.106 0.065 0.088 1.04 0.41 DAO6 0.046 0.022 0.050 0.040 0.060 0.18 0.28 0.645 0.019 0.015 0.015 0.021 0.019 0.25 0.15 0.024 0.017 0.011 0.011 0.020 0.009 0.57 0.24 0.753 0.012 0.006 0.011 0.007 0.006 0.16 0.79 0.952 0.022 0.011 0.013 0.015 0.012 0.84 0.65 0.931 0.040 0.016 0.029 0.030 0.032 0.68 0.62 0.49

Page 108: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.9 Characteristic ground motion paramctcrs: artificial records matching ncw UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998)

Magnitude (M) Distance (R, km) a(g) v (m/s) a/v

Short period ATKV1 6.0 20 0.210 0.21 1.0event ATKV2 6.0 20 0.230 0.23 1.0

Long period ATKV3 7.2 70 0.100 0.19 0.52event ATKV4 7.2 70 0.096 0.20 0.48

..._.---------------------------------.------------------------------_.._--..._-_._-_....----_ ..__._--_.._--------------...---..---VICTL 8.5 0.122 0.188 0.65

Cascadia VICTU 8.5 0.098 0.274 0.36

~event VICTUP 8.5 0.070 0.226 0.31

VICTC 8.5 0.109 0.265 0.41

e

Page 109: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 4.10 Indices to characterise earthquake records: artificial records matching new UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998)

Lowa/v Intcrm. a/v Cascadia evcntIndices

ATKVI ATKV2 ATKV3 ATKV4 VICTL VICTU VICTUP VICTC

PGA (g) 0.211 0.228 0.100 0.096 0.122 0.098 0.070 0.139Time of occurrence of PGA (5) 2.34 2.11 4.24 14.58 21.22 10.26 11.21 19.98MeCano-Shah duration (s) 3.63 3.47 15.17 14.97 37.32 33.18 30.27 31.81Braeketed duratioo (5) 3.72 3.56 15.13 13.84 37.56 33.66 27.69 35.44Trifuoac duration (s) 3.45 2.97 13.88 13.63 39.08 46.50 50.85 34.76Hudser duration (5) 4.66 4.35 15.69 15.07 40.43 42.57 51.33 40.57Number of zero crossing 57 52 179 179 261 265 245 230

t" Predominant period (s) 0.211 0.231 0.220 0.220 0.215 0.229 0.229 0.243N00

AI (frifunac duration) 0.0744 0.0826 0.0331 0.0311 0.0303 0.0238 0.0193 0.0339RMSA (frifunae duration) 0.0191 0.0203 0.0152 0.0132 0.0359 0.0263 0.0190 0.0398

51. (O.151.0.5s) (mm/s) 1025.5 1367.0 667.1 610.2 679.4 675.0 551.1 847.4

SI" (O.5s.3s) (mm) 625.6 875.6 919.4 986.2 1272.2 966.6 680.7 1298.2

Page 110: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 4.11 Link response parameters: artificial records matching new UHS for Canada (Atkinson ct al, 1998)

(a) Nonnaüzed link shear forces, Vma./VIl -Lowa/v lntern'I. a/v Cascadia event

StoreyATKVI ATKV2 ATKV3 ATKV4 VICTL VICTU VICTUP VICTC

8 1.35 1.36 1.21 1.16 1.31 1.37 1.12 1.417 1.13 1.40 1.26 1.25 1.36 1.34 1.15 1.436 1.00 1.38 1.21 1.26 1.31 1.26 1.06 1.345 0.91 1.30 1.13 1.23 1.17 1.07 0.92 1.20

4 0.93 1.21 1.18 1.19 1.21 1.10 0.85 1.253 0.87 1.13 1.23 1.12 1.19 1.15 0.85 1.262 1.04 1.29 1.22 1.14 1.23 1.28 0.98 1.31.,..1 1.06 1.35 1.23 1.16 1.28 1.30 1.00 1.36t\,)

\0

(c) Maximum range of inelastic rotations, max y nnh'C

Lowa/v Interm. a/v Cascadia eventStorey

ATKVI ATKV2 ATKV3 ATKV4 VICTL VICTU VICTUP VICTC

8 0.051 0.079 0.024 0.020 0.042 0.050 0.018 0.1087 0.017 0.062 0.022 0.027 0.062 0.043 0.020 0.1276 0.007 0.050 0.028 0.029 0.030 0.023 0.011 0.0485 0.006 0.029 0.018 0.026 0.024 0.011 0.006 0.024

4 0.006 0.021 0.024 0.022 0.022 0.013 0.005 0.0353 0.005 0.008 0.018 0.008 0.012 0.010 0.004 0.0222 0.005 0.018 0.018 0.010 0.016 0.018 0.005 0.0231 0.009 0.029 0.033 0.019 0.033 0.025 0.005 0.061

Page 111: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 4.12 Scaling factors Fa/..,: artificial records matching new UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998)

Record (a) a/v (b) a..,=U.l (c)Fa/v (cl) SI\. (e) SI.., (a scalecl)

ATKVl 0.99 0.297 1,41 688.2 882.1ATKV2 0.98 0.293 1.28 963.2 1120.7ATKV3 0.52 0.156 1.56 735.5 1434.3ATKV4 0.48 0.144 1.50 789.0 1479.3VICTL 0.65 0.195 1.60 1272.2 2035.5VICTU 0.36 0.108 1.10 966.6 1063.3

t VICTUP 0.31 0.093 1.33 680.7 905.30 VICTC 0.41 0.123 1.13 1298.2 1470.9

e

Page 112: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e eTable 4.13 Link rcsponsc paramctcrs: Scalcd artificial records matching new UHS for Canada (Atkinson et al, 1998)

(b) Normalizcd link shear forces, Vma"/VIl

Lowa/v Interm. a/v Cascadia eventStorey

ATKVI ATKV2 ATKV3 ATKV4 VICTL VICTU VICTUP VICTC

8 1.46 1.41 1.45 1.40 1.56 1.41 1.28 1.447 1.26 1.48 1.63 1.51 1.61 1.41 1.35 1.496 1.26 1.47 1.54 1.56 1.61 1.31 1.27 1.42

5 1.05 1.34 1.41 1.41 1.46 1.14 1.05 1.28

4 1.10 1.27 1.50 1.39 1.51 1.15 1.03 1.29

3 1.08 1.17 1.53 1.41 1.47 1.15 1.03 1.272 1.12 1.37 1.59 1.45 1.54 1.33 1.12 1.36

t 1 1.14 1.45 1.58 1.46 1.57 1.35 1.17 1.39....

(d) Maximum range of inclastic rotations, max 'Y ranh~

Law a/v Interm. a/v Cascadia eventStorey

ATKVI ATKV2 ATKV3 ATKV4 VICTL VICTU VICTUP VICTC

8 0.078 0.104 0.150 0.109 0.093 0.057 0.035 0.133

7 0.022 0.067 0.111 0.050 0.176 0.047 0.040 0.1546 0.030 0.056 0.058 0.059 0.117 0.025 0.031 0.068

5 0.009 0.034 0.044 0.067 0.057 0.014 0.011 0.0544 0.015 0.030 0.064 0.089 0.068 0.018 0.009 0.0623 0.006 0.011 0.047 0.029 0.087 0.012 0.006 0.0222 0.006 0.022 0.061 0.030 0.120 0.020 0.007 0.0331 0.016 0.047 0.072 0.041 0.171 0.030 0.021 0.049

Page 113: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

roe

fJ

~

A ~~~s -

/

o '00 ICJOO~",, l ,

IZO· nO· tOC-. -1__.. __.4'. _•• _ - . _--1 __ «

EARTHOUAKE SOURCE ZONES

50-tN

Fig. 4.1 Earthquake source zones in Canada (after Basham et alt 1985)

Page 114: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

~

e

21J~

15'§;:J

"10 'B"S J

Cs mS.S -6 -().5 m7 07.5 -8 08.5

Fig. 4.2 Contributions to scismic risk: PGV cqual to 0.3 mls

e

Page 115: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

t~

e

.~

450 :;)

375 (,~300 ~~.pc;

225 ~.;.~~\c;

C5 -5.5 Ill) .(».5 ~7 C7.5 -8 08.S

e

Fig. 4.3 Contributions to seismic risk: PGA cqual to 0.3 g

Page 116: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

"4 -------- --------- ---.

2.5 J.n

NBee__~~. _t ~ • • __

1.5 2.0

'_0'0 - _0'-_0' - 0,'0 __ - l~-~ ----------.

-.- J.l+a

1.0

----, --

n.s

1.0

1.2 ~_--o-.---

0.2

0.0 ~ .. _o -,--

0.0

0.8

•~ 0.6 -i--"-~-~

...!

~~VI

Period (8)

Fig. 4.4 Pscudo-vclocity responsc spcctrum: Whole set of sclectcd historical records

Page 117: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

tC\

e

• .4 ----------- --- ~.---------- ----- ----~

1.2

1.0

-S 0.8->CI)

Po. 0.6

0.4

,~~----._--~---, '._-- -- ---------- -,.~_.. __.---,-

-'.- ).l+cr -- Nl\CC

e

0.0 -t-r----~---~-"--- ·----·--r---- --T---·------~-l--------~-------

0.0 n.5 1.0 1.5

Period (8)

2,0 2.5 3.0

Fig. 4.5 Pscudo-vclocity response spcctrum: Low a/v group of records

Page 118: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

1.6

3.02.52.0

-- Nuee

1.5

Period (8)

- ._------- -~ -'--- ... - --~-----

-.- f.1+a

1.0

-_.~--'.- --------,------~~- _.- - -~~. --- - -----..------_.~~-~

0.5

......- J.t

0.4

0.2

0.0

0.0

1.2 .-.---- -----

1.4 4 •• ~••__••• - ._-_. -._•.

_ 1.0 ~------.--.--­

CI).......!. 0.8

~O,() -l--- ----, '4.1, >... ",.... t 1

t......

Fig. 4.6 Pseudo-vclocity responsc spectrum: Intcrrncdiate a/v group of records

Page 119: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

3.02.52.01.51.0

----~-------------,

i

!

--f.1 !-J-~;:"-----------e=---Smoothed --;

i_NBCC l

!

1.3

1.0

-llIl 0.8"-!

<1>

rA 0.51:.

0.3

0.0

0.0 0.5

Period (5)

Fig. 4.7 Smoothed PS. response spectrurn: Low a/v group of records

1.3 ----.--~ -----------~--------

--J.L-e- Smoothed-a-- ~BCC

1.0

-llIl 0.8.......

!<1>

fIJ 0.51:.

0.3

0.0

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0

Period (5)

Fig. 4.8 Smoothed PS. response spectrurn: Intermediate a/v group of records

4-38

Page 120: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1.3 ~-----------------.....,

0.8 -f--I-----~----~--_\

1.0

0.5 1----1------

0.3 r-I------- ------------~--__l

3530252015105

0.0 ~-----------------....."

o

Time (s)

Fig. 4.9 Intensity function: Low a/v records

1.3

1.0

0.8

-0.5

0.3

0.0

0 5 10 15 20 25

Time(s)

Fig. 4.10 Intensity function: Intermediate a/v records

4-39

Page 121: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

t

e e

I.GI

.g ~.~ -=~~~~-~-=--' ~~~ -=- - ~--------_._..-.~~- .. -~.- -- ."--- ---.--~.----~ .. -~~ ..... ~-'.--. ----~·--~-~;_-~t-:~--~~---~-~··~-~-~~·~j~ ~ '0 ,;\.-J-v'~r'lr"'~~N~·jJt.VVéJ1~~t1.,~'Ii\iI~-----~ :~:~ =~~ .._. _. .._... ,..._...-- -_..---10~- -~-_.... - _. _... -1"5 -------- ..-·---:m---- "-·~~_-~~-._-~·5~-~--=-~-~-.-=--'3p

'rime (II)

1.(; Z

lIiIl ~:~l [-~~'::_~~~~i;==~~~:-~=-;~~-:: ----- --'l'imc(e)

1.(, l

a

1~~l~ -~Ë~T ime (Ii)

Fig 4.11 Tirne-historics of generatcd accc1eration records matching smoothcd spcctrum for low Iv records

Page 122: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

IN<iI

ao'G

j i§<

0,40.2

o-0.2.0,4

'~~.-~__ ~'~.•..~ ...•... ··.·5-~······· ··_·.~~·.'~~~E~~~j~-~.~-~-·=/-:~:;15T ime: (_)

IN<a

t

ao.~

j ~§<

04 _._.__ _ --.... .0)

o-0,2-0,4

T ime (.)

ING3

.=~~~~:~-j~-~j,

c:.gJ i!

~~ --- .--- -."-,, - . -..-.- _.,.- " - - _- - ·-.--.~-~-=~~~~~-~--=~·::--=.·~~·~~·~l

:g~ _.. .. __ .__. ... _.. ._ ..__.., _ _._"" __ ._.__-~~=__ ..2-~·~~=~~~~~-_~·~~~~~'J'ime: (e)

Fig 4.12 Timc-histories of gcncratcd accc1cration records matching smoothcd spectrum for intcnncdiatc Iv records

Page 123: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

(a) Low a/v records (b) lotennediate a/v records

7-·· -

2

_. --_._--_._-----~--.6 .-

8

5

>. -_.~ .. ~--. ---~2tI) 3

- 1

2 i-------·-~·-·-··- -- - ---.------

6

8 ~.~---_._._._.--. '" - - '"

7 ~- -- -----

t' 5 j- -+=:··~-±-a01Ïstë)rical)S 4 - tG I.I~G1· -.-----.ri) ---- I.G2 1 1rJG23 ------- .... --. __....~

--- LG3, UJG3f­it

21,50,5

1o ~ i i i

o2J,50,5

o 1 i i

Cl

Vmu./Vp Vmu/Vp

Fig 4.13 Comparison of structural rcsponsc to historical and brcncratcd records: Maximum normalizcd link shear forces

Page 124: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

(a) Low a/v records (b) Intennediate a/v records

~t;

8 i .-_._-----

7 .-- -'---'-

6 -1------- -- ---

5 i---~~

~ ..ci) l

2

1-.. j

1------ _. ---j

7

()

5t-~ of

ci) l

2--

-----_.--~j

--------

- ---- - - -_. _..__ ._*--

.-.- ,.. ±a (historical)--~- LG 1, r~.TC;-1-- ---_~_J!G2.,l~CS 2 __--- LG3 1 1"'-63

0,250,20,t50,1o,osoIl l , i • i 1

0,150,.o,oso 1 1 1

o

Max Yr>Ul"'t: (rad) Max y,... (rad)

Fig 4.14 Comparison of structural rcsponsc to historical and gcncrated records: Maximum range of link inclastic shear deformations

Page 125: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 5

APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL......_iiiiiiiiliiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiiiili_iiiiiiiiiiili__iiiiiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliii_liiiiiliiiiiiiiiilliiiiiiilliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliilliiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiii&

1bis Chapter describes the use of the proposed iterative procedure for seismic design of

EBFs. The application is illustrated wough e.xamples of three Chevron-type EBFs, these

having four, eight and fourteen storeys and located in Victoria, B.e. The initial frame

members are selected based on sttength, stiffness and ductility requirements of the Standard

(CSA 1994), thus following current Canadian design practice. The propased iterative

procedure is carried out for two generated acceleration records obtained fallawing the

methodology described in the previous Chapter. Ta evaluate the extent to which the iterative

procedure achieved the desired frame behaviour, the inelastic response of members is

examined for the set of historical acceleration records described in Chapter 4. The response

parameters for the final structures are compared to those obtained for the initial structures

for the same set of acceleration records. The current Canadian design procedure and the

proposed iterative procedure are then examined in the Iight of these results.

5.1 Design of initial structures

It was demonstrated in Chapter 3 that the iterative procedure was not sensitive ta the initial

design. Structures to initiate the iterative procedure were thus selected following the present

codified procedure for seismic design of EBFs in Zone 5, to provide a basis for comparison

of the two design procedures.

Details of designs of three initial frames with four, eight and fourteen storeys are described

in the following sections. In aIl cases, frame members were first seleeted to camply with

ductility requirements, and subsequendy verified for sttength and stiffness. This sequence is

appropriate for zones with severe seismic loading.

5-1

Page 126: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

5.1.1 Building layouts and frames elevations

Typical building Iayouts and framing arrangements considered are illustrated in Fig. 3.1. The

Iayout for the eight-storey frame is based on Chien (1987), while those for four and fourteen

storey frame were adopted from Wong (1997). These layouts represent typical commercial

building structures. For each building height, the lateral resistance in one horizontal direction

was provided by two single-bay EBFs located in the central core. For four and fourteen­

storey buildings the same late..ral system was provided in the other horizontal direetio~ while

the eight-storey building had two peripheral moment-resisting frames in that direction.

5.1.2 Load calculations

5.1.2.1 Gravity load

The eight-storey frame was subjected to gtavity load specified by Chien (1987). Gravity loads

for the foUI- and fourteen-storey frame were determined following recommendations by

Wong (1997) (see aIso Han(1998». A summaty of dead and live load for aU three frames is

given in Table 3.1. Loads were applied as unifonnly distributed loads on the beams and

concentrated loads on the columns.

5.1.2.2 Seismic Joad

Summary of the seismic load calculation is shown in Table 5.1. The design base shear, V,

was calculated according to NBCC (1995) as follows:

[5.1] V=(Vc:/R)U = (vSIFW/R)U

where S=1.5/VT (for T > 0.5s); T=0.09~VOs; ~ is the height of the structure in meters; Ds

is the width of the braced bay in meteIS; v is the zonal velocity ratio; U is the calibration

factor, W is the weight of the structure +25% snow, and R is the force reduction factor for

EBFs. AIl relevant parameters are summarized in Table 5.1 for all three frames.

As the fondamental natura! period of many steel structures exceeds the code formula vaiue,

the design was carried out using a base shear on the building of 80% of the value shawn in

5-2

Page 127: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

Table 5.1, as permitted by NBCC (1995). The period of the structures designed was

subsequendy found to he high enough to justify this procedure.

The base shear was diswbuted over the height of the buildings according to requirements of

NBCC (1995). No change in base shear magnitude was made to account for torsion in order

to maintain the consistency between the design and the dynamic analysis performed !ater.

Total seismic load on each single EBF (i.e. one-half of that on the structure) applied at each

storey is given in Table 5.1.

5.1.2.3 Wind Joad

\Vind loads were determined according to NBCC(1995). The specified extemal pressure, p,

is given by:

where q is a reference velocity pressure, Cc: is exposure factor, Cg is gust effect factor and Cp

is extemal pressure coefficient. Summary of wind load calcuIations for 1/10 and 1/30 years

wind for all three frames is given in Table 5.2.

5.1.3 Ductility design

5.1.3.1 General

The ductility design was camed out using an EBF seismic design program (EBFSD)

developed by Han, Redwood and Kasai (1997). The program incorporates the requirements

of Clause 27 of CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 cliscussed previously in the Chapter 2. Some

procedures that go beyond the current Canadian provisions cao aIso be used, such as the

design of members of frame other than links using different amplification factors and

inclusion of moments in column design.

The program EBFSD is briefly described in the following. Shear forces in links are

calculated following the procedure shown in Fig. 1.11. Axial forces induced by earthquake

loading in other frame members are detennined using an approximate statie approach

5-3

Page 128: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

(Redwoo~ 1995) illustrated in Fig. 5.1. The effeets of the appropriately scaled gtavity loads

(1.00 and O.5L) on hraces and columns are subsequendy included. The effect of the gtavity

load comhination (1.25D+l.5L) is also considered for column design since it may he critical

for the top tier columns. Bending moments in heams and hraces are calculated using

expressions developed by Kasaï and Han (1997). Bending moments in columns are included

using equation 1.1 (see section 1.4.2). A more detailed description of the EBFSD program

can be found in Han, Redwood and Kasaï (1997).

5.1.3.2 Modeling assumptions and section selection

Link beams were chosen from Class 1 W sections and assumed fully laterally supported.

Selected sections are shown in column (a) of Tables 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 for four, eight and

fourteen storey frames respectively. The link resistance-to-force demand ratios (a) are listed

in column (b) of the same tables.

Braces were designed as Class 1 or 2 HSS sections. The effective lengtb factor for in-plane

action, K, was taken as 1.0, as required by the Standard while for the out-of-plane action, Ky

equal to 0.9 was selected, relying on the stiff laterai and torsional bracing required at the link

ends. Columns were selected from Class 1 or 2 W or WWF sections, and the same cross­

section was maintained in two storey segments. Columns were assumed continuous and

laterally unsupported between storeys. Effective length factors, I<x and Ky, were taken as 1.0.

It should he noted that aIl the calculations were done with the resistance factor, tP, equal to

1.0, as specified in CSA (1994). Selected brace and column sections are given in columns (c)

and (d) of Tables 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5. The total mass of the structures and fundamental periods

are also included.

5.1.4 Sttength verification

Sttength verification was carried out using the program SODA (Waterloo Engineering

Software 1991). In addition to performing analysis and verification of structures for North

American code requirements, SODA can aIso he used to automatically design steel frames

for static loads while oprirnizing the structural weight.

5-4

Page 129: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

The following loading combinations were considered in strength verification of the three

EBFs:

(1) 1.25D+1.5L

(2) 1.25D+1.5W1/ JO

(3) 1.25D+0.7(1.5L+ 1.5W,/JtJ

(4) 1.0D+0.5L+1.0E+P.â2

For seismic loads P-â effects must be based on elastic deflections multiplied by ~ and the

automated second-order routines available in SODA could not be employed as they are not

based on such amplified defonnations. Therefore, equivalent latera1loads PL12 were used to

account for these effects in loading combination (4).

For the four-storey frame, no further modification of sections was required ta satisfy

strength requirements. For eight-storey frame, beams in storey 3 and 5 were increased by

one size (W530X74 and W460X67 with (X equal to 1.18 and 1.11 respectively), resulting in

increase of structural mass of less than one percent. In gen~ the sections in eight-storey

frames were better utilized compared ta the four-storey frame. The beams had particularly

high response ratios (between 0.90 and 0.98), columns somewhat Iower (0.8 to 0.85) while

brace sections were the least efficient (response ratios between 0.6 to 0.8). For the four­

storey frame, response ratios for all member groups varied between 0.65 and 0.75.

Strength requirements imposed more important section modifications in the fourteen-storey

frame. Halfof the heam sections were increased, as weIl as braces in the rwelfth storey. In an

effoIt to maintain the parameter (X as uniform as possible over the height of the frame, sorne

additional modifications of beams were aIso necessary. Nevertheless, the increase of

structural mass was ooly about four percent. The final sections seleeted ta camply with

sttength requirements are shown in coIumns (a), (c) and (d) of Tahle 5.6.

5-5

Page 130: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPUCATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

5.1.5 Stiffness verification

Inter-storey plastic~ evaluated based on the elasttc deformations multiplied by R, was

aIso checked for aIl frames. The acceptable Iimit for regular structures under seismic loads is

defined by NBCC (1995) as (WO percent of the storey height (O.02hJ. The eight storey frame

just satisfied this requirement, whereas the four storey frame exhibited maximum inter­

storey drift of about one-half of the limit. In both cases, the top storey was the crirical

location.

For the fourteen-storey frame, the inter-storey plastic drift reached 0.03 ~ in the top aine

storeys thereby exceeding the codified value by 50 percent. Hence, it was necessary to

further revise the frame design. For taller frames, a..xial deformations of the columns

contribute more significandy to lateral storey defonnattons as compared to lower &antes, for

which hrace contributions are predominant. Increasing bottom column sections was

confirmed as the most efficient way to control inter-storey drift in upper storeys. "Fine­

tuningft of column and braced sizes in storeys with excessive drift was then made. The

snmmary of revised sections is given in columns (e) and (f) ofTahle 5.6. The structural mass

of this desigü iùcre~ed by 30 percent compared to the design complying with ductiIity and

strength requirements, described in the previous section.

5.1.6. Verification of the link inelastic shear deformation, y

The Iink shear defonnarion, y, is limited by the provisions of Clause 27.6.4 to 0.09 radians

for shear links. To finalize the design, the plastic link rotations were calculated as described

in Section 1.3.1 and compared to the codified limits. The storey drift angle, 9drift used to

calculate y is related to the fust-order elastic drift amplified by O.SR.

VaIues of y obtained for each of three frames in ascending order of the heights were

O.OSrad, O.08Srad and O.089rad, all being within acceptable limits. The three designs were

thus in full conformity with Canadian requirements for ductiIity, strength and stiffness. Note

that an allowance for column moments following Iink yie1ding bas aIso been included, a

feature not specified in CSA (1994).

5-6

Page 131: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

5.2 Final designs

The iterati.ve procedure was then applied for the two generated records discussed in Chapter

4. Final designs were fust obtained for the artificial record from the low a/v group and then

verified for the artificial record from the intennediate a/v group.

The analysis was carried out assuming that beam segments outside the links could exlubit

sorne yielding as long as the stability of these members was ensured. In general, this

approach yields greater economy, since the strict avoidance of ine1astic behaviour in outer

beam segments causes a significant increase of section size, which in tom affects the size of

other members of the frame.

Based on the previous srudies (Koboevic and Redwood, 1997), P-â effects were not

accounted for in the analysis. These srudies demonstrated that second arder forces had

much less effect on inelastic structural respoose than what was suggested by their impact in

the design process.

~fodelling of links and other members of the frame followed the details described in sections

2.3.1.2, 2.3.1.3 and 5.1.3. Special attention was giveo to inclusion of the gravity load since the

program ANSR-1 does not feature the option to specify the unifonnly distributed loads on

the beam-column elements. The gravity forces were thus applied as concentrated loads on

columns at each storey level, while the effects on beams and braces were taken into account

for through initial forces. These forces are used to initialize the element end actions and are

not converted into loads on the nodes. The ooly effect they have on the behaviour of the

system is to influence the onset of plasticity and to affect geomettic sriffness, if considered

Initial forces were specified as bending moment for beams at the beam to brace jonction and

the axial force for braces.

The procedure converged in three, five and two iterations for four-, eight- and fourteen­

storey frames respectively. The members seleeted for the low a/v record exhibited

satisfactory behaviour for the intermediate a/v record. The ooly exception was the top

column tier in the eight-storey frame, which was subsequeody increased by one size. The

5-7

Page 132: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

final selection for brace and column sections is given in Table 5.7. Link beam sections are

not listed; they are identical to those of the initial designs.

5.3 Study of the inelastic response

5.3.1 General

To evaluate the success of the two design methods in producing structures with the desired

seismic behavioUIy the inelastic response of initial and final designs was examined. To

facilitate discussion in the following sections, the two designs are denoted as "Set 1" and

"Set 2" structures respectively. For the fourteen-storey frame, the iterative procedure

imposed only the modification of one brace section in the first storey. This minor change

was not expected to influence the dynamic response in any significant way and therefore for

this frame height only the behaviour of the initial design was studied. The non-lïnear

dynamic analysis was carried out for the fourteen bistorical records described in Section

4.2.3.3. With a/v ratios in the low and intermediate ranges, these records are representative

ofwestern Canadian seismic events.

The results presented hereinafter pay particular attention to; (i) location of the inelastic

activity, (u) number and duration of inelastic excursions, (m) maximum induced shear forces

and shear deformations of the linksy (VI) maximum inelastic rotations of outer beam

segments and (vil) inter-storey drift. For each record within the same a/v group the

maximum values of the response parameter considered are found at every storey, and the

mean and mean plus one standard deviation are evaluated for each of the two record groups.

Comparison with design limits prescribed in the Standard, discussed in the following

sections, was in ail cases clone with respect to the mean plus one standard deviation.

5.3.2 Response of the initial structures (Set 1)

5.3.2.1 Four-storey &ame

As foreseen in both design procedures, a considerable amount of yielding took place in the

links. The fOUI-storey frame was equally affeeted by both a/v groups of records.

Simultaneous yielding of al1 four links was frequendy observed for twelve of the fourteen

records. As indicated in Table 5.8, the energy dissipation took place mosdy in the three

5-8

Page 133: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

bottom links, an~ for both groups of records, the contnbution of the bottom storey link

was the most signifiant.

The maximum induced shear force was normaIized by the nominal shear resistance of the

Iink CYp= 0.5s~y) and the results are illustrated in Fig. 5.2. All1inks developed shear forces

of similar magnitudes, with peak values slighdy higher for intennediate a/v record group.

The overload value assumed in design (1.35V~ was exceeded in all storeys up to a maximum

of about 25 percent. Detailed results are listed in Table 5.8.

As can be seen from the same table, alllinks experienced significant inelastic shear rotations.

The limit prescribed by the Standard (O.09rad) was exceeded in all but one storey, with the

maximum reaching about 0.17 rad in the top storey for both groups of records. However,

with the exception of the top storey link, the maximum range of shear deformations, max

YratlgI:' as defined in section 1.2.1, was within 0.18 rad. The range was identified by Kasaï and

Popov (1986b) as the important parameter in characterizing link ductile behaviour. The same

study has demonstrated that a proper1y stiffened short link can safely sustain a shear

deformation range of this magnitude.

The extent of overload of columns and braces is shown in Table 5.9. This is expressed as the

summation of the number of rime increments (each of 0.04s, chis being the frequency with

which the output was saved) during which any column or brace in the frame was subjected

to forces greater than the nominal resistance for a particular earthquake record. Instability of

braces and columns was observed for all records. With the exception of one record, the

columns in the top storey and the second storey were not affected. Compared to lowa/v

records, the intennediate a/v records cause more frequent loss of stability in braces. The

least affected braces for both groups of records were chose at level two.

Columns (a) and (b) of Table 5.10 snmmarize results for the inelastic rotations of the outer

beam segments. The maximum absolute rotation within one rime step and the absolute

maximum accumulated inelastic rotation are identical, which indicates that the critical outer

5-9

Page 134: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

beam segment yielded ooly once during the loading history. The magnitudes of inelasric

rotations are all weIl below O.Dlcad.

Results for inter-storey drift are shown in columns (e) and ID of Table 5.8. The location and

the magnitude of the maximum. drift varied with the particular record. On average slighdy

higher values were obtained for intermediate a/v records. For both groups of records the

codified limit of O.D~ (equal to 74 mm) was exceeded in the top storey, and reachcd

maximum values of about 80 mm. Note that a sttong correlation between the maximum.

inter-storey inelastic drift and maximum inelasttc shear rotation was evident in both location

and magnitude.

5.3.2. 2 Eigbt-storey &ame

Low a/v records induced much more yielding in the links of eight-storey frame than the

intermediate a/v records. While for the first group all eight links were often observed to

yield simultaneously, for the second group, the top storey link yielded most frequendy, and

the maximum number of links yielding at the same rime did not exceed five.

As illustrated in Fig 5.3, distribution of maximum shear force over the height of the

structure was different for the two groups of records. For low a/v records, links in ail

storeys developed shear forces of similar magnitudes with slighdy higher values observed in

the top three storeys. The overload value anticipated in the Standard was exceeded in ail

storeys by the same margin found for the four storey structure (about 20 percent). For

intermediate a/v records, ooly the top two storey links attained shear forces comparable to

those caused by low a/v records. Shear forces observed in aIl other links were within the

predicted limits.

As can he seen from Table 5.11, maximum shear defonnations followed the trends found

for the shear forces. In general, links in the eight-storey frame underwent smaller

defonnations compared to those of the four-storey structure, with the exception of the top

storey link where the maximum of0.205 rad was observed for intermediate a/v records. For

this record group, this was the only storey where the limit of 0.09 rad was exceeded While

5-10

Page 135: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

the shear deformations were concentrated in the top storey for intennediate a/v records,

they were more equally spread betweeo the storeys for low a/v records. In three storeys the

recorded value was higher than the design limit, with maximum excess of about 30 percent.

In ail cases but one, the maximum range of shear deformations was within the acceptable

range for both groups of records.

As indicated in Table 5.12, loss of the stability of braces and columns was predicted for ail

but one record. Unlike in the four-storey structure, the observed damage in braces and

columns was mainly concentrated in the upper two storeys, this being the case for both

groups of records.

Results for the inelastic rotations of outer beam segments are summarized in columns (c)

and (cl) of Table 5.1O. ~Iagnitudes of observed inelastic rotations were larger than those in

the four-storey frame. The ma..'CÎmum inelastic rotation within any rime step slighdy exceeded

0.015rad, and the maximum accumulated inelastic rotation was O.025rad. The ductility

demand 00 these beam segments was assessed using the analogy with long EBF links

predominantly vielding in flexure. For this type of 1ink, CSA (1994) imposes a rotation limit

ofO.03rad to insure stable hysteretic behaviour. Thus, it was judged that the inelastic rotation

of the outer beam segment smaIler or equal to 0.03 rad could be considered acceptable.

Results for the inter-storey drift are given in columns (e) and G) of Table 5.11. Similarly to

the four-storey frame, the maximum. values occurred in the same storey as the maximum.

inelastic shear rotations, and the distributions of the two over the height of the frame had

similar trends for both groups of records. The design limit (72mm) was exceeded oaly in the

top storey for the intennediate a/v group.

5.3.2.3 Founeen-storey &ame

Of the three Set 1 structures studied, the fourteeo-storey frame experienced the least

inelastic activity in the links for ail records. The maximum number of simultaneously yie1ding

links was e1even but this was for only two of the fourteen records; for all the others, the

maximum number did not exceed six. For both groups of records, very little inelastic aetivity

5-11

Page 136: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

was observed in the top storey link. Most of the energy was dissipated in the bonom link,

however for intermediate a/v records significant energy dissipation occurred aIso in the Il th,

12th and 13th storeys.

As shown in Fig. 5.4, similar distributions of shear force were obtained for bath groups of

records. In general, higher forces developed in the top and the bottom part of the frame.

The abrupt change of shear force magnitude was observed in the top storey link. It should

be noted that this link had the largest a (see Table 5.7) amongst all the links in frames

examined, for reasons of providing the pure shear link at that location.

The link shear force magnitude distributions were slighdy more uniform for low a/v records.

For bath groups of records, the largest forces were observed in the twelfth storey, exceeding

the overload value anticipated in design by 20 and 25 percent for low and intennediate a/v

records respectively. To a smaller extent, the design limit (1.35V~ was aIso exceeded in the

bottom of the frame. The maximum shear forces in all other links were within the limits for

both groups of records.

Columns (b) and (c) of Table 5.13 summarize the results for inelastic shear rotations.

Maximum values slighdy surpassed the design limit (0.09rad) in one storey for low a/v

records, and in four storeys for intermediate a/v records. Maximum deformations were

concenttated in the upper part of the structure, varying between 0.09 to O.l2rad. They are

significandy smaller than those found for four and eight storey frames. The maximum range

of shear defonnations was well within the admissible limits, and did not exceed O.14rad for

any of the records studied.

For five of the fourteen records, sorne instability of braces was predieted, aIl of this in the

first storey and was of significandy smaller scope than for the four- and eight-storey frames

(see Table 5.14). AIl of the columns had the desired elastic response.

5-12

Page 137: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

As shown in columns (e) and (f) of Table 5.10. outer beam segments developed some very

restricted yielding with IDa...wnum. ine1astic rotations of ooly O.OO2rad The inter-storey~

shown in columns (e) and G) ofTable 5.13. was well below the design limit (74mm), reaching

a maximum value of 50mm. The correlation between the Înter-storey drift and maximum.

inelastic shear rotation found for the {\VO other frames was also observed.

5.3.3 Response of the final structures (Set 2)

5.3.3.1 Response of the links

The amount of yielding observed in links of the Set 2 structures was similar to that observed

in the links of Set 1 structures. The location of inelastic activity as weIl as the number of

links yielding simultaneously were comparable for all records studied. This was anticipated,

since the link sections of final and initial desjgns were the same.

Table 5.15 shows the distnbution of the ma.,Qmum induced shear forces for the four- and

eight-storey frames. For the four-storey frame the iterarive procedure was effective in

reducing peak values (mean plus one standard deviation), although slighdy higher values

were observed in a few cases for the Set 2 structures. A more uniform distribution of forces

was also achieved. For the eight-storey frame, little difference was observed in the shear

force magnitudes for the initial and final designs.

The results obtained for inelastic shear rotations are summarized in Tables 5.16 and 5.17.

While the links in the Set 2 four-storey frame deformed less for low a/v records compared

to those of the initial design, the defonnations of the latter slighdy increased for the

intennediate a/v records. The design limit of 0.09rad was exceeded in the same storeys as in

the initial frame. The peak value of the ma..~ yrange for low a/v records was reduced to 0.15rad,

whereas for the intermediate a/v records the peak value of max Yange still remained weIl

above the acceptable limit of O.18rad.

For the eight-storey frame, the procedure was more successfui in controIling the ine1astic

shear rotations. The peak values were significandy reduced for links in the Set 2 structure for

both groups of records, exceeding the design limit ooly by a small margin. In addition, the

5-13

Page 138: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

distribution of y became more uniform, which was particularly noticeable for the

intennediate a/v records.

The improved behaviour of links in Set 2 structures was mainly achieved in tenns of more

uniform distribution of maximum Iink shear forces and defonnations. Overall response of

links in Set 1 and 2 eight-storey frame was monitored through coefficients l:l:Vdiff/l:ny and

~~ydiff/l:ny, where l:l:Vdàrr/~nV is the sum of differences between the actual Iink shear force

and 1.35Vpt l:l:Ydiff/l:ny is the sum of the differences between the actuallink ine1astic shear

rotations and 0.09rad, while Lny and ~ny represent the number of rime steps in which the

links shear forces and inelastic rotations exceeded 1.35Vp and O.09rad respectively.

Summation was done for links in aIl storeys at instances when yielding of Iinks occurred, and

results are expressed as mean values for each a/v group of records. As indicated in Table

5.18, in aIl cases, smaller values of these coefficients were observed for Set 2 structure.

5.3.3.2 Response ofother members of the frame

The desired elastic response of columns and braces can he guaranteed ooly for the records

which were used in the iterative design procedure. Thus, for the historical records used in

this response study sorne instability of these elements can be anticipated. The study of the

inelastic response of the Set 2 structures confirmed that the iterative procedure was

particularly successful in decreasing stability problems of columns and braces. The results

obtained for these structures are summarized in Table 5.19.

The overaIl ductility demand on the outer beam. segments has a1s0 decreased for the Set 2

structures. The results for four- and eight- storey frame are illustrated in Table 5.20.

Somewhat larger rotational demand on the Set 2 eight-storey frame was observed for one

record ooly, this still being below 0.03rad

5-14

Page 139: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPLICATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

5.3.3.3 Inter-storey drift

Results obtained for inelastic inter-storey drift for Set 2 structures are given in Table 5.21. In

aIl cases, the procedure successfully reduced this drift, and the maximum exceeded the

design limits only by a very small margin.

5.4 Comparison of two design procedures

The following observations are based on the results presented in previous sections:

(i) For taller structures the two design procedures yielded almost identical structures. For

these frame height, the goveming design requirement of the current design procedure

was the inter-storey inelastic drift;

(u) In both approaches, for all three frames, the overload in links exceeded the value of

1.35 VP' used in the current design procedure;

(w) Although the beams were identical for the two sets of structures, the link overload was

in genera1 slightly smaller in the structure obtained by the iterative procedure, and the

distribution of the maximum shear forces was more uniform;

(Iv) High values of inelastic shear defonnations were observed for structures produced by

both procedures;

(v) In general, inelastic shear deformations exceeded the present design limit of O.09rad by

a sma1ler margin for structures designed using the iterative procedure;

(Vl) Strong positive correlation was observed between maximum inelastic shear rotations

and inter-storey drift;

(VÏJ.) Maximum inter-storey drift was doser to the design limit (2% of storey height) and

better controlled for structures obtained by the iterative procedure;

(vÜ1) For both procedures, the outer beam segments underwent small inelastic rotations;

(L"'C) Signïficant reduction of column and brace distress (loss of stability) was observed in

the structures designed following the iterative procedure.

It should he noted that the columns in the initial structures were in fact designed with an

aIlowance for the effeets of bending moments as suggested by Kasaï and Han (1997).

Without this additional constraint, which is not a part of cun:ent Canadian procedure,

columns would have experienced even more distress.

5-15

Page 140: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

5. APPUCATION OF THE PROCEDURE AS DESIGN TOOL

5.6 Summary

This Chapter bas applied the proposed iterative procedure for seismic design of EBFs to

three frames with four, eigbt and fourteen storeys. The procedure was iniriated with the

designs fully complying with the present codified requirements. While for the lower frames,

the brace and column sections of initial and final designs differed, for taller frames, both

approaches yielded almost identica1 structures.

The success of the two design approaches in producing EBF structures with the desired

seismic response was evaluated by comparing the dynamic response of corresponding pairs

of designs for the selected histoncal records. For both design approaches, high shear forces

and deformations were observed, particularly for the lowest frame. The overloads in links

exceeded values anticipated in the current Canadian design procedure. The proposed

method however, in general, conttibuted to a more unifonn distribution of link shear force

over the height of the frame, and resulted in slighdy reduced overload. The maximum

inelastic sbear rotations were better conttolled in these structures, and 50 was the inter-5torey

drift. The most significanc improvement in the behaviour was observed in the response of

hrnce~ ~"d t:'oh.!mns, wmch exhibited much less disttess compared to those of the structures

designed following CUIIent design procedures.

5-16

Page 141: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 5.1 Seismic load calculation (Zone 5)

Fourteen-storey frame Four-storey frame Eight-storey frameStorey h" W)i, W)i, FJframe W.. W.. Fx/frame h" Wx W" FJframe

(m) (kN) factor (kN) (kN) factor (kN) (m) (kN) factor (kN)

14 52.6 2762 0.050 350.0613 48.9 7889 0.134 269.0312 45.2 7889 0.124 248.95Il 41.5 7889 0.114 228.8810 37.8 7889 0.103 206.799 34.1 7889 0.093 186.728 30.4 7889 0.083 166.64 29.7 1913.4 0.217 494.97 36.7 7889 0.073 146.56 26.1 1913.4 0.191 327.06 23.0 7889 0.063 126.49 22.5 1913.4 0.164 281.9

U1 5 19.3 7889 0.053 106.41 18.9 1913.4 0.138 236.81....-..J 4 15.6 7889 0.043 86.33 2762 0.181 170.90 15.3 1913.4 0.112 191.7

3 11.9 7889 0.022 66.25 7889 0.395 372.87 Il.7 1913.4 0.086 146.62 8.2 7889 0.022 44.17 7889 0.272 256.84 8.1 1913.4 0.059 101.51 4.5 7954 0.012 24.09 7954 0.151 142.58 4.5 1913.4 0.033 56.4-.-.........._-....._-----_.._--_......__._----..._---.-........._----..........._--_......_---.-..---.-.._....._............_._...-_...................__.-------_.._---..-..._..._.._.__..._--------------------...1: 105384 1 2257.35 26494 1 944.25 15307.2 1 1836.8

T Nuee: (s) 1.58 0.57 0.95S 1.19 1.98 1.54

V~ (kN) 37622 15737 15390V (kN) 4514.7* 1888.4* 3673.6*FI (kN) 499.3 0 122.8

Z,.=5, Za=5, v=0.3, 1=1.0, F=1.0, R=4·NOTE: 80 percenl ofVwas used 10 ca/cu/ale Fxand Ft

e

Page 142: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 5.2 Wind load calculations

88' (a) Wind-ward (b) Lee-ward (c) l:CcCo(d) qCcCpCg Wind load (kN)

c- (kPa)Storey ~ .., 0.8 (a)

~foCol .- Cc(Z) Cc: (H/2) + 1/10 1/30 1/10 1/30~~

0.5 (b) per frame per frame

14 52.6 1.02 0.72 1.17 1.41 1.70 46.91 56.6813 48.9 0.98 0.72 1.14 1.37 1.66 91.48 110.5412 45.2 0.94 0.72 1.11 1.34 1.62 89.06 107.62Il 41.5 0.90 0.72 1.08 1.30 1.57 86.54 104.57

>. 10 37.8 0.86 0.72 1.05 1.26 1.52 83.90 101.38lU

1.02~ 9 34.1 0.82 0.72 1.22 1.47 81.14 98.04...(/)

8 30.4 0.77 0.72 0.98 1.17 1.42 78.21 94.511

c:lU 7 26.7 0.72 0.72 0.94 1.13 1.36 75.10 90.75lU...~

23.0 0.90 1.08 1.30 71.77=' 6 0.67 0.72 86.730~ 5 19.3 0.62 0.72 0.85 1.02 1.24 68.16 82.36

4 15.6 0.55 0.72 0.80 0.96 1.16 64.18 77.553 11.9 0.50 0.72 0.76 0.91 1.10 60.72 73.372 8.2 0.50 0.72 0.76 0.91 1.10 60.72 73.371 4.5 0.50 0.72 0.76 0.91 1.10 67.28 81.30

8 29.7 0.76 0.54 0.88 1.23 1.48 39.78 48.077 26.1 0.72 0.54 0.84 1.17 1.42 76.11 91.96

~ 6 22.5 0.67 0.54 0.80 1.12 1.35 72.41 87.49~

0 5 18.9 0.61 0.54 0.76 1.06 1.28 68.40 82.65...(/)

1

15.3..ë 4 0.55 0.54 0.71 0.99 1.19 63.99 77.32.~ 3 11.7 0.50 0.54 0.67 0.93 1.13 60.47 73.06~

2 8.1 0.50 0.54 0.67 0.93 1.13 60.47 73.061 4.5 0.50 0.54 0.67 0.93 1.13 68.02 82.19

>. 4 27.0* 32.6* 24.99 30.19lU~

0 3 27.0* 32.6* 49.99 60.38...(/)1~ 2 27.0* 32.6* 49.99 60.38='0~ 1 27.0* 32.6* 49.99 66.91

*NOTE: in kN/m

5-18

Page 143: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 5.3 Four-storey frame: Ductility design - summary of selected sections (currentcodified design procedure)

Storey (a) Beams (b)a (b) Braces (c) Columns Mass (kg) Period (s)

4 W130X28 1.49 HSS 152XI02X8W250X33

3 W310X60 1.17 HSS 203X152X6

2 W360X79 1.17 HSS 203X203X84860 1.05

1 W530X66 1.14 HSS203X203Xl1W310X79

NOTE: Sections selected in ductiUty design satisfy strengtht inelastic inter-storey driftand yrequirements.

Table 5.4 Eight-storey frame: Ductility design - summary of selected sections (currentcodified design procedure)

Storey (a) Beams (b)a (c) Braces (d) Columns Mass (kg) Period (s)

8 W200X42 1.15 HSS 178Xt78XI07 W310X60 1.07 HSS 203X152X10

W200X52

6 W360X72 1.05 HSS 254X15~X11

5 W460X60 1.05 HSS 305X203X10W310X107

4 W460XG8 1.05 HSS 305X203Xl119560 1.91

3 W530X66 1.07 HSS 305X305XI0WWF 350X176

2 W530X74 1.11 HSS 305X305X101 W610XI01 LOG HSS 305X305XI0

WWF400X273

Aner sttength verification, following sections were modified:

Bearn at storey 3: W530X74 (a=1.18)

Bearn at storey 5: W460XG7 (a=1.11)Mass: 19701 kgPeriod:1.89 s

NOTE: No other section modifications were necessary to satis.fy inter-storey inelasticdrift or y requirements.

5-19

Page 144: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 5.5 Fourteen-storey frame: Ductility design - summary of selected sections(currcnt codified design procedure)

Storcy (a) Bcams (b)a (c) Braccs (cl) Columns Mass (kg) Period (s)

14 W200X42 1.78 HSS 203X203X613 W250X39 1.18 HSS 203X203X8

W200X52

12 W310X52 1.17 HSS 254X152X8Il W360X72 1.16 HSS 254X254X8

W310XI07

10 W460X60 1.18 HSS 305X203Xl19 W460X68 1.16 HSS 305X305X10

W310X179

8 W460X82 1.16 HSS 305X305X107 W460X89 1.14 HSS 305X305XI0

W360X237 50367 3.07

6 W460X97 1.16 HSS 305X305X10U1 HSS 305X305XI0 WWF 450X342N 5 W530X85 1.140

4 W530XI01 1.16 HSS 305X305X10

3 W610X82 1.15 HSS 305X305X10 WWF 550X420

2 W610X82 1.13 HSS 305X305XI01 W610X125 1.12 HSS 305X30SX10 WWF 600X551

e

Page 145: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 5.6 Fourteen-storey frame: Verification of sttength and inelastic inter-storey drift - summary of selected sections(currcnt codificd design procedure)

StoreyAfter strength verification Inelastic intcr-storey drift requirement

(a) Bcams (b)a (c) Braccs (d) Columns (e) Braces (f) Columns

14 W200X42 1.78 HSS 203X203X6W200X52

HSS 305X305XIlW250X5813 W200X59 1.30 HSS 203X203X8 HSS 305X305X13

12 W360X64 1.30 HSS 254X254X8 HSS 305X305X13 W310X226Il W360X79 1.28 HSS 254X254X8

W310XI07HSS 305X305X13

10 W410X74 1.29 HSS 305X203XIl HSS 305X305X13 W360X2879 W410X85 1.29 HSS 305X305XI0

W310X179HSS 305X305X13

8 W460X97 1.35 HSS 305X305X10 HSS 305X305XIl WWF500X4567 W530X85 1.29 HSS 305X305XI0 W360X237

HSS 305X305XIlV11 6 W610X82 1.31 HSS 305X305XI0 HSS 305X305XllN- HSS 305X305Xl1 WWF450X342 HSS 305X305Xll WWF600X5515 W610XI01 1.31

4 W610XI01 1.26 f-ISS 305X305XI0 HSS 305X305Xll3 W610XI01 1.22 HSS 305X305X13 WWF550X420 HSS 305X305Xl1 WWF600X551

2 W610XI01 1.19 HSS 305X305X13 HSS 305X305X111 W610X125 1.12 HSS 305X305Xll WWF600X551 HSS 305X305XIl

WWF650X598.. -.......... -._.-.- ........................ -............. -................................. _-- .................................. _................ _.- -- .............Mass (kg) 52324 68546--Period (5) 2.99 2.76

e

Page 146: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.7 Proposed iterative design procedure: Summary of selected sections

StoreyFour-storey frame

Braces Columns

Eight-storey frame

Braces Columns

Fourteen-storey frame

Braces Columns

W250X58

W360X287

W310X226

WWF600X551

WWF600X551

WWF500X456

14 HSS 305X305X1313 HSS 305X305X1312 HSS 305X305X1311 HSS 305X305X1310 HSS 305X305X139 HSS 305X305X138 HSS 178X178X13 7 HSS 305X305Xl17 HSS 254X152Xl1 W250X67 HSS 305X305Xl1

6 HSS 305X203XI0 7 HSS 305X305Xl t5 HSS 305X203X13 W310X143 HSS 305X305Xl1

4 HSS 152X152X6 7 HSS 305X203Xll .. 7 HSS 305X305Xl 13 HSS 203X152Xl0 W200X36 HSS 305X203Xl1 WWI~350X192 HSS 305X305Xl 1

2 HSS 203X203XI0 7 HSS305X203Xl1 7 HSS 305X305Xl 1 ,1 HSS 254X254XI0 W310XI07 HSS305X305XI0 WWF400X273 HSS 305X305Xl1 WWF650X598

••••••• --- •••••••• --- ••• -- ••••••••••••••••• -- ••• -- •••• - ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ·_-_·.····.· ••••••••• •••••••• w •••••••••••••• • __ •

Mass (kg) 5716 21277 68699

Period (s) 0.94 1.86 2.75

1Il1

~

Page 147: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table S.8 Four-storey frame, Set 1: l..ink response parameters and inter-storey inc1astic drift

e

(a) Mean values

Low a/v records Interrnediate a/v recordsStorcy

(a) Vmu/Vfl (b) Ymllt (rad) (c) max y nnL'e (rad) (d) Eh (c) â (mm) (f) Vmu/VIl (g) Ymu (rad) (h) max 'Y ranUt (rad) (i) Eh (j) â (mm)

4 1.36 0.098 0.123 30.24 53.13 1.42 0.148 0.219 52.43 70.78

3 1.39 0.084 0.096 79.31 46.57 1.49 0.067 0.104 100.6 41.00

2 1.29 0.051 0.061 71.66 32.08 1.31 0.050 0.064 74.44 31.83

1 1.43 0.090 0.105 142.8 51.55 1.32 0.061 0.071 116.1 38.66

V1 (a) Mean plus one standard deviation1

~Low a/v records Interrncdiate a/v records

StoreyVma./Vp (b) Ymn. (rad) (c) max y r.mL~ (rad) (d) Eh (e) A (mm) (t) Vmn/VIl (g) Ymax (rad) (h) max 'Y raoUt (rad) (i) Eh (j) â (mm)

4 1.41 0.167 0.191 36.55 79.56 1.44 0.172 0.238 62.53 79.913 1.45 0.149 0.157 114.1 70.36 1.56 0.102 0.138 138.5 54.412 1.35 0.075 0.086 105.1 41.51 1.43 0.073 0.088 121.3 41.461 1.49 0.137 0.146 195.3 72.45 1.44 0.109 0.115 193.6 61.1I6

Page 148: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.9 Four-storey frame t Set 1: Response of columns and braces (duration of exccss loading)

Storey(a) Low a/v records (b) Intennediate a/v records

ALl LPCI LPC2 LPSI Cl C2 AL2 L»S2 MSl MS2 NHBl NHB2 NGOI NG02

4 35 37 45 33 66 74 98 67 74 62 111 128 97 993

CI)

3 18 68 33 65 72 69 60 28 20 17 20 45 53GJu

2 ~ - - 2 - 1 6 19 13 1 - - - - 9~

1 5 9 40 12 31 53 31 27 6 2 - - 2 11..._._-..._..........._--_..._---------------.------_..__......_--_..._----_...-...............__....-------.------_.------------. .._-----............._............-.--_......._-................_-......._..----_.._--_.._..._....-...._--_....._-.....----...._-.- ...

Total 43 64 155 78 163 205 217 167 109 84 128 148 144 172

2731163281426414751323973774

3 ~ 111 101 47 24 8572 ëS - - - - 184

1 U 14 23 118 37 862 130 87 62 23 38 19 13 69 48..........._-_._-_ _---..- _ _-----_ _ _-_ _- -- _--.-----_ __ ...-- - _-- _.-_ - _..__ _ __...........•.......•.•..._-_.-.•.........._ - _.Total 125 124 165 61 1903 507 484 194 498 679 161 341 185 321

V1

~

Page 149: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table S.10 Set 1 structures: Maximum inclastic rotations of outer beam segments

e

Inelastic rotation, a (rad)

Earthquake Four-storey frame Eight-storey frame Fourteen-storey frame

record omn e IccumOmall

e Ic:cum emalla ICCum

mn mail mail

ALt 0.0001 0.0001 0.01 t6 0.0116 0.0020 0.0020

~LPCI 0.0011 0.0011 0.0131 0.0131 0.0017 0.0017

........... LPC2 0.0024 0.0024 0.0055 0.0055 0.0018 0.0018~

! LPSI 0.0003 0.0003 0.0079 0.0079Cl 0.0006 0.0006 0.0089 0.0089C2 0.0044 0.0044 0.0137 0.0137 0.0003 0.0003_._.w .. __ ~ .......... __ ........................ __ ...... __ ...................................................... __ .................... _. _____ ................ _. __ .. ___ ................. _____ ...• __ .......................... __ .. __ ..... ___ ........

AL2 - - 0.0125 0.0125 0.0002 0.0002U1 > LPS2 0.0032 0.0032 0.0138 0.0138 0.0005 0.0005~ "-CJl ~ MS1 0.0024 0.0024 0.0129 0.0149

~

~ MS2 0.0026 0.0026 0.0122 0.0144

j NHBt 0.0045 0.0045 0.0139 0.0164 0.0003 0.0003NHB2 0.0021 0.0021 0.0154 0.0204

Q NGDl 0.0036 0.0036 0.0157 0.0257......

NG02 0.0026 0.0026 0.0161 0.0233

Page 150: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.11 Eight-storey frame, Set 1: Link responsc parameu:rs and intcr-storcy inclastic drift

(a) Mean values

Low a/v records Intermediate a/v recordsStorey

(a) VmaJV0 (b) Ymn (rad) (c) max y ramn: (rad) (d) Eh (c) J1 (mm) (f) VmaJV Il (g) Ymu (rad) (h) max y ranll': (rad) (i) Eh (;) J1 (mm)

8 1.55 0.086 0.110 62.45 52.60 1.66 0.140 0.180 141.3 67.03

7 1.65 0.090 0.105 123.9 53.77 1.56 0.064 0.077 94.95 39.786 1.56 0.063 0.085 128.3 43.20 1.36 0.039 0.046 46.02 30.535 1.43 0.044 0.060 85.81 34.85 1.13 0.016 0.019 16.08 20.484 1.44 0.042 0.056 106.1 31.33 1.12 0.014 0.017 16.47 17.743 1.41 0.031 0.034 62.69 25.45 1.17 0.008 0.012 7.21 13.942 1.46 0.047 0.054 84.85 29.63 1.29 0.018 0.022 21.45 16.69

CJ11 1 1.46 0.059 0.069 180.0 38.08 1.30 0.031 0.040 67.58 24.89NC\

(a) Mean plus one standard dcviation

Low a/v records Intermediate a/v recordsStorcy

Vma.. /V,.. (b) Ymu (rad) (c) max y fanlR: (rad) (d) Eh (c) J1 (mm) (f) Vma•.IVIl (g) Ymax (rad) (h) max y ranll': (rad) (i) Eh (j) J1 (mm)

8 1.64 0.120 0.137 79.73 65.06 1.70 0.205 0.237 178.5 90.297 1.73 0.121 0.138 186.9 66.70 1.63 0.092 0.106 130.2 51.046 1.70 0.086 0.116 226.9 53.01 1.51 0.060 0.068 84.64 40.545 1.60 0.059 0.082 153.7 41.30 1.29 0.031 0.034 40.61 28.604 1.63 0.058 0.081 190.1 38.29 1.28 0.024 0.029 40.41 23.603 1.59 0.046 0.050 118.2 32.71 1.26 0.013 0.018 16.12 17.572 1.63 0.081 0.087 149.7 43.19 1.36 0.027 0.032 31.83 21.151 1.59 0.095 0.106 302.4 54.68 1.38 0.049 0.055 87.50 33.54

Page 151: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.12 Eight-storey frame, Set 1: Response of columns and braces (duration of excess loading)

StoreyALI

(a) Law a/v records

LPCI LPC2 LPSI Cl C2 AL2 LPS2

(b) 1ntermcdiate a/v records

MSI MS2 NHBl NHB2 NGOI NG02

8 17 36 - 6 - 25 42 20 40 36 65 64 36 58

7 24 112 27 17 42 79 46 26 12 5 18 20 19 41

6 6 88 10 - 19 48 15 5 - - - - - 5II)

5 ~ - 35 - - 7 94 ~ - 37 - - 13 123 - 92 - 20 - - - 5

1 - 20 - - - 401 •••_ ••••_ .•••••.••••••••••.•••...••.•••••_ _.. ..•••.••••••••••••••.••••.•.••••••••••.•••.••••...•.•.•••••••••.•...•••••_ ••.••_ ••••••••••_.__._••••••••••.•_ ••••••••.•••.•..•.

~ Total 47 357 37 23 81 182 103 51 52 41 83 84 55 104

2384617314411355

41

3

70926

56

18

182343

Ju

87654321 - 3 - - - - - _

....................................__.__._---_ _--..-----------_ _-_._-_ _--_.- -- _-.-----_ -_ _---------_.-- -- _ _----------._-_.._--_ _-_.._--_..-._------.._----_._--. _ _..-_.Total 343 259 - 26 712 1 4 55 13 1 144 73 461 238

Page 152: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.13 Fourteen-storey frame, Set 1: Link responsc pararncters and inter-storey inelastic drift

(a) Mean values

Low a/v records Intcrmediate a/v recordsStorcy , . .

(a) VmaJVIl (b) 'Ymn (rad) (c) max 'Y ranL'\: (rad) (d) Eh (e) ~ (mm) (f) Vml.JV fl (g) 'Ymax (rad) (h) max y ran.:e (rad) (1) Eh (J) ~ (mm)

14 0.91 0.005 0.008 0.10 21.10 1.18 0.020 0.027 6.74 21.5913 1.47 0.044 0.058 37.75 34.82 1.67 0.085 0.109 135.1 40.5812 1.51 0.071 0.080 74.02 44.28 1.62 0.085 0.102 145.3 41.8511 1.48 0.064 0.075 80.18 41.55 1.50 0.067 0.076 98.52 39.3010 1.38 0.053 0.062 65.79 38.38 1.35 0.053 0.059 54.45 35.419 1.33 0.035 0.047 56.09 33.47 1.25 0.031 0.035 27.33 28.068 1.22 0.025 0.031 31.78 30.20 1.08 0.012 0.015 8.38 20.93

Ul1

7 1.20 0.019 0.025 29.58 27.37 1.05 0.009 0.012 7.56 18.40N00

6 1.15 0.017 0.022 24.68 25.27 1.01 0.006 0.009 4.41 16.245 1.16 0.017 0.024 30.55 22.87 1.01 0.006 0.008 5.24 14.394 1.17 0.017 0.024 40.33 20.52 1.07 0.009 0.011 10.51 14.343 1.22 0.016 0.022 61.47 18.72 1.12 0.015 0.018 21.93 15.792 1.29 0.022 0.030 92.86 18.62 1.22 0.024 0.029 45.54 18.561 1.43 0.031 0.046 227.6 24.73 1.37 0.038 0.046 129.7 26.99

Page 153: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.13 Conl' d

(b) Mean plus one standard deviation

Low a/v records Intennediate a/v recordsStorey

Vmu/Vr (b) Ymu (rad) (c) max y ran'! (rad) (cl) Eh (e) L\ (mm) (f) Vm~"/V0 (g) 'Ymu (rad) (h) max 'Y ran~ (rad) (i) Eh (i) L\ (mm)

14 1.02 0.006 0.009 0.31 22.70 1.25 0.029 0.036 10.48 25.0013 1.55 0.064 0.074 50.77 40.71 1.74 0.111 0.127 186.9 48.0112 1.61 0.098 0.103 96.95 52.85 1.72 0.116 0.137 212.0 50.2111 1.52 0.085 0.089 100.67 50.64 1.64 0.104 0.116 147.1 50.8710 1.47 0.079 0.089 93.56 49.08 1.46 0.092 0.096 91.56 50.469 1.41 0.058 0.069 86.10 41.74 1.38 0.053 0.056 50.09 38.108 1.29 0.043 0.048 55.63 37.28 1.21 0.020 0.022 15.25 26.49

U17 1.32 0.031 0.036 55.45 33.43 1.17 0.015 0.018 15.13 22.321

N\0

6 1.30 0.029 0.035 47.93 31.73 0.010 0.013 11.17 19.411.115 1.30 0.030 0.040 59.49 29.14 1.11 0.011 0.013 14.72 18.044 1.29 0.028 0.039 81.08 25.65 1.17 0.013 0.016 21.65 17.763 1.34 0.023 0.033 121.56 22.68 1.24 0.024 0.027 41.90 20.252 1.39 0.027 0.039 182.43 21.61 1.30 0.042 0.044 76.19 25.201 1.54 0.039 0.058 433.08 28.84 1.45 0.056 0.060 194.5 34.79

Page 154: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 5.14 Fourteen-storey frame, Set 1: Response of columns and braces (duration of excess loading)

e

StorcyALI

(a) Low a/v records

LPCI LPC2 LPSI Cl C2 AL2 LPS2

(1)) Interrnediatc a/v records

MSI MS2 NHBt NHB2 NGOt NG02

~ua~

V11~o

141312Il

10987

65432

t 4 7 80 - - - - 13 - - - - - 7....__ - _--- _ _--------- ---_ -..-----.--- __ _-..---- _------ _-.-- __ .._----- - __ _--_.._---_ ..- _-_._-_..-.-- -.-_ __ _ ..Total 4 7 80 - - - - 13 - - - - - 7

Page 155: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 5.15 Set 2 structures: Normalized maximum link. shear forces

Four-storey &une Eight-storey frameStorey Lowa/v Intean. a/v Lowa/v Intenn. a/v

J.1 f.l+cr fJ. J.l+<r f.l J.1+cr f.l fL+a

8 1.56 1.63 1.66 1.717 1.64 1.71 1.56 1.666 1.54 1.69 1.36 1.525 1.42 1.58 1.17 1.344 1.47 1.51 1.57 1.60 1.43 1.63 1.13 1.283 1.51 1.59 1.62 1.70 1.41 1.60 1.15 1.262 1.46 1.54 1.49 1.60 1.49 1.67 1.30 1.411 1.56 1.60 1.51 1.63 1.47 1.62 1.32 1.38

Table 5.16 Set 2 structures: ~fa.~um inelastic link rotations, YmB (rad)

Four-storey frame Eight-storey frameStorey Lowa/v Intean. a/v Lowa/v Interm. a/v

J.1 f.l+cr Il J.1+a Jl J.1+a Il J.l+a

8 0.070 0.094 0.127 0.1777 0.070 0.099 0.067 0.1006 0.061 0.093 0.044 0.0795 0.054 0.079 0.019 0.0434 0.086 0.135 0.143 0.182 0.049 0.070 0.017 0.0343 0.096 0.157 0.078 0.128 0.033 0.047 0.007 0.0132 0.042 0.054 0.046 0.062 0.052 0.091 0.017 0.0281 0.065 0.105 0.072 0.117 0.063 0.105 0.031 0.050

Table 5.17 Set 2 structures: ~{anmum range of inelastic link rotations, ma.x Yange (rad)

Four-storey frame Eight-storey frameStorey Lowa/v Interm. a/v Lowa/v Intean. a/v

Jl J.1+cr f.l J.l+a f.l f.l+cr J.1 J.1+cr

8 0.091 0.116 0.172 0.2227 0.098 0.134 0.082 0.1166 0.083 0.117 0.054 0.0905 0.068 0.103 0.024 0.0474 0.104 0.152 0.196 0.225 0.063 0.092 0.021 0.0373 0.106 0.165 0.105 0.157 0.036 0.050 0.011 0.0192 0.054 0.062 0.063 0.082 0.059 0.096 0.022 0.0341 0.079 0.117 0.086 0.129 0.073 0.113 0.039 0.054

5-31

Page 156: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

• •Table 5.18 Eight-storey frame: Comparison of link response, Set 1 and Set 2 structures

(a) Set 1 structure

n._... 1:Ydlrr/n

Intermediatc a/v (Il)

n 1:Vdlfr!n __1:..:..y=.I.f:..:...r ~ _1:VMf

Law a/v (fl)Storey ------------~~--------

1:V~irf n 1:VMf/n r:yMf n 1:Y..Mr!n

0.0560.026

23155

12.8271.402

0.1530.1140.0910.0770.027

59194

0.40.4

8.962.180.400.030.01

0.0440.010

12456

5.4520.574

8 2.82 25 0.1127 6.55 41 0.1586 4.61 31 0.1495 1.73 14 0.1254 2.29 17 0.1363 1.96 17 0.1172 2.99 21 0.143 0.959 79 0.012 0.03 1 0.0341 2.25 19 0.120 2.843 98 0.029 0.01 1 0.017.....-.- _ - _-- _-_ _ --.- -- .. -_............................ . - - _.- --.._........................ . __ _----_ _-------.--_.._.._..-.- _.- _ - _ _ -..- _-.••...J.1 0.132 0.024 0.073 0.0411: 25.20 185 9.828 357 11.61 84.25 14.229 286.__ _ _._ _ -.-----_ _-------------------_._.- _ - _ _ ------ -----------.----.-.-.- _ _.. . __..__.- - __ _.._ ----_.

1:1:Vdlff/1:n 0.136 1:1:)'~lfr!1:n 0.028 1:1:Vdlff/1:n 0.138 1:1:)'~irr/1:n 0.050

U1

'"N

Page 157: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table S.18 Cont' d

(b) Set 2 structure

e

Storey Low a/v (Jl) Intermediate a/v (J.1)

~VLhff fi ~VMf/n ~yMf n ~y,Mf/n ~Vdiff n ~Vdlrr/n ~Ydiff n 'r,ydlff/n

8 2.62 25 0.107 1.852 118 0.016 8.19 55 0.149 10.501 201 0.0527 6.41 43 0.148 0.189 30 0.006 2.55 20 0.126 1.222 94 0.0136 5.01 34 0.150 0.089 9 0.010 0.46 5 0.091 1.122 34 0.0335 2.18 21 0.104 0.011 9 0.001 0.07 1 0.1104 3.04 23 0.135 - - - 0.03 1 0.0363 2.54 22 0.1182 4.28 31 0.140 2.129 89 0.024 0.10 2 0.0671 3.22 28 0.117 2.894 220 0.013 0.02 1 0.024

V1 .•- ••••••••••----- - -----.-.---.--.--.--••----------.-------••-••••-•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••---•••••••- ••••••-••--------••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••-.._ ••-••••••••--- -- -•••

~ Ji 0.127 0.012 0.086 0.033

t 29.31 225 7.165 475 11.43 85 12.846 329

1:1:Vdiff/1:n 0.131 tIYMf/1:n 0.015 I1:VMf/1:n 0.135 1:1:yLliff/In 0.039

Page 158: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 5.19 (a) Four-storey frame, Set 2: Response of columns and braces (duration of excess loading)

e

Storey

432

1

Total

fi)aJU

f3~

AL1

(a) Low a/v records

LPCl LPC2 LPS1 Cl C2 AL2 LPS2

(b) Interrnediate a/v records

MS1 MS2 NHBl NHB2 NGOl NG02

U1~~

4 fi)

3 ~ - 4 9 - - 128 - 3 6 237 3 17 6 772 ô

U1 - - - - 91 - - - - - - - - 1._ - - -- _-.-- _- _ _ -._.......... . --.--_ _ _-------.- __ -- __..__ _ _..__.._ _ ...

Total - 4 9 - 91 128 - 3 6 237 3 17 6 78

Page 159: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.19 (h) Eight-storcy frame, Set 2: Rcsponse of columns and braces (durarion of cxcess loading)

StorcyALI

(a) Low a/v records

LPCI LPC2 LPSI Cl C2 AL2 LPS2

(b) Intermediate a/v records

MS1 MS2 NHBl NHB2 NGOl NG02

....._---_..--.-- _ _----------.--.- ---- _-_ ---_._-_........... ..............•...__.............••......_._ -_ _.._--- _-.--•......- - .2

2

16153

8

8

9

1

1

2

4

4

5

5

5~U

8765432

1 - - - ----_ - _---_. __..- - _- _ _ __._----- _---- - _ -- ._-.-_ _- __ _- - _._---..-._.._--_ -------_.._---.--_ __ _.-_.

87 1 2 1 - - 3

65 f;u4 ~ - 28 - - 5 5

3 - 54 - - 9 22

2 - 109 - - 15 37

1 - 19 . - 1 8...._---_.._---- _- _ _-----_.._--_ -.- _-.- __._------.-- _ _----._------------ ' _------ _.---- -- _--_ --- -.._.._..------- - _.Total 1 212 1 - 30 75Ul

~CJ1

Total 5 2 9 3 15 16

Page 160: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 5.20 Set 2 structures: Maximum inelastic rotations of outer beam segments

Inclastic rotation, 9 (rad)

Four-storcy frame Eight-storey frameEarthquakerecord

omaxa accu",ma~ am.. a accum

mail

0.0017

0.0006

0.00030.0074 0.00740.0115 0.02230.0034 0.00340.0046 0.00460.0067 0.Ot130.0089 0.0135. .. _--_ --_ .. - -----_ .. _ _ __ .. --- ----------------- ..0.0081 0.008t0.0089 0.00890.0084 0.00840.0073 0.00730.0107 0.01070.0119 0.01200.0101 0.01010.0107 0.0107

0.00170.0006

0.0003;-."­~

S

~

"­~

~

~

ic::.....

ALlLPCtLPC2LPSlCtC2................ - - .

AL2LPS2MSl

MS2NHBlNHB2NGOlNG02

V1~0\

Page 161: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 5.21 Set 2 structures: Ioter-storey inelasric drift (mm)

Four-storey frame Eight-storey frameStorey Lowa/v Ioterm. a/v Lowa/v Iotenn. a/v

f.L f.1+a Il f.1+0' f.1 f.1+a f.L f.L+0'

8 44.55 53.37 59.96 78.787 43.62 55.97 38.41 50.976 41.70 54.44 30.55 45.155 36.80 47.16 20.78 31.754 46.60 65.36 68.49 81.92 31.92 39.28 18.64 26.543 47.23 69.78 40.80 59.57 26.73 33.89 14.05 17.892 26.80 30.99 28.59 34.55 32.28 47.91 16.73 21.721 39.45 57.12 43.25 64.30 39.83 59.14 25.06 34.13

5-37

Page 162: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

v

(l-e/L)

sm 9 (l-e/L)

Vcot9

T=

M.. +M...=Ve/2

c=

"1

L/2

c M... ve/2

1~ v

e/2

(a) Forces in brace and beam. outside the link

oLVl(e/L)

l-e/Lt-e/L

V~I l~---'" i+l

VI+tL VILCi = Cl+! + + --

L-e L-e

(b) Forces in columns due to yielding links

Fig 5.1 Forces inttoduced in other members of the frame by yielded and sttain-hardened links

5-38

Page 163: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

"' .,.----

3+---------.------~-~.......--,

--.- Lowa/vInlcuncdiale a/v

1.81.6lA

Vmu./Vp

O+------r-----.....----......------i

1.0

Fig. 5.2 Four-storey frame, Set 1: Ma.ximum normalized link shear forces

8 T----------------__-..,...----:7+----'----~_T_----~C'..-___=.t__---:

6t-----..:.:.:==:::;=...;;;.,.;.-=,......e:~-__:::,....--,

>.5+------~"+------...----i

~ 4 +------l'--_T_----~..........--­rii 3 +-------4o;:~-r-----..._---­

2+-------~-----.J---.----'

1.8l.61.41.2

1+---------'-'----....---~O+-----.......---------r-----i

1.0

Fig. 5.3 Eight-storey frame, Set 1: l\rla.ximum nonnalized link shear forces

.. - - i............ / 1.,.,- ~

-~~ !

~- 1

/ ....1

./" r. :1 -.- L.ow-.,v !~ ~ -- (ntermediare a/v 1

............ "" . i""-. ~ !~-- .... ;

!

14131211109

f ~en 6

54321o

1.0 1.2 1.6 1.8

Fig. 5.4 Fourteen-storey frame, Set 1: Ma.ximum nonnalized link shear forces

5-39

Page 164: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 6

STUDY OF THE SEISMIe SERAVIOUR OF EBF'S._-----~-iiiiiIiIiiiiiii8llli----------..

Developed analytical tools are used to investigate further and understand better the seismic

behaviour of EBFs and the relevant findings of those studies are described in this Chapter.

Modifications of seismic design requirements proposed for the new edition of CAN/ CSA

S16.1 are examined fust. The ineIastic response of the eight-storey EBF designed following

these modified requirements is compared to that of the structure designed using the iterative

procedure. Attention is then directed to seismic force profiles, magnitudes of axial forces

and moments for ductility design of columns, fôrce modification factors and relationship

between inelastic inter-storey storey drifts and inelastic Iink deformations.

6.1 Future EDF seismic design requirements: proposai for CAN/CSA­

S16.1

6.Ll Summary ofproposed modifications

In this section, a draft proposaI (Redwood, 1999) for revisions to the Canadian standard for

steel structures, CAN/CSA-S16.1, is examined. Important modifications of the seismic

requirements of Clause 27 are anticipated, induding those affecting design procedures for

EBFs.

The current Canadian requirements for the design of EBFs, specified in CAN/CSA-S16.1­

94 were discussed in Section 1.3.2. In the following, sorne of the proposed design

requirements are summarized and differences between the !Wo are outlined (typescript in

italics gives an outline of the new proposaIs).

6-1

Page 165: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

(i) Beam segments outside of the links are designed for link forces calculated based on

the nominal strength ofthe link (0.55 wdFyfor shear links) multiplied by 1.3Ry- When

subject to these forces, the beam resistance can be taken as Ry times the nominal

resistance. R, ;s a factor by wh;ch the specified minimum yield stress is multiplied to

give the expectedyield stress. Unless obtained directly form material coupon tests, R,

;s ta be ta!œn as 1.1, but the product RyE'y should not exceed 385MPa.

In the current Standar~ the factored resistance of the link 0'r = epO.55wdF'f for shear links,

where ep=0.9), calculated using the specified minimum yield stress (00 1\ factor), is

multiplied by the amplification factor 1.5 ta 0 btain design forces in the outer beam

segments. The beam resistance is taken as the nominal value, but is detennined using the

specified minimum yield stress.

(U) Forces in the braces are found using the same amplification factor as the one in

design ofthe outer beam segments (J.3R,), applied ta the nominal strength ofthe Unie.

Braces must have adequate factored res;stance to support these forces, calculated

using the specifled minimum yield stress.

Similarly ta the outer beam segments, in the cw:rent Standard, forces in braces are evaluated

using the amplified link forces of 1.5Vr• Braces are then selected 50 that they have an

adequate nominal resistance ta support those loads.

(Ui)To calculate axialforees in columns due to yielding and strain-harden;ng in links, the

nominal strength ofthe link is multiplied by 1.15R,. For the top two storeys, however,

the amplification factor of J.3R, is used The cumulative effect ofyielding links is

combined wilh the gravity loads. Columns should have adequate factored resistance

to support these loads, calculated using the specified minimum yield stress. The right

hand side ofthe interaction equation ofClauses 13.8.1 and 13.8.2 must be reduced to

0.85 to accountfor the moment contribution.

6-2

Page 166: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDYOF EBF'SSEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

In the current Standar~ axial forces in columns are ca1culated using the amplification factor

of 1.25 applied to the factored resistance of the 1ink. The same amplification factor is

specified for links in aIl storeys. No provision is made to include bending moments resulting

from column continuity and relative storey drift. l'hus, the right band side of the interaction

equations mentioned above is 1.0, as originally specified in the Standard. Column resistance

is taken as the nominal value.

(iv) The inelastic rotation of the link segment relative 10 the resl of the beam. y, is

calculated at a frame drift of (R-I) times the elastic drift determined for factored

seismic loading. The resulting values shall not exceed the following limits: (a) 0.09

radians for links with length of1.6M~p or less and (b) 0.03 radians/or links with

length of2.6M,lVp or greater. For links with lengths between the above values. the

limits are obtained by linear interpolation.

In the current Standar~ the inelastic Iink rotation, "f, is calcuIated at the frame drift of O.5R

rimes the elastic drift detennined for faetored seismic loading. Acceptable limits for "f, are

unchanged

6.1.2 Evaluation ofproposed design requirements

To assess the effectiveness of the proposed designed requirements m overconung

deficiencies identified in the current codified design procedures, three chevron-type EBFs

\vith four, eight and fourteen storeys were designed to comply with the proposed

requirements, and their inelastic response was studied for the set of historical ground

motions. The geometty of the frames, loading conditions and acceleration records used in

the analysis were identical to those reported in Chapter 5.

For alI three frame heights, members were first seleeted based on duetility requirements, and

subsequendy examined for sttength and inter-storey plastic drift. Verifications of inelastic

Iink rotations were included in the ductility design phase. Subsequendy in this Chapter, the

structures compliant with the proposed Standard are designated as Design A.

6-3

Page 167: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. SroDYOF EBF'SSE/SMIC BERAV/OUR

Non-linear response of Design A was monitored separate1y for low and intermediate a/v

records by tracing the maximum shear forces and deformations of links, numher of rime

increments in which columns or braces experienced 1055 of stability and inter-storey drift.

For each group of records, the results are presented in terms of mean plus one standard

deviation. Comparison is then made with the results obtained for the structures designed in

compliance with the current Standard (Design B) and the those designed using the iterative

procedure (Design q.

6.1.2.1 Four-storey &ame

A list of the sections selected to satisfy ductility requirements is shown in Table 6.1. No

additional modifications of sections were necessary to satisfy strength or inelastic drift

requirements. The following observations can be made when comparing this design to

Designs B and C (see Table 5.2 and columns Ca) and (d) of Table 5.6):

(i) In ail cases, link beams sections are similar, with sorne slighdy larger sections seleeted in

the Design A frame. AlI three approaches would have yie1ded exacdy the same sections

for the link itself, since the requirements are unchanged. Observed differences in section

sizes thus arose from the revised design requirements for the outer beam segments. The

link forces used to compute Ioads in these segments are effectively slighdy lower in the

new proposai compared to the current Standard (1.30Vp and 1.35Vp respective1~.

However, the limits for Class 1 sections are more severe in the former case, since they

are calculated based on Rf/, this therefore being the reason for some slighdy increased

sections.

(11) Brace sections of Designs A and C are comparable, although those se1ected in Design C

had slighdy higber resistances. For all storeys, brace sections of Design B were in general

one size smaller compared to those of the two other designs.

l In the current Standard, beam forces are calculated based on lin.k force of 1.S'Vp, where ,=0.9,which gives 1.35Vp• In the proposed Standard, the calculation is based on 1.3RyVp- This needs to befurther adjusted, since the beam resistance in the former case is based on Fr, while in the latter case itis based on RrF)". Thus, for consistent comparison 1.3R.yVp should be divided by R,., which yields linkforce of 1.30Vp.

4 A recent revision to this proposai suggests that Rf be included in these limits only if Ry>l.1.

6-4

Page 168: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

(m) Design B has in genera1 the smaIlest column sizes. The bottom column tier of Designs A

and C is comparable, but a somewhat larger column section was selected for the top

column tier in Design C.

(IV) Designs A and C have similar structural mass, which is about 20% greater than Design

B.

(v) Largest ine1astic 1ink rotations were predicted in Design A with a maximum of O.07rad in

the top storey link (see Table 6.2(a».

(VI) With the exception of one storey, the smallest inter-storey ine1astic drift (R rimes the

elastic drift) was predicted in Design C (see Table 6.2(b».

Tables 6.3 to 6.5 summarize results of non-linear time-history analysis carried out for Design

A. For easier comparison with Designs B and C, the maximum shear forces and

defonnations for aIl three designs are plotted in Figs 6.1 and 6.2, while Table 6.6 allows a

comparison of the inter-storey drift responses. The following observations can be made:

(i) Similarly to Design C, Design A decreased the peak values of link shear forces (up to

5%) compared with Design B. More uniform distribution of the forces over the height

of the frame was aIso achieved, but the design limit was still exceeded by up to 20

percent.

(ii) Design A was the most successful of the three in conttolling the link inelastic shear

rotations, y. With the exception of the top storey link, where excessively high rotation

was observed for intennediate a/v records (O.214rad), y was rather uniformly distnbuted

and exceeded the allowable design limit ooly by one percent. With exception of this one

storey, max Yange was aIso the smallest observed among the three designs.

6-5

Page 169: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. SruDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

(m) Design A was not as effective as Design C in decreasing buce and column distress. In

fact, the 10ss of stability of these elements observed in Design A was comparable to that

of Design B.

(lV) The analysis has shown that the inter-storey drift exceeded the values foreseen in design

for aIl three structures, particularly in the top storey of Design A for intermediate a/v

records where a drift of 2.8 rimes the predieted value was observed (30 percent larger

than design limit of O.02hJ. In other cases, the observed values were 1.25 to 2.5 rimes

higher than predicted.

6.1.2.2 Eight-storey frame

Table 6.7 summarizes the sections of Design A before the verification of inelastic link

rotations was conducted. At this stage, Designs A and Chad almost identical structural mass,

exceeding the mass of Design B by about eight percent. However, the verification of

inelastic link rotations, y, for Design A indicated that the design limit was violated in top five

storeys by up to 25 percent. Thus, further revisions were necessary.

The estimate of y is proportional to the elastic inter-storey drift. The most effective inter­

storey drift reduction was achieved br increasing the sizes of the two bottom column tiers

and the top three buces. As a result of these modifications, the structural mass increased by

17 percent, thus making the Design A the heaviest of the three. No further adjustments were

needed to satisfy inter-storey inelastic drift requirements, in fact, predicted values were weIl

below the aIlowable limits. The design was aIso compliant with strength requirements.

Results from non-lineat analysis for Design A are presented in Tables 6.8 to 6.10.

Comparative plots of maximum shear forces and defonnations obtained for aIl three designs

are shown in Figs 6.3 and 6.4, while Table 6.11 shows observed and predicted values of

inter-storey inelastic drift. Examination of these results indicates the following:

(i) Compared to Designs Band C, bottom storeys links of Design A deve10ped somewhat

smaller shear forces for low a/v records, but design limits were still exceeded by 25

6-6

Page 170: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDYOF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAYIOUR

percent on average. The peak force observed at storey 7 for an three designs remained

unchanged. For intermediate a/v records, links of an three designs deve10ped very

similar forces, with maximum of 10 percent variation observed at storey 2. The

maximum shear forces were noted in the top storey link, and in the top four storeys

design Iimits were exceeded by a maximum of 30 percent.

(u) For low a/v records, the most favorable results for ine1astic link rotations were obtained

for Design C. Although Design A was more effective in reducing the peak y, ovetall, the

design limit of 0.09 radians was violated to a lesser extend in Design C. For intennediate

a/v records all three designs showed similar link deformations. The peak y of Design B,

observed in the top storey, was reduced by 20 percent in Design A and by 14 percent in

Design C, but still remained well above the acceptable limits.

Cm) Both Designs A and C exhibited more desirable response of columns and braces

compared to Design B. In general, the smaller amount of column and brace disttess was

observed for Design C, but the difference between Designs A and C was less

pronounrerf than in the case of the four storey structure.

(iv) Low a/v records generated higher inter-storey drifts chen predicted in the bottom

storeys of all three designs, while for intermediate a/v higher inter-storey drifts chan

predicted were observed in the top storey. With these exceptions, in general, the

predicted and observed values for all three designs are in better agreement than in the

case of the four-storey structure.

Cv) Similar trends were observed for predieted and observed inelastic shear rotations of the

link, that is y was under-predicted it bonom storeys for low a/v records, and in the top

storeys for intermediate a/v records.

6.1.2.3 Founeen-storey &ame

Table 6.12 Sllmmarizes sections of Design A se1eeted following ductility requirements,

before inelastic shear rotations were verified against the codified limits. Since ÏDter-storey

6-7

Page 171: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

plastic drift was identified as a critical factor for Design B, the evaluation of this parameter

was conducted on Design A prior to verifications of y. It was found mat the largest drift,

observed in the second storey from the top, had just met the design requirement (2% of

storey height). Thus, this stage of Design A could be considered comparable to Design B.

Indeed, the examination of the structural mass of two designs indicated about 10 percent

difference.

Although the inter-storey ineIastic drift requirement was the goveming factor in Design B,

link defonnations, y, were ooly just within the allowable limits. In other words, ooly very

small modifications of a structure compliant with y requirementsS were needed to satisfy the

inter-storey drift requirement. However, for Design A, the maximum predieted value of y

(calculated as R-1 rimes the e1astic drift) reached the value of O.17rad, thus exceeding the

design limit by a large margine

Significant changes in section sizes were required to reduce inter-storey drift so that the

calculated value of y remained bellow O.09rad. It was demonstrated that an increase in beam

size does not have sufficient impact to justify the resulting increase of forces ttansmitted to

braces and columns. Hence, brace and column sections were modified. With the largest HSS

braces (305X305X13) in all storeys, and significant increase of bottom five column tiers

(WWF650X864), it was still not possible to obtain satisfactory y values. The solution was

finally obtained by using W shapes for brace sections combined with increased column sÎ2es.

The summary of selected sections is shown in columns (e) and (t) ofTable 6.12.

The inspection of structural mass indicates 50 percent increase compared to Design B. Many

sections were highly undemtilized under traditional load combinations, and the predicted

ine1astic inter-storey drifts were weil bellow design limits.

It was established in section 5.3.2.3 that the inelastic response of the founeen storey frame

designed according to the current design procedure (Design B) was in genera1 satisfactory. In

a few cases, maximum shear forces and deformations exceeded the design limits by a very

5 In the cwrent Standard, the limit on y correponds ta O.SR times the e1astic drift.

6-8

Page 172: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

small margin. Columns responded e1astically for aIl records studied, and very limited

instabilities were observed in braces. Thus it is not anticipated that the ine1astic response of

Design A would improve significandy enough to justify such a large increase of mass

compared to Design B.

6.1.3 Summary

The objective of the study described in this section was to examine the modifications of

seismic design requirements for EBFs proposed for incorporation in the next edition of

CSA/CAN-S16.t. The inelastic response of three chevron-type EBFs with four, eight and

fourteen storeys (Design A) was studied for selected acceleration records, and compared to

that of the structures desjgned Ci) following the provisions of the current Standard (Design

B) and (u) using the iterative procedure proposed in this study (Design q.

AIl three designs yielded similar beam sections for all frame heights. More variation was

observed in brace and colunm sections; compared to structures compliant with current

Standard, heavier column and brace sections were in general selected in Designs A and C.

This in turn led to the overall increase in structural mass. For the four- and eight-storey

frame, Designs A and Chad similar mass exceeding that of Design B by about twenty

percent. For the fourteen-storey frame, for which Design B and C were almost identical, the

mass of Desjgn A was substantially increased, approximately by fifty percent.

This important increase of section sizes for fourteen storey frame of Design A was entirely

the result of the effort to maintain ine1astic shear rotations of links below the allowable limits

in the ductility phase of design. Assuming equal frame geometty and elastic inter-storey drift,

y calcuIated by the proposed modifications of the Standard is 1.5 times larger than the one

calculated using current provisions. For the design of lower or medium height frames,

satisfying the y limit does not seem to impose great difficulty, and in sorne ways MaY

improve the overall behaviour of the frame. For taller frames, however, the y limit is very

difficult to meet and results in uneconomical design without significandy improved seismic

behaviour.

6-9

Page 173: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. SroDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHA V/OUR

The Most significant improvement in behaviour of Design A compared to Designs B and C

was observed in the response of the links of the four-storey frame, which deve10ped rather

uniform defonnations over the frame height. However, the excessive top storey link

defonnation in response to inteanediate a/v records remained a problem. In addition, the

instability of columns and braces was observed as &equendy as in the design based on the

current Standard. For the eight-storey frame, the seismic behaviour of Designs A and C was

comparable and superior to that of Design B.

Similarly to the iterative procedure, modified requirements of the new proposais were not

fully successful in reducing the peak values of link shear forces and deformations, but in

general, more unifonn distribution over the height of the frame was achieved than for

Design B.

6.2 Study of the lateraI force distribution

6.2.1 General

The minimum base shear for seismic design of structures in Canada and the distribution of

the lateral force over the height of the structure are specified in NBCC (1995). In

detenniniog the lateral force profiles two approaches cao be used:

(i) The first approach is simpler and appropriate for reguIar buildings. The force

distribution is based on the assumption that for the ttanslational vibrations, the majority

of reguIar buildings respond in the first mode; thus, the linear distribution of lateral

forces is appropriate. For buildings with longer periods, where the increased

contribution of the higher modes is expected, a redistribution of forces is accounted for

by applying a portion of the base shear as a concenttated force on the top of the

structure. The magnitude of this force varies with the fundamental period of the

structure, starting &om zero for periods of 0.75 and less, and not exceeding 25 per cent

of the design base shear. The distribution of the forces obtained following this approach

is denoted hereinafter as NBCCIinear0

6-10

Page 174: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDYOF EBF'SSEISM/C BEi/AV/OUR

(u") The second approach is recommended for the buildings with significant irregularities,

discontinuities in mass or stiffness or varying eccentticities between the center of mass

and center of stiffness, but may be used otherwise. In this approach, modal analysis is

used to obtain design storey shears and other design quantities of interest. Structural

response in each mode is determined for the appropriately sca1ed NBCC design

spectrum. AIl modal contnbutions are adjusted so that the total modal base shear

obtained by combining the individual modal base shears is equal to the Code base shear.

The resulting distribution of the forces is denoted further in the text as NBCCmodal•

The buildings examined in dUs project were quite regular; thus, the selection of NBCCIinc::at

lareraI force distribution to design EBFs studied was a natural choice. The results of the

dynamic analysis presented in Chapter 5 indicated that higher shear forces and defonnarions

developed in the upper storeys of these frames, particularly in response to intermediate a/v

records. This may result from more significant contnbutions of higher modes in the

structural response than foreseen by the Code. Hence, a study was conducted with the

objective of examining the suitability of the lateraI force distribution assumed in design.

Attention was directed to the foUI, eight and fourteen storey frames designed in compliance

with the present Standard. (Design B, given in Chapter 5). Frames obtained using the

iterative procedure were aIso examined, but since little difference in results was observed,

ooly the results for frames compliant with current codified design requirements are

presented in this section.

For each frame height, the lateraI force profiles were obtained as follows:

(i) Envelopes ofstorey shears (maximum positive and maximum negative) were found from

the non-lïnear time-history analysis (NLTHA) for all historical records from low and

intermediate a/v groups. For each group of records, the storey shears corresponding to

the Mean plus one standard deviation were ca1culated oext, and the lateraI force was

detennined as the difference between the shears at two subsequent storeys. It should be

noted that, for a selected earthquake record, the values of lateral forces obtained in this

6-11

Page 175: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

way do not correspond to the maximum value observed at that storey during the

complete time-history. However, they are more appropIÏate than the latter since the

objective is to study the lateral force distribution.

(n) NBCCmodal distribution was aIso detennined from the response spectrum. analysis, carried

out using program SAP2000 (1997). In addition, for the eight-storey frame, latera1 forces

were aIso detennined for the smooth pseudo-acceleration speetta derived for low and

intennediate a/v records (see Section 4.2.4). These speetra are illustrated in Figs 6.5 (a)

and (b).

To provide consistent comparison, all the results were scaled 50 that the total base shear

force obtained from (i) and (n) matched that prescribed by NBCC for each frame

considered.

6.2.2 Discussion of the results

6.2.2.1 Four storey frame

Figs 6.6 (a) and (b) illusttate the lateral force distribution obtained from NLTHA for low

and ÏDtermediate a/v records respeetivdy. For both groups of records, very similar

distributions of the forces were obtained, with slighdy higher forces observed at the top two

storeys for intermediate a/v records, and at the bottom two storeys for low a/v records. For

each group of records, the maximum positive and negative values of lateral forces were

comparable.

NBCClincu distribution is aIso indicated in Fig 6.6 for comparison. In general, a good

agreement was observed between the two distributions for both groups of records. At the

top storey however, the Iateral force from NLTHA exceeded the Code speci.fied vaIue by

about 25 and 40 percent for low and inteanediate records respeetively. As cao be seen in

Fig. 6.76, in the top storey, an improved match was achieved using NBCCmocbl distnbution

instead of NBCCIincw particu1arly for the inteanediate a/v records. In the bottom storey,

6 The distnbution of lateral force from NLTHA is shown in this figure in terms of absolutemaximum Iateral force (positive or negative).

6-12

Page 176: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SElSMIC BEHAVlOUR

however, forces obtained from NBCCIinc2r and NBCCmodal distributions were aImost identical,

and about 30 percent smaller than those observed from NLTHA for low a/v records.

As mentioned in the previous section, the contnbution of higher modes in the NBC~

distnbution is a function of the fundamental period, T, for an structures with T larger than

0.7s. The Code fonnula used to determine T (see Section 5.1.22) usually yields a first natural

period that is smaller in magnitude than that obtained analytically. For the four-storey frame,

for instance, TNBCC was 0.58s, compared to the analytical value of 1.01s. Since TNBCC was less

than 0.7s, the NBCC procedure made no allowance for bigher mode contributions, that is,

no concenttated force was specified at the top of the structure. However, had the structural

period been taken as 1.01s, a concentrated force would have been assigned. The need for the

higher lateraI force at the top of the four-storey frame is confirmed by the analytical results,

both from the non-linear and response-speetrum analysis.

A sample calcuIation was performed, in which the concentrated force at the top of the frame

was determined using the Code fonnula (Ft=O.071V), but T NBCC was replaced by the

analytical value. The design base shear force, V, was still computed in accordance with

NBCC requirements, and thus was a function of T NBCC (see Section 5.1.2.2). The remainiog

portion of the shear force, V-Ft, was distributed following NBCC provisions. ResuIting

lateraI forces obtained from this modified procedure (NBCClinor ~ are shown in Table

6.13. Forces obtained from non-linear analysis, and NBCCIincar and NBCCmocbI distributions

are aIso shown. It cao be seen that in general, the modified approach yielded a lateraI force

distribution that models more realistically the dynamic response of the structure.

6.2.2.2 Eight-storey frame

Lateral force distributions obtained from NLTHA are illustrated in Figs 6.8 (a) and (b). For

both groups of records, ma.~um positive and negative lateraI force envelopes were very

similar. For low a/v records, the distribution compares weil to NBC~ with the

maximum difference observed in the top storey where the lateraI force from the NBCCIineu

distribution was exceeded by 15 percent. A poorer match was noted for intermediate a/v

records; NBC~ distribution over-predieted the forces in the mid-portion of the frame,

6-13

Page 177: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDYOF EBF'SSEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

and under-predicted those in the two bottom storeys and at the top. While the lateral force

observed at the top and the second storey e."<ceeded the NBCCIinc2r value by about 40

percent, in the bottom storey the NBCC!incar force was exceeded by a much larger margin

(about three rimes).

The NBCCmodaI distribution is indicated in Fig. 6.9. While in the mid-portion of the frame the

forces in the NBCCmodal distribution are somewhat smaller than the NBC~ forces, the

reverse cao be observed in the top and the bottom storeys. Thus, for the intermediate a/v

records, this distribution follows distribution the force profile obtained frOID the non-Iïnear

analysis better than NBCC1ineat• Still, at the top storey, NBCCmodaI predicted forces about 20

percent smaller than those observed in NLTHA, while in the bottom storey the difference

was about 25 percent.

The distribution of the lateral force for the eight-storey frame was investigated further by

performing the modal analysis for two design spectra that were constructed in Chapter 4,

representattve of low and intermediate a/v records in Zone 5. In response to the lowa/v

spectta, lateral forces developed were very similar to those found in NLTHA and modal

analysis for the NBCC spectmm. Fig 6.10 illusttates the force distribution obtained for

intennediate a/v spectra. A clear departure from the first-mode response cao he observed

and the influence of the third mode is quite distinct. The third natural period of this

structure is 0.39s, and as cao be seen from Fig 6.5 (b), this corresponds precisely to the peak

values in the pseudo-acceleratioo spectrum.

The force profile shown in column (e) of Table 6.14 was obtained using the modified

approach described in the previous section to ca1culate the top lateral force. When compared

with other distributions given in columns Ca) to (d), it cao be seen that overall, the modified

distribution (NBCClinc2r~ reflects better the dynamic response of the structure than

NBCCIine:ar. The modified approach however, could ooly improve the conditions at the top

storey. In fact, increasing the top storey force and maintaining the same base shear further

decreased the forces at the bottom storey, but by a small margin (about 5 percent). A lateral

6-14

Page 178: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDYOF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

distribution in better accorclance with the dynamic response of the structure would be

obtained if the lateraI force were maintained uniform in the !wo bottom storeys.

6.2.2.3 Founeen storey frame

Distributions obtained from the non-linear analyses aIong with the NBCCIincat and NBCCmodal

lateraI force profiles are illustrated in Figs 6.11 and 6.12. Results show similar trends to those

for the eight-storey structure; both NLTHA and modal analysis assigned larger forces to the

bottom storey and smaIler forces to the mid-portion of the frame compared to the

NBCCIineu distribution. However, differences were observed with respect to the location of

the largest force. In the NBCCIineu profile, the largest lateraI force was assigned at the top of

the frame. The two analyses on the other hand, identified the second storey &om the top as

the one with the largest force, with magnitude simiIar to that of NBCCIineu in the top storey.

In light of results &om NLTHA and modal analysis, a modification of the procedure ta

define NBCCIinc:ar force profile was examined. As for the four and eight storey frames, the

concentrated force was determined using the analytica1 fundamental period (2.76s). This

force was distnbuted between the top two storeys sa that the totallateral forces7 applied at

those locations were equivalent. As cao be seen in Table 6.15 this distribution better matches

the force profile obtained in non-linear and modal analysis in the upper portion of the frame,

but the lateraI force applied at the bottom storey still remains largely under-predicted. It

appears that the lateraI force distnbution, as illustrated in Fig. 6.13, with uniform forces at

the bottom four to SL,"< storeys would match better the one found in non-linear analysis.

6.2.3 Summuy

The study presented in this section was conducted ta examme the statie lateraI force

distribution defined by NBeC (NBC~caJ that provided basis for design of aIl EBFs stuclied

in this report. Lateral force profiles were obtained both from NLTHA and modal analysis

(NBCCrnodaÙ and compared with the NBCC1inear distnbution. For aIl frame heights it was

7 Force V-Ft is ditributed Iinearly using NBCC approa~ giving forces Ft3 and f t4 at fourteen andfourteen level respeetive1y. Ft determined U5ing analytical period T is man disttibuted between thelevel thirteen and fourteen 50 that F13+Ft13 is equal ta Ft4+Ft14.

6-15

Page 179: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SElSM/C BEHAVIOUR

found that the NBCCIinat distribution over-estimated forces in the mid-portion of the

frames, but by only a small margine At the top and bottom storeys, however, forces

predicted by the NBCCIineu distnbution were significandy exceeded, indicating the possibility

that the effects ofhigher modes were not appropriately accounted for.

Compared to NBCC~ the NBCCmodaJ distribution in general more close1y matched that

obtained from NLTHA and would be preferred for use in design. However the NBCCIinc2r

distribution is simplet to obtain and is more likely to he used by praeticing engjneers.

Therefore, a modification of this procedure was examined, in which a concentrated force,

applied at the top of the structure to account for higher mode effects, was calculated using

the fundamental periods detennined analytically instead of employing the Code empirical

fonnula. The total base shear and the overall distribution of the remaining force were

unchanged.

It was found that the resulting distribution obtained using the modified approach

(NBCClinc:u~ is in better agreement with the observed dynamic response of the frames. In

ail cases, this modification improved the lateraI force profile in the top storeys of the frame

while not producing significant change in the force magnitudes in the bottom storeys.

Dynamic analysis indicates that in this region a uniform force profile would be more

appropriate than the linearly varying one.

6.3 Column axial forces and moments

6.3.1 General

Clause 27 of CSA/CAN S16.1 provides requirements for ductility design of columns in

EBFs. The amplification factor of 1.25 is applied on the factored shear resistance of the link

ta evaluate column axial forces at individual storeys. Simple summation is used to estimate

the cumulative effects of yielding links in storeys above the column under consideration.

This approach seems reasonable, since achieving simultaneous yielding of the links in all

storeys is a design objective. The reduced amplification factor (1.25) is justified by the lower

probability that all the links would attain their maximum forces (l.SVJ at the same rime. No

6-16

Page 180: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

provision in the current Standard is made to inc1ude the column end moments arising from

the relative storey movements and column continuity in the ductility phase of design.

Proposed modifications of duetility design requirements for the next edition of the Standard

were discussed in Section 6.1. They incorporate observations of recent analYtica1 studies and

account for: (i) presence of bending moment in columns, by reserving a 15 percent of the

column capacity for hending, and (u) likelihood that the top columns would he affected by

the full force developed in the strain-hardened link, by assigning amplification factor of 1.5

to calculate forces in the top two columns.

It was demonsttated in Chapter 5 and first section of Chapter 6 that neither current codified

requirements, nor the proposed ones were fully successful in achieving the desired seismic

response of columns, particularly in the upper storeys of the frame. The study was therefore

undertaken to examine in more detail the following: (i) appropriate amplification factors to

use in column design, (n) combination rules to realistically estimate axial forces inttoduced

by yielding links, and (m) magnitudes and distributions ofcolumn end moments.

Results presented in this section were compiled from the non-lïnear analysis carried out for

four-, eight- and fourteen-storey frames designed using the proposed iterative procedure,

since the columns of these frames experienced very little instahility in response to the

selected set of historical records. These structures were described in detail in Chapter 5.

6.3.2 Column axial forces

6.3.2.1 Axial forces &om non-linear analysis

Since the output from the non-linear analysis for columns includes both axial force and

moment, the decision had to he made as ta what should he considered as representative axial

force in the column. Two approaches were e.umined. In the first approach, for each

acceleratioo record within the same a/v ratio group, the maximum axial force from the

complete time-history was found for the columns in each storey. In the second approach,

the maximum. column response ratio resulting from the combined action of axial force and

6-17

Page 181: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. sruDYOF EBF'SSEISMIC BEHAYIOUR

bending moment during the rime history was found, and the corresponcling a.~ force was

taken as the represenrative force.

By inspection of the results, it was found that the two values of the axial force were very

close, and in many cases identicaL The maximum differences observed were about 10

percent for the four- and eight-storey frame, and 15 percent for the fourteen-storey frame,

these heing for oo1y one record and in one storey. It was decided therefore, to consider

column axial forces corresponding to the maximum response ratio.

For each group of historica1 records, the axial column forces are expressed in terms of mean

plus one standard deviation as shown in columns (a) and (b) ofTahle 6.16. In general, smaIl

coefficients of variation were observed (maximum 10 percent). For aIl three heights,

intermediate a/v records induced larger forces in the columns of the upper half of the frame,

and low a/v records in the bottom half. The final axial force distribution given in column (c)

of Table 6.16 was obtained by combining the results for both record groups 50 that the

maximum force was selected in each storey. Link amplification factors for column duetility

design and force combination mIes were then e.umined in Iight of these resu1ts.

6.3.2.2 CombinatioD mies

In a well-designed EBF, simultaneous yielding of alllinks is a desjgn objective and using

simple summation ta evaluate column a.w forces introduced by links presents itself as a

natura! choice. To account for the Iower probability that aU the links would develop their

ultimate forces (l.SVr) at the same rime, two approaches are possible: (i) use a simple

summation mIe, but reduce ultimate forces, or (ù) use ultimate forces, but change the

combination mIe.

Redwood and Channagiri (1990) have proposed the calculation of column loads in ductility

design of concenttically braced frames using the summation of: (i) maximum brace force

componeat at any level above the column in consideration, and [11) the square root of the

sum of t!le squares of the maximum brace force contnbution in all other storeys above this

6-18

Page 182: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

leveL This approach, denoted as SRSS*, was e..umined in the context of EBF for the eight­

and fourteen storey frames and compared to the simple summation rule (55).

As shown in Table 6.17, it was found that the SRSS* combination mIe yie1ded in general

significandy smaller forces than SS mIe, particularly for the founeen storey frame. Much

Iarger ultimate link forces would have been needed to get comparable results, and even then,

the predieted forces wouId have under-estimated those observed in non-linear analysis.

Although experimental evidence of more significant sttain-hardening deve10ping in shear

links exists (Hames et al., 1997, Englehart & Popov 1988), 1.5Vp (1.67VJ is commonly

accepted as the upper bound on the uItimate link force. Thus, in this study the SS ruIe was

identified as the appropriate ruIe to evaluate a.oo forces in the ductility design of columns.

6.3.2.3 Amplification factors

Table 6.18 snmmarizes the column a.~ forces obtained assuming different uItimate shear

forces in the links. The following amplification factoIS applied to the shear resistances of the

links were considered: (i) 1.25 in aIl storeys, (n) 1.5 in aIl storeys and (w) 1.65 in top (Wo

storeys and 1.3 in aIl other storeys. For each case, the comparability with results from the

non-lïnear analysis is evaluated by comparing the square root of the sum of the squares of

relative erroIS. These are indicated in the Jast row of Table 6.18.

For four- and eight-storey frames, column forces calcuIated in accordance with the current

Standard showed the poorest match. In aIl storeys, forces were under-predicted by up to 20

percent. For amplification factors as described in (n) and (m), good compatibility with results

from non-lînear analysis was observed in both cases, although case (m) was slighdy superior.

For the fourteen-storey frame, the best match overall was obtained considering the ultimate

link forces as defined in the euttent Standard In seven storeys the forces observed in oon­

linear analysis were exceeded, but by a smaII margin (maximum 7 percent). Approaches (n)

and (m) under-predieted the column axial forces in a smaller number of storeys and by

smaller margin, but they over-estimated column axial forces in the top of the &ante by 15

and 17 percent respeetively.

6-19

Page 183: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

6.3.3 Column bending moments

6.3.3.1 Bending moments &om nOD-linear analysis

The current Standard provides no guidance regarding the inclusion of the bending moments

into the ductility design of columns. Severa! studies (Koboevic and Redwood (1997), Kasai

and Han (1997)), previously reported on the presence of significant column end moments in

chevron-type EBFs, which should not he negleeted in the ductility design phase. Based on

the results of analytica1 studies, Kasai and Han suggest allocating 15 percent of column

resistance to the bending. These recommendatioos were incorporated in the design of

frames descnoed in the present study; however, the desirable response of columns was not

always achieved. This may he partially attributed ta higher response moments compared ta

thase used in the design. For this reason, the magnitudes and distributions of column end

moments obtained from non-lïnear analysis in the present study were examined in more

detail.

Similarly ta axial forces, for each historical record, two bending moments were considered

for each selected column tier: (i) maximum bending moment, and (11) bending moment in

combination with the axial force that caused the Iargest response ratio in the complete time­

history. It was found that, in large number of cases, these two moments were identicaL The

results presented hereinafter are for the moments (11), this being the more realistic loading

condition for the column.

Resulting moments obtained for each a/v group of records are summarized in Table 6.19.

~fean values are given to provide the consistent comparison with the study reported by

Kasaï and Han. As can be seen from Table 6.19, in generai, the intennediate a/v records

induced larger moments than low a/v records. Compared to axial forces, much higher

coefficients of variation were observed for moments particularly in the top column tier for

all three frames. These variations cao he expected since the columns moments are very

sensitive to relative storey movements and these change significandy for cach individual

record.

6-20

Page 184: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAVIOUR

In spite of these differences, very similar trends in moment distributions were observed for

aIl three frames. Columns in the top storey developed the Iargest hending moments with

magnitudes reaching about 40 percent of column plastic moments (MpC; as shown in Table

6.20. In the next two storeys, a moment of about 20 percent of Mpcol was observed, while in

all other storeys the maximum value did not exceed 10 percent of Mpcol

In view of these results, the assumption of moments urilizing 15 percent of column

resistance in an storeys does not seem appropriate. Larger hending should he considered in

the design of the top storey columns. Although the analysis also indicated slighdy larger

moments in columns of the two storeys below, aIlocating 15 percent of column resistance ta

bending may he justifiable coosidering the fact that the axial forces may be slighdy over­

predicted in these locations (see Tables 6.16 and 6.18). The same may be accepted in other

storeys, however this approach yields somewhat conservative estimates of column bending

moments in these lower locations.

6.3.4 Summary

This section has described a study of column axial forces and bending moments ta use in the

ductility phase of EBF design. Simple summation of forces arising &om yielding and strain­

hardening links was identified as the appropriate combination rule to evaluate column axial

forces. For low to medium height frames, the best agreement with analytical results was

obtained assuming link shears of 1.65Vr (1.49Vp) in the top two storeys, and 1.3Vr (1.17Vp)

in the others. For higher frames, however, this approach somewhat overestimated column

forces in the lower parts of the frame, although this has a small impact on the design.

It was aIso demonsttated that the uniform contribution of moment ta axial force-moment

interaction might lead ta unconservative esrimates of column end moment in the top

column tier. At this location, bending moments as high as 40 percent of the section plastic

moment could he expected. In other storeys magnitudes of hending moments vary between

0.1 and O.~, and a 15 percent assumption appears to he justifiable.

6-21

Page 185: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAV10UR

6.4 Study of the seismic force modification factor

6.4.1 General

The minimum base shear for seismic design of structures in Canada is given in NBCC(1995)

as V=V/U/R, where R is a force modification factor, and U a calibration factor. The force

modification factor, R, accounts for the ability of structural system ta dissipate energy by

damping and ine1astic action, while the calibration factor, U, is specified ta provide the ''level

of protection" equivalent to that from the previous editions of the Code. Depending on the

structural system, R ranges from 1 to 4 (R=4 for EBFs), while U is assigned a constant value

of 0.6. Thus, in design of EBF, the elastic base shear is reduced by a total factor,

R=(R*1/U),of6.67.

Although R has major impact in seismic design of structures, to date, the values assigned to

this factor are mainly founded on experience and engineering judgment, and have very Iittle

technical basis (Whittaker et aI, 1999). In the 1980's at Berkeley, hased on experimental data,

researchers suggested that R he described as a product of three factors Rs, ~ and ~,

accounting for reserve of sttength, ductility and added viscous damping respectively. In th.is

formulation, ~ was typicaIly set to 1.0. In experiments conducted on a dual system

comprising a moment-resisring frame and an EBF (Whittaker et al., 1987) R. and ~ were

evaluated as 2.85 and 2.12 respectively, this resulting in R equal to about six. In a revised

formulation of R in the USA (ATC 1995) ~ is abandoned and a redundancy factor, RR' is

added. This is intended to quantify the improved reliahility of seismic framing systems that

use multiple lines ofvertical seismic framing.

The study descrihed in this section is conducted to understand better and evaluate the

modification factor R currendy used in NBCC (1995) for EBFs. As suggested by Uang

(1991), R was taken herein to be a product of oversttength factor, Rs, and ductility factor

R.a. This fonnulation works weil within the framework of NBCC, in which R and I/U

correspond approximate1y to R.a and R. respective1y. The two factors can he defined using

the general force-displacement response of a structure idealized by the linear-perfecdy plastic

6-22

Page 186: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SElSM/C BEHA VIOUR

curve as illustrated in Fig. 6.14. 1bis type of relationship for each of the frames considered

(four-, eight- and fourteen-storey frames compliant with cutrent Standard, see Chapter 5)

was developed using nonlinear static analysis (pushover analysis) for monotonically

increasing NBCC1incar seismic forces. Resulting curves describing the relation between the

base shear and the roof displacement are illusttated in Figs. 6.15 (a) to (c). For comparison,

factors Rs and~ were aIso calculated using the results from non-lïnear time-history analysis.

6.4.2 Overstrength factor, IlsThe maximum lateraI sttength of the building, Vu, would commonly exceed the design lateral

sttength, Vd, associated with seismic loading. SeveraI reasons contribute to this situation

including resistances of selected members exceeding design forces; material sttengths

exceeding nominal sttengths; sorne other requirements goveming the design (e.g. ineIastic

drift, wind load, gtavity load) etc. The level of overstrength in the structure can be measured

by the oversttength factor, Rs, defined as the ratio ofVu and Vd (see Fig, 6.14).

In the context of the NBCC, Vd indicated in Fig. 6.14 corresponds to the seismic design base

shear V. To define Vu two approaches were considered: Ci) Vu was taken as the base shear

obtained from the pushover analysis at 2 percent roof drift index 01u1!"j, and (n) for each a/v

group of the selected historicaI records, Vu was detennined from the NLTHA as mean plus

one standard deviation of the maximum response base shear force 01uno;.

Column (a) of Table 6.21 shows results obtained for Rs from the pushover analysis. Rssv'med between 1.8 and 2, the former correspanding ta the eight-storey frame and the latter

to four- and faurteen-storey frames. The results from NLTHA for Iow a/v group of records,

given in coIumns (b) of the same table show the similar trend. In bath cases, the variation of

Rs in function of structural period was about fifteen percent maximum. For intermediate a/v

group of records slighdy larger variations in Rs were observed, mainly due to the Iower Rsvalue obtained for eight-storey frame.

Note that in three cases, the smallest values of Rs were obtained for eight-storey frame. This

is consistent with observations made in Chapter 5 regarding the utilization of sections of

6-23

Page 187: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

frames with different heights. It was demonstrated in that Chapter that the sections of the

eight-storey frame had very high response ratios bath for Code specified loads and for

forces arising from links, 50 it could be anticipated that this frame would have the least

oversttength. The higher ~ for other two frames may he due to drift influencing the design

of the fourteen-storey frame, and the gravity loads affecting the four-storey frame design.

It is thus concluded that in the range of periods studied (1s to 35), the factor Rs is not

significandy dependent on structural periode For consistent comparison between Rs and

1/U, the later should be divided by 0.8 8, thus the value assigned by NBCC seems realistic

for these EBFs. However, a considerable period dependence and higher values of~ could

be expected in the shorter period ranges (Fischinger and Fajfar (1994); see also Fig. 6.16).

6.4.3 Ductility factor,~

The duetility factor ~ is a measure of a global nonlinear response of a framing system and it

can be defined as the ratio of the elastic sttength demand, Vuf:, ta inelastic sttength demand

Vu, associated with a certain displacement ductility ratio J.1 (see Fig. 6.14 for definitions ofVuf:

and VJ. For single-degree-of-freedom systems, J.1 is defined as the ratio of maximum

inelastic displacement, ~, ta the yield displacement, L\. It is a weil established fact that the

relationship between~ and J.1 is sensitive to the variety of factors, such as structural period,

soil conditions, strain-hardening, magnitude of fl, differences in duetility demands for single

and multiple-degrees of freedom systems and similar. (Whittaker et al, 1999). NBCC (1995)

however stipulates that that magnitudes of R~ and ,... are equal over the whole range of

common structural periods.

Similarly to &.s, both pushover analysis and NLTHA were used to detennine factor~. The

procedure to obtain Vu was described in the section 6.4.2. The same method was used to

8 The ine1astic base shear used to design frames in this study was furtber reduced by the factor of 0.8,to account for the conservative estimates of structural period using Code empirical formula. NBCaIlows the use of other calculation methods to detem1Ïne the structural period, but the base shearobtained in this way must not be less than 80 percent of that corresponding to empirical estimate ofstructural period. Thus, for consistent comparison between Rs obtained herein and l/U, the larersbould he divided by 0.8.

6-24

Page 188: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBFtS SE/SMIC BEHA V/OUR

detennine Vue ~.e both Vu~· and Vue,nonI) but assuming elastic behaviour of all frame

members induding links.

The results for~ are Sllmmarized in columns (a) to (d) ofTable 6.22. Unlike Rs, ~ showed

dependency on the structural perio~ with pushover analysis giving magnitudes increasing

from 2.86 to 4.63 with decrease in structural period. This trend is consistent with previous

findings reported in the literature (Bolin and Rides (1991), Han (1998». NLTHA gave lower

values of~ ranging between 2.39 and 3.759 with decreasing period.

It was demonstrated in the previous section that the maximum inelastic base shears obtained

form the pushover analysis and NLmA 01uZ'. and Vuno) were comparable. Since the lateral

force profiles and thus displacement profiles are imposed on the structure in pushover

analysis, when responding elastically, the structure is likely to develop Iarger base shears in

pushover analysis than in response to a selected earthquake recordto• 1bis cao explain the

higher values of~ from pushover analysis and justify why the magnitudes of~ obtained

from NLTHA are probably more realistic. In all cases, ~ was smaller than R given in

NBCC, the difference increasing from about 6 percent for the four-storey frame to 40

percent for the fourteen-storey frame.

Since the ductility factor ~ is reIated to the dispIacement ductility ratio, Jl., the latter

parameter was aIso monitored. While for single storey buildings, â max and âv cao be clearly

defined as the roof leve1 dispIacements, the use of this definition to evaluate J.L for multi­

storey buildings CJ.LfnrnJ presents sorne inherent difficulties. For example, by inspection it was

found that for a numher of earthquake records studie~ frames did not respond

predominandy in the first mode, thus, calculation of Jl fr:une based on the roof displacements

is questionable.

9 The numbers correspond to the maximum of~ low a/v and~ intem'll:diaœ a/v for each frame.10 The idea is based on the analogy with Rayleigh's method for estimating natura! period ofvtbration.The approximate period is always smaller than the exact value, since the assumptien is made teapproximate the exact mode shape, i.e. the displacement profile is imposed 1bis in a way isequivalent te having a c'stiffer" structure, thus the natural period is always smaller than the exactvalue.

6-25

Page 189: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAVIOUR

Newmark and Hall (1982) postulated that J.Lfr:ame is in general some weighted average of the

storey ductility displacement ratios CJ.lstorey), where the weighting function is best defined

considering a particular pattern of displacements corresponcling to the preferred mode of

defonnations of the structure. Following this idea, an alternative approach to detennine Jlfr:ame

was examined herein. The preferred pattern of displacement was selected so that at every

storey, the inelastic inter-storey drift was equal to the design limit (2 percent of storey

height). This displacement profile was then compared to maximum inelastic storey drifts

obtained from NLTHA and the weighting coefficients were detennined. These are given in

Table 6.23.

For each frame considered, the displacement ductility ratio at every storey (flslorq.) was

determined first, and the global displacement ductility ratio, J.1famc:' was then found as the

weighted average value. J.Ls[O~ was calcuIated as the ratio of the maximum inelastic inter­

storey drift and the inter-storey drift at first yie1d of the link at the storey under

consideration. Both drifts were obtained from the NLTHA. A Mean plus one standard

deviation of J!srocq- was found for each alv record group, and the larger of the two was

retained to caIcuIate Jlfame. Results for Jlfame are indicated in column (e) ofTahle 6.22.

Similarly to R.., J,Lframc was aIso found to be period-dependent with magnitudes increasing

from 2.64 ta 5.40 with decreasing period. Comparison of results obtained for ~ and Jlframc

shows very little difference hetween the two parameters for the fourteen-storey frame,

suggesting the equal displacement rule applies (i.e. ~=J.L) . However, for the four- and eight­

storey frames, the equal energy rule (Rp=(2J.L -1)1/~ describes better the relationship between

~ and Jl. For the two available values, the results can be approximated by R.p =1.2(2J.1fnmc­

1)112.

It was mentioned earlier in this section that the R factor specified in NBCC (1995)

corresponds roughly to ~ and that NBCC assumes that~ and J.1 are equal ovec the whole

range of common structural periods. The above discussion confinns this assumption for the

6-26

Page 190: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

fourteen-storey frame ([14=2.765), but not for four- and eight-storey frames (T=1.01s and

r=1.89s) where J.1 exceeded RJl by 45 and 20 percent respective1y.

Although, with the exception of the four-storey frame, I.lfamc was be10w the design target

ductility of 4, larger ductility demands were in general seen in the upper and lower storeys

compared with the middle storeys (see Fig. 6.17). 1bis pattem could he re1ated to the higher­

mode response contnbutions. In aIl cases, the links in the storeys with highest duetility

demands deve10ped the largest inelastic rotations, often exceeding the design limit of

O.09rad. A further investigation was therefore conducted with the objective of establishing

the global duetility displacement ratio of the frame at which the link with the largest inelastic

rotation y just reaches the design limit (J.1fnmcy<o_~

I.lrnmcY<O.09 was found from NLTHA following the same approach used to determine I.lfr:unc. To

do this, f.1srottyr<O.09 values were fust found as the ratio of inter-storey inelastic drift at the

instant when the link in that storey first reached the inelastic rotation of 0.09rad, to the inter­

storey inelastic drift corresponding to the first link yielding in that storey. The weighted

average of these value.4il gave Jlfr.uneY<D.09 equal to 4.1, 3.3 and 3.7 in ascending order of frame

heights. As can he seen, Jlfr.unc ~'"{ceeded Jlfr.uncY<O.09 for the four- and eight-storey frames. It was

reported in Chapter 5, that links of these frames develop inelastic rotations in excess of the

design limite It appears that, had the global ductility displacement ratio been below four and

three for the four and eight storey frames respectively, the violation of the link rotation limit

would have been less severe.

6.4.4 Summuy

This section has investigated the response modification factor, R=R*1 lU, eurrendy in use in

NBCC for seismic design of EBFs. R was represented as a product of two factors, the

overstrength factor, Rs, and ductility factor ~. In the period range considered (ls to 3 sec),

Rs was found not to he significandy influenced by structural period with magnitudes

corresponding fairly weil ta 1lU. ~. on the other hand, increased as the structural period

decreased, and for the four-storey frame exceeded the value of R specified in NBCC for

6-27

Page 191: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BERAVIOUR

EBFs (R=4). The relationship between duetility factor and displacement ducrility ratio, J.1fame

was also investigated. It was found that the assumption made in NBCC that the two

parameters are equal was justified for the founeen-storey frame, but for other two frame

heights, J.1fr.une was found to be larger than ~. Ir the case of four- and eight-storey frames,

where NLTHA indicated large inelastic link defonnation, J.1famc also exceeded the duetility

demand associated with link rotations at the design limit.

6.5 Relationship between the inelastic link deformation r. and inter­

storey drift li

6.5.1 General

In the current Standard, the inelastic link deformation, "(, is evaluated as a function of inter­

storey drift and the geometty of the frame. 1bis relationship is commonly approximated

from a rigid plastic mechanism (see Fig 1.3). For Chevron-type EBF "(=(A/h)*~../e), where A

is the inter-storey drift calculated as O.SR rimes the elastic inter-storey drift determined for

factored loading, and L, e and h describe the geometty of the frame. The Standard requires

that the value ofy does not exceed O.09rad for links yielding in shear.

The results of non-linear time-history analysis presented in Chapter 5 indicate that, for a

number of records, maximum inelastic Iink deformations exceeded those predicted in the

design. This puts into question the current Standard procedures to predict inelastic shear

deformations of the link. The study was therefore undertaken to examine: (i) whether the

relationship between the inelastic inter-storey drifts and the inelastic shear defonnations can

be detennined from the simple rigid-plastic mechanism and (u) does the link reach an

ine1astic-shear defonnation of 0.09 rad at an inelastic inter-storey drift equal to O.SR rimes

the elastic drift.

Results from the non-linear analysis time-history analysis discussed in this section are those

for four-, eight- and founeen-storey frame designed according to the current Standard (see

Chapter 5 or Chapter 6 - Design B), responding to the set of selected historical records.

6-28

Page 192: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'SSEISMIC BEHAVIOUR

6.5.2 Relationship between the maximum y and maximum A

For each record of the two a/v ratio groups maximum inelastic link rotation Ytm:6.J and

maximum inelastic drift, ~, were determined at each storey for aIl three frames studied. In

aIl cases, a very sttong positive correlation was observed between the two parameters. AIso

for a given record and frame height, the ymax corresponded to ~J regarding both the

location and the rime of occurrence. This further confinned the physical connection

between the two parameters.

Columns Ca) ta (d) of Tables 6.24 and 6.25 summarize values of Ytm:6. and~ obtained from

non-linear analysis. While Table 6.24 gives the absolute maximum values found at a given

storey for any record within one a/v group, in Table 6.25 the results are expressed in tenns

of mean plus one standard deviation. Coefficients Ky, defined as the ratio of the Ymu/~ are

listed in columns Ce) and (t) of the same tables for low and intennediate a/v records

respectively. For each storey, the maximum of columns Ce) and Ct) is found and the resulting

Ky is given in column (g). Kytiame for each individual frame is then obtained by calcularing

mean and Mean plus one standard deviation of values given in column (g). For comparison,

for each frame height, the value of coefficients Ky and Kytiame were evaluated at each storey

assuming that the frame behaves as the rigid-plastic mechanism. They are denoted as KyRP

,

and K/nrneRP and are listed in column (h) ofTable 6.24.

As seen in Tables 6.24 and 6.25, very similar values of Kyfnmc were obtained for aIl frame

heights, aIl very close ta 0.002. These correspond fairly weil ta results obtained using the

approach from the Standard, parricularly in the first storey of the frames. In other storeys,

rigid-plastic mechanism yielded more conservative results for a1l three frame heights. Note

that Ky varied significandy over the height of the frames. The rigid-plastic mechanism does

not capture these variations, but nevertheless, for a given inelastic inter-storey drift, the

values of y predicted by the Standard are more conservarive compared to those obtained

from the analysis. Thus, it is concluded that the relationship between inelastic shear

defonnation of the link and inelastic inter-storey drift approximated from rigid-plastic

mechanism is acceptable.

6-29

Page 193: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'SSE/SMIC BEHAVIOUR

6.5.3 Drift lim.its to controllink behaviour

In the current Standard, inelastic inter-storey drift corresponding to link reaching the

maximum shear defonnation of O.09rad is calculated by multiplying the elastic inter-storey

drift by 0.5R. As shown previously in mis Chapter, the displacement ductility ratio, Jl, was

approximately equal to the ductility factor ~ (which corresponds to NBCC's force

reduction factor R) only for the 14-storey frame, while for the 4- and 8-storey frames R~

exceeded J.l. Both parameters varied with the structural periode Thus, it is rather unlikely that

the inelastic inter-storey drift associated with link deformation design limit can he predicted

on basis of elastic frame defonnations and the force reduction factor. A more direct

approach was therefore adopted, in which the values inter-storey drifts, corresponding to the

desired perfoanance of the links, were set based on results from NLTHA.

This difficulty to predict a complex relationship between peak elastic and inelastic

displacements of the structural system is one of the limitations of a spectral acceleration­

based design method, otherwise known as a "force-based method", which provides the basis

for seismic design of structures in most current seismic codes, including NBCC (1995). This

design approach treats displacements and defonnations in rather superficial ways, although

they are generally accepted as much better indicators of potential damage than forces.

If "strains and deformations are the best indicators ofpotential damage, then it would appear

Ihat a design approach that attempts to design a structure which would achieve, rather than be

bOlmded by, a given iimit state under a given seismic intensity would be desirable" (priesdey,

1998). Designing a structure for a specified target displacement is the central concept of

design approach known as the direct displacemeot-based design method Fundamentals of

the method as proposed by Priesdey (1993,1998) are illustrated in Fig. 6.18.

In direct displacement-based design the structure is charaeterized by a secant stiffness at

maximum displacement and a level ofequivalent v;scous damping appropriate to the hysteretic

energy absorbed during inelastic response (Figs 6.18(b) and (c». The structure is represeoted

as an equivalent snOF oscilator (substitute structure) with known effective mass ml! and

unknown effective period Te and unlcnown effèctive stiffness ke (Fig. 6.18 (a»). For a design

6-30

Page 194: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. SruDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV10UR

disp/acement 41, and the damping selected based on the expeeted ductility deman~ the

effective period Ttt is obtained from the design displacement spectta as shown in Fig. 6.18

(d). For known Te and IDc, effective stiffness can be found from the formula for the natural

period of the SDOF osci1ator. The design base shear at maximum response, Vb' is then

detennined as a product of ke and âcl.

Defining the design displacement appropriate for the Iimit state considered (e.g.

serviceability limit state, damage conttollimit state), is one of the critical elements for the

application of this design procedure. Priestley (1998) points out that in many cases the

design displacement will be dictated by code drift limits.

Within the context of performance-based design, SEAOC (1995) provides a number of drift

indices corresponding to desired performance levels of the structural system in response to

earthquake with specified probability of e.'"<:ceedence. The performance level is described in

part by overall damage which is related to a pennissible drift. For a "life-safe" performance

leve~ moderate damage is expected and total pennissible drift is 2 percent (1.5°/0 ttansient

drift+0.5D/o permanent drift). Drift less than 0.5 percent is admissible for an "operational"

leve~ associated with moderate damage to nonstructural elements and light damage to

structural elements has occurred etc. The overall drift limit of 2 percent of the height

prescribed by NBCC could he, by analogy, associated with ''Iife-safe'' performance leveI.

Results of the non-linear analyses compiled within the present study for code-based EBFs

were examined with the objective of determining the appropriate design displacements that

could be used in the displacement-based method for EBF seismic design. In view of the two

limit states previously discussed, attention was directed to: (i) the inter-storey drift at first

yield of any link in the frame, and (u) the inter-storey drift corresponding to the first link

reaching the inelastic rotation design Iimit of0.09rad.

Table 6.26 snmmarizes results obtained for (i) and (u) for an duee frame heights responding

to the selected histoncal acceleration records. For each record, the link that yielded first was

identified, and the associated inter-storey drift was found. The same was done for the 1ink

6-31

Page 195: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

6. STUDY OF EBF'S SE/SMIC BEHAV/OUR

that first developed inelastic rotation of 0.09rad. The results obtained were not dependent on

the a/v record group, 50 aIl the records were considered when deterrnjning Mean and

standard deviation. Final values of inter-storey drifts (i) and (u) are expressed in tenns of

Mean minus one standard deviation and given as a percentage of the typical storey height.

Variation of structural period resulted in small variation in observed inter-story drift (i). The

first Iink in the four- and eight-storey frames yielded at a drift of 0.3%, and in the fourteen­

storey frame at 0.25%• Slighdy higher variation was observed in Înter-storey drift (U), which

attained values of 1.4, 1.3 and 1.2% for frames in increasing order ofheight. The rigid-plastic

mechanism anaIogy for geometric configurations considered herein yields limiting inter­

storey drifts betweeo 0.9 and 1 % 11•

Hence, for the structures studied, the foUowing values of inter-storey drifts could be used in

determining design displacements for chevron-type EBF: (i) 0.25-0.3% to insure elastic

response of links, and (u) 1.2% (conservatively) to insure link inelastic rotations within

experimentally detennined bounds ta ensure stable hysteretic behaviour (O.09rad).

6.5.4 Snmmary

The relationship between the inelastic inter-storey drift, ~ and inelastic link rotation, y, was

examined in this section. For all frames studied, the two parameters showed very sttong

positive correlation. Approximation of the relationship between y to â from rigid-plastic

mechanism seems appropriate for design purposes. The use of the force reduction factor to

find inelastic displacements from their elastic values was examined and found inadequate. A

more direct approach was therefore adopted, where the pennissible inter-storey drifts,

associated with desired perfoanance of the links, were estabüshed based 00 the results from

non-linear analysis. The inter-storey drifts obtained could be further used to determine

design dispIacements in the context of displacement-based design method

11 For four and eight-storey frame L/e=10, thus fory=O.09rad D/hs=O.09*L/e=O.9For fourteen-storey frame LIe=l1.2S thus D /hs=O.09*LIe=1.01

6-32

Page 196: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.1 Four storey frame: Summary of selected sections (Design A)

Storey (a) Beams a (b)Braces Cc) Columns Mass (kg)

4 W130X28 1.49 127X127X8W250X33

3 W250X67 1.18 178X178X8

2 W360X79 1.17 203X203XI05783

1 W460X89 1.19 203X203X13W360XI01

Table 6.2 Four-storey frame, Design A: Predicted values ofy and A

Storey(a) Inelastic link rotation, y (rad) (b) Inelastic inter-storey drift, A (mm)

DesignA Design B Design C DesignA Design B Design C

4 0.070 0.049 0.044 34.64 36.35 32.20

3 0.064 0.050 0.035 31.73 36.68 26.01

2 0.050 0.045 0.038 24.64 33.25 28.20

1 0.041 0.031 0.029 24.62 28.03 25.84

Table 6.3 Four-storey frame, Design A: Maximum normalized link shear forces and inelastic

rotations

Ca) Low a/v records

StoreyVmax/Vp

Jl Jl+cr

4 1.47 1.533 1.49 1.572 1.44 1.511 1.48 1.55

(b) Intermediate a/v records

max y r:an"é (rad) Ymax (rad)

Jl Jl+O' Jl J.1+cr

0.094 0.126 0.071 0.1040.078 0.112 0.063 0.1000.066 0.095 0.055 0.0850.075 0.107 0.061 0.094

Storey

4

321

1.57 1.601.61 1.711.48 1.621.45 1.60

max y r:anp: (rad)

0.225 0.2540.090 0.1290.061 0.0830.069 0.103

6-33

Ymax (rad)

0.164 0.2140.058 0.0840.049 0.0700.056 0.092

Page 197: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

• •Table 6.4 Four-storey frame, Design A: Duration of excess loading

(a) Low a/v records (b) Intcnnediate a/v recordsStorcy

ALl LPCl I.PC2 LI'SI Ct C2 AI2 LPS2 MSI MS2 NHB1 NHB2 NG01 NG02

4 36 45 53 31 71 75 121 89 98 71 136 146 111 124

3ri)

1 0 12 t6 5 38 42 37 9 8 6 7 36 34~u

2 ~ 0 0 () 0 () 0 9 6 0 0 0 0 1 5~

1 2 10 26 12 19 41 37 34 2 4 4 0 7 14.._....~..•.•..............•......-....................-._-_.........................._---.__.......__._--...-...................-......... -................----.........._--.---...._-_.-..-..--_..-----.......----....-.............----_._......_.........--_...................

Total 39 55 91 59 95 154 209 166 109 83 146 153 155 177................................................_.........-.................................._--.-............................--.--....__... .....-........................_---.........-....--_._------.........-............_.....__.....-.-.._._._.._._-.-_......................

4 ri) 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03 ~ 75 238 322 54 147 167 534 310 181 810 252 296 200 903

C\2 CS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1

1 U 0 () 0 3 225 2 25 5 0 3 0 1 8 5~~ ...................................................................-.......................-....................-_.-.._-----_._....-.-.. .....................__._ .. _-_...._...-....._..............._-----_..~._.....__._--_.._...__.._....._...._.......-......_.__.

Total 75 238 322 57 372 169 559 315 181 813 252 297 208 908

Table 6.S Four-storcy frame, Design A: Inter-storey inelastic drift (mm)

(a) Law a/v records (b) Intcnnediatc a/v recordsStorey

Cl C2 AL2 LPS2 MSI MS2 NHBt NHB2 NGOI NG02ALl LPel LPC2 LPSI J.1 J.1+0' J.l f.l+a

4 30.0 38.0 36.4 42.2 66.9 50.5 44.0 57.1 85.6 80.6 72.8 95.0 67.2 62.0 57.0 109.7 78.7 96.43 22.3 25.9 43.8 34.0 60.3 38.9 37.5 51.2 33.2 39.9 28.5 48.1 25.2 23.3 39.9 52.8 36.4 47.12 18.1 27.3 28.8 30.3 42.4 48.8 32.6 43.7 40.7 33.0 21.1 34.3 18.7 24.0 35.3 39.9 30.9 39.41 24.1 28.3 38.6 28.0 51.2 60.4 38.4 53.0 64.1 33.1 22.5 54.0 26.0 16.4 27.9 47.8 36.5 53.4

Page 198: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.6 Comparison of inter-storey inelastic drifts (Designs A't B, q

Inelastic inter-storey drift (J.a.+0')"1 mm

Storey Low a/v records Intermediate a/v

DesignA Design B Design C DesignA DesignB DesignC

4 57.1 79.6 65.4 96.4 79.9 81.93 51.2 70.4 69.8 47.1 54.4 59.62 43.7 41.5 31.0 39.4 41.5 34.61 53.0 72.5 57.1 53.3 61.1 64.3

Table 6.7 Eight-storey frame: Summary of selected sections (Design A)

Storey(i) After ductility design before verification ofy (ii) modifications to satisfy y

(a) Beams (b) Braces (c) Columns (cl) Braces (e) Columnsa

8 W200X42 1.15 178X178X8W200X52

254X254Xl17 W250X67 1.07 203X203XI0 254X254X136 W360X72 1.05 203X203Xl1

W310Xl18254X264X13

5 W460X60 1.05 254X254Xll4 W460X68 1.05 254X254Xtt

WWF350X212 WWF350X2633 W460X82 1.04 254X2s4Xl12 W460X89 1.05 254X254Xl1

\VWF4s0X308 WWF450X4091 \V530XI09 1.07 305X305Xl1

rvlass: 21306 kg 24835 kg

6-35

Page 199: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.8 Eight-storey frame, Design A: Maximum normalized link shear forces andinelastic rotations

Ca) Low a/v records

StoreyVrnax/Vp max'Yange 'Y mu

J.1 J.1+<J J.1 J.1+cr J.1 J.1+cr

8 1.47 1.51 0.080 0.112 0.062 0.0857 1.60 1.70 0.080 0.103 0.062 0.0906 1.52 1.63 0.085 0.126 0.070 0.1015 1.44 1.59 0.075 0.123 0.064 0.1084 1.40 1.53 0.064 0.101 0.053 0.0823 1.40 1.55 0.053 0.081 0.043 0.0672 1.37 1.53 0.064 0.101 0.059 0.0961 1.45 1.62 0.080 0.123 0.072 0.117

(b) Intermediate a/v records

StoreyVmax/Vp max 'YnnfIE Yrnrr.

J.1 J.1+cr J.1 J.1+cr J.1 J.1+cr

8 1.62 1.70 0.146 0.195 0.107 0.1607 1.55 1.65 0.081 0.108 0.066 0.0966 1.34 1.48 0.049 0.082 0.038 0.0665 1.19 1.35 0.028 0.050 0.020 0.0374 1.11 1.28 0.019 0.034 0.015 0.0263 1.13 1.28 0.019 0.033 0.014 0.0252 1.17 1.28 0.023 0.035 0.018 0.0271 1.26 1.34 0.032 0.040 0.024 0.032

6-36

Page 200: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e eTable 6.9 Eight-storey frame, Design A: Duration of excess loading

Storcy(a) Law a/v records (b) Intermediate a/v records

ALl LPCl LPC2 LPSl Cl C2 AL2 LPS2 MS1 MS2 NHB1 NHB2 NG01 NG02-

8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05

ri)

0 14 0 0 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0uu

4 f! 0 42 0 0 4 7 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ÇQ

3 0 38 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02 0 88 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 28 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0..._................_._......_.........._.•........._---.._..._._-------............_........---............._------..---.._----_.._--........._....-......- ..._------_.....--------------------....._-----_...._--------_.._-_.._---_.

Total 0 210 0 0 14 17 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 00\ ........_--_...._---._....__.....__._._..............-_....._-....................................._-........._..--_.........................._---..........-.-._.................•.._...-_.._.-.__._-_._---_..._--.._--........1 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0~

....,J7 7 523 0 0 454 0 5 38 4 20 72 38 646 1296 ri) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05 j 0 27 0 0 48 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03 u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...._-_........-.._......_.__.__._------_.__._--...-....__._......._...--------_.._------_..._-.-..__._-_.__.--------..-......._--------_._.._----------- ...--..._-_.._------------_._- ..-----.._.

Total 7 550 0 0 502 0 10 38 4 20 72 38 646 130

Page 201: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e eTable 6.10 Eight-storey framc, Design A: Intcr-storey inclastic drift (mm)

(a) Law a/v records (b) Intermediate a/v recordsStorey

LPCI LPC2 LPSI Cl C2 AL2 LPS2 MSI MS2 NHBl NHB2 NGOI NG02ALI Il Il+o Il Il+o

8 33.8 37.3 30.5 40.1 54.2 36.1 38.7 46.9 32.7 85.5 37.8 33.4 72.6 57.6 42.6 48.5 60.0 78.8

7 32.9 45.3 39.1 24.2 56.1 36.5 39.0 49.9 38.7 41.6 27.0 33.9 27.0 26.5 56.9 40.6 38.4 51.06 29.0 65.6 36.7 35.0 39.5 38.7 40.8 53.5 54.7 29.2 20.1 18.6 26.7 18.6 24.1 24.6 30.6 45.2

5 25.8 70.4 35.6 22.9 35.4 42.6 38.8 55.9 39.8 26.7 17.0 15.8 16.5 16.5 15.7 21.5 20.8 31.8

4 23.6 53.3 28.5 27.0 33.6 43.1 34.9 46.2 26.9 23.2 16.2 14.5 13.5 11.6 13.0 18.8 18.6 26.53 15.9 31.0 23.1 23.7 39.2 41.8 29.1 39.2 26.1 17.4 12.3 11.2 15.9 11.7 12.0 21.7 14.1 17.92 16.2 52.8 29.1 20.3 44.1 37.8 33.4 47.5 24.3 20.3 11.6 10.6 16.7 14.1 15.6 21.2 16.7 21.71 18.5 77.0 41.1 27.3 55.6 45.4 44.2 64.9 26.3 26.8 16.6 19.1 19.9 17.3 24.1 23.6 25.1 34.1

Table 6.11 Eight-storey frame: Comparison of predicted and observed inter-storey inclastic drift (mm)0\

(b) Observed (Il+10)~(a) Predictcd00

Storcy Low a/v records Intcrmediate a/v records

Design A Design B Design C Design A Design B Design C Design A Design B Design C

8 61.5 55.6 43.0 46.9 65.1 53.4 73.7 90.3 78.87 60.2 53.0 41.1 49.9 66.7 56.0 41.6 51.0 51.06 56.8 52.5 41.6 53.5 53.0 54.4 42.2 40.5 45.25 52.5 48.0 43.2 55.9 41.3 47.2 32.0 28.6 31.84 48.6 46.3 41.8 46.2 38.3 39.3 24.4 23.6 26.53 41.6 42.5 37.7 39.2 32.7 33.9 22.0 17.6 17.92 36.2 37.1 33.7 47.5 43.2 47.9 22.2 21.2 21.71 32.0 32.0 29.5 64.9 54.7 59.1 27.7 33.5 34.1

Page 202: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

eTable 6.12 Fourteen-storey frame: Summary of sclectcd sections (Design A)

Storey(i) After ductility design before verification of y (ü) Modifications to satisfy 'Y

(a) Beams (c) Braces d) Columns (c) Braccs (1) Columnsa

14 W200X42 1.78 178X178XI0 W200X52 W360X287 W250X5813 W200X59 1.30 203X203XI0 W460X31512 W360X57 1.37 254X254X8 W310X118 W460X315 W360X382Il W360X57 1.28 254X254XI0 W460X31510 W410X74 1.29 254X254Xl1 W360X196 W460X315 W360X3829 W410X85 1.29 305X305Xl1 W360X2878 W460X97 1.35 305X305Xl1 WWF400X303 W360X287 WWF500X6517 W530X85 1.29 305X305X13 W360X2876 W530XI01 1.28 305X305Xl1 WWF550X420 W360X179 WWF600X680

0\ 5 W530XI09 1.29 305X305X13 W360X1471lJo.»

4 W530XI09 1.29 305X305X13 WWF600X551 W360X147\0 WWF600X6803 W610Xl13 1.31 305X305X13 W310X1432 W610X113 1.28 305X305X13 WWF600X680 W310X143 WWF600X8641 W610X125 1.12 305X305X13 W310X143

Mass: 61141kg lO4040kg

*Mass of Design B: 68546 kg

e

Page 203: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.13 Four-storey frame: Distnbution oflatera! forces (kN)

Storey

4321

Ca) NBC~ (b) NBCCmo<bJ

171 241373 335257 217143 150

NLTHA (J..L+O') Ce) NBC~mod

Cc) Lawa/v (d) Intennediate

213 237 226349 378 347218 205 239189 134 133

Table 6.14 Eight-storey frame: Distribution of lateraI forces (kN)

Storey (a) NBCCIinor (b) NBCCmod2J

NLTHA (J.1+0')(e) NBCC1incumod

(c) Law a/v (d) Intennediate

8 494 550 569 698 5897 327 310 348 328 3046 282 237 310 246 2625 237 191 213 96 2204 192 163 186 166 1783 147 161 138 124 1362 102 96 81 148 941 56 129 70 171 52

Table 6.15 Founeen-storey frame: Distribution of lateraI forces (kN)

Storey (a) NBCC1incar (b) NBCCmo<hINLTHA (J..L+O')

(e) NBCC1incumod(c) Law a/v (d) Intennediate

14 350 181 320 432 38613 269 367 402 452 38612 249 276 317 326 226Il 229 215 269 235 20810 207 176 173 168 1889 187 160 158 104 1698 167 134 123 35 1517 147 118 120 160 1336 126 92 144 36 1155 106 161 88 99 974 86 78 56 138 783 66 94 96 146 602 44 52 127 157 401 24 154 134 136 22

6-40

Page 204: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e eTable 6.16 Column axial forces: Results from NLTHA (kN)-

Column axial forces (Il+0)

Storey Four-stocey frame Eight-storey frame Fourteen-storey frame

(a) Lowa/v (b) Intenn. a/v (c) Max (a,b) (a) Low a/v (b) Interm. a/v (c) Max (a,h) (a) Low a/v (b) Interm. a/v (c) Max (a,b)-

14 150 149 15013 748 800 80012 1600 1690 1690.11 2665 2818 281810 4026 4175 41759 5472 5593 55938 429 440 440 6960 6965 69657 1149 1228 1228. 8566 8233 8566

t 6 2244 2266 2266 10090 9484 10090....5 3510 3470 3510 11698 10564 116984 135 137 137 4818 4741 4818 13115 11480 131153 526 606 606 6422 6017 6422 14653 12025 146532 1354 1402 1402 8066 7231 8066 16185 12651 161851 2417 2556 2556 9877 8374 9877 17912 13497 17912

Page 205: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

Table 6.17 Column axial forces in ductility design phase: Cornparison of combination mIes-

Column axial forces (kN)

StareyEight-storcy frame Fourteen-storey frame

SS SSSR SS SSSRP RQvil)' Vr (link) NLTHA P RBvify Vr (link) NLTHAcol (1.2SVr) (l.SVr) col (1.25Vr) (1.5Vr)

14 147 233 147 147 15013 580 331 871 929 80012 1013 463 1718 1859 169011 1446 577 2730 2747 281810 1879 694 3883 3666 41759 2312 788 5184 4617 55938 400 256 400 400 440 2745 920 6601 5564 6965

0\ 7 785 394 1105 1168 1228 3178 955 8185 6578 8566~ 6 1168 522 1980 2142 2266 3611 1038 9811 7489 10090

5 1550 669 3014 3036 3510 4044 1097 11541 8435 116984 1929 724 4228 3984 4818 4477 1097 13345 9356 131153 2308 810 5512 4847 6422 4910 1097 15150 10184 146532 2688 810 6904 5717 8066 5343 1097 16954 10972 161851 3068 1097 8296 6465 9877 5776 1262 18758 11732 17912

Page 206: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.18 Column axial forces in ductility design phase: comparison of amplification factors

Four-storey frame Eight-storey frame

Storey 1:1 65V (J.4) 1:1 65V (7.8)1:1.25 V (H) 1:1.5V (1·4) • r 1:1.25 V (1·8) 1:1.5V (1.8) • r

r r 1:1.3Vr(I.2) r r 1:1.3V

r(I.6)

e

Fourteen-storey frame

1:1.25 Vr(l o t4) Il.5V (1.14) 1:1.65Vr(l)" 14)

r Il.3V (l·t2)r

14 147 147 14713 871 929 96412 1718 1943 194311 2730 2845 297810 3883 4027 41619 5184 5357 54968 400 400 400 6601 6798 69537 1105 1168 1207 8185 8415 8582

0'\ 6 1980 2142 2450 9811 10050 10256e 5 3014 3306 3701 11541 11801 120394 119 119 119 4228 4688 5021 13345 13620 138973 518 557 580 5512 6153 6452 15150 15424 157562 1213 1438 1433 6904 7747 7885 16954 17228 176151 2137 2281 2385 8296 9341 9691 18758 19032 19474------_ ..-•.............••........... _-----_._----- •.........••...........•. _.. _--- ••...................•••.................. _--- _--- ---_ .._-.- .

SSSE* 0.29 0.19 0.15 0.37 0.16 0.14 0.18 0.22 0.31

* SSSE - square root of the sum of squared errors

Page 207: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.19 Column end moments: Results fronl NLTHA (J.l)

Column moments (kNm)

Storcy Four-storey frame Eight-storey frame Fourtecn-storey frame

Lowa/v Intenn. a/v Lowa/v Intenn. a/v Lowa/v Intenn. a/v

e

C\

t

14-1312-119-107-85-63-41-2

45t 13

56110

91126193186

134118106153

50194202275342477465

96282306293350433494

Table 6.20 Column end moments as a percentage of plastic moments of column sections, Mp

Column moments (0/0 MrJ

Storey Four-storey frame Eight-storey frame Fourteen-storey frame

(a) Lowa/v (b) Interm. a/v Max (a,b] (a) Lowa/v (b) Interm. a/v Max [a,h] (a) Low a/v (b) Interm. a/v Max [a,h]

14-13 18 36 3612-11 14 20 209-10 10 15 157-8 29 42 42 7 7 75-6 15 14 15 5 6 63-4 34 42 42 16 9 16 8 7 81-2 18 18 18 9 8 9 6 7 7

Page 208: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.21 Overstrength factor, Rs

No. of storeys (a) Pushover NLTHA (JJ.+cr)

inEBF analysis (b) Lowa/v (b) Intenn. a/v Ma."C [(a), (b)]

4 1.95 2.06 2.01 2.06

8 1.78 1.81 1.61 1.81

14 2.08 1.94 1.82 1.94

Table 6.22 Ductility factor, R~ and displacement ductility ratio, J.1rnmc

3.002.882.07

4.633.432.86

48

14

No. of ~ Jlrmnestoreys in (a) Pushover NL_THA_----3toI.CJ.L_+_cr...,L) NLTHA (J.t+cr)

EBF analysis (b) Lowa/v (c) Intenn. a/v (d) Ma.x (b), (c) (e)-----

3.75 3.75 5.402.51 2.88 3.462.39 2.39 2.64

Table 6.23 Weighting coefficients to calculate Jlfnme

(a) Four-storey frame:

NLTHA (Jl+1cr)

1 (d) WeightStorey __M_ax_[(Lo_w_a_v_)_,_CI_nt_enn_._a_/v_)_J_ (c) L1NBCC (mm) coefficients (a)*(d)

(a) Jl5tO~ (b) &mel (mm)

4 5.91 79.91 74 0.185 1.093 5.40 70.36 74 0.210 1.142 4.11 41.51 74 0.356 1.461 6.88 72.45 90 0.248 1.71

Jlrramc: 5.40

6-45

Page 209: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 6.23 Cont' d

(b) Eight-storey frame:

NLTHA (J.a.+la)

Storey Max [(Low a/v) , (lntenn. a/v)](d) Weight

(a)*(d)(c) âNBCC(mm) coefficients

(a) J.1sroœy (b)~(mm)

8 6.47 90.29 72 0.064 0.42

7 4.21 66.70 72 0.087 0.37

6 2.98 53.01 72 0.110 0.33

5 2.65 41.30 72 0.141 0.37

4 2.73 38.29 72 0.152 0.41

3 2.53 32.71 72 0.178 0.45

2 3.62 43.19 72 0.135 0.49

1 4.69 54.68 90 0.133 0.62

J.1frame 3.46

(c) Fourteen-storey frame:

NLTHA (J.a.+a)

Storey Max [(Law a/v) , (Interm. a/v)] â (d) Weight(a)*(d)(c) NBCC (mm) coefficients

(a) J.1srocey (b) Âmd(mm)

14 3.44 25.00 74 0.094 0.3213 5.06 48.01 74 0.049 0.2512 4.53 52.85 74 0.045 0.20Il 3.71 50.87 74 0.046 0.1710 3.24 50.46 74 0.047 0.159 2.50 41.74 74 0.057 0.148 1.98 37.28 74 0.063 0.137 1.90 33.43 74 0.071 0.136 1.84 31.73 74 0.074 0.145 1.90 29.14 74 0.081 0.154 1.78 25.65 74 0.092 0.163 1.94 22.68 74 0.104 0.202 2.48 25.20 74 0.094 0.231 3.00 34.79 90 0.083 0.25

J.1frame 2.64

6-46

Page 210: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.24 Coefficients Ky based on maximum "(max and ma:<imum Amn

(a) Four-storey frame:

Max "(max (rad) Max Amax (m m) Ky = Max "(max / Max AmaxK Rll

Storey'Y

(a) Low a/v (b) Intenn. a/v (c) Lowa/v (d) Intenn. a/v (e) Low a/v (t) Interm. a/v Max [(e») (t)] (= L/e*l/hJ

4 0.228 0.185 102.30 84.50 0.0022 0.0022 0.0022 0.0027

3 0.196 0.138 87.00 68.50 0.0023 0.0020 0.0023 0.0027

2 0.080 0.097 44.30 51.10 0.0018 0.0019 0.0019 0.0027

1 0.153 0.142 78.80 78.20 0.0019 0.0018 0.0019 0.0022.._-----------_. ._-_._.__..._......_...............-_. .K/",mc (Il) 0.0021 Ky'ranw lU) (J.l)

Ky'",mc (J.1+0) 0.0023 0.0026

0\(b) Eight-storey frame:

~ Max 'Ymax (rad) Max Amax (mm) Ky = Max 'Ymax/Max~ K R1'

Storeyy

(a) Lowa/v (b) Intenn. a/v (c) Lowa/v (d) Intenn. a/v (e) Low a/v (t) Intenn. a/v Max [Ce), (t)] (= L/e*l/hJ

8 0.142 0.239 69.50 102.20 0.0020 0.0023 0.0023 0.0028

7 0.119 0.124 67.30 60.10 0.0018 0.0021 0.0021 0.0028

6 0.088 0.084 55.80 51.40 0.0016 0.0016 0.0016 0.0028

5 0.057 0.046 40.40 36.70 0.0014 0.0013 0.0014 0.0028

4 0.056 0.031 36.90 26.10 0.0015 0.0012 0.0015 0.0028

3 0.045 0.019 33.40 21.00 0.0013 0.0009 0.0013 0.0028

2 0.107 0.037 52.70 25.20 0.0020 0.0015 0.0020 0.0028

1 0.128 0.065 69.20 41.20 0.0018 0.0016 0.0018 0.0022._--------. ----------------K/",mc (tl) 0.0018 K/rarm: RI' Û!)

K/ramc (J.1+cr) 0.0021 0.0027

e

Page 211: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.24 Coot' d

(c) Fourtecn-storey frame:

Max Ymax (rad) Max L\max (mm) Ky = Max ymax / Max L\mu K RI)

Storeyy

(a) Lowa/v (b) Interm. a/v (c) Lowa/v (d) Interm. a/v (e) Low a/v (f) Iotcrm. a/v Max (c), (f)) (= L/e*l/hJ

14 0.007 0.036 23.80 26.90 0.0003 0.0013 0.0013 0.0030

13 0.075 0.134 42.40 53.00 0.0018 0.0025 0.0025 0.003012 0.108 0.151 52.50 58.20 0.0021 0.0026 0.0026 0.0030

11 0.084 0.147 50.30 63.20 0.0017 0.0023 0.0023 0.003010 0.098 0.115 57.20 62.00 0.0017 0.0019 0.0019 0.0030

9 0.077 0.075 49.80 48.00 0.0015 0.0016 0.0016 0.00308 0.060 0.023 43.30 30.30 0.0014 0.0008 0.0014 0.0030

C\7 0.032 0.017 35.00 23.00 0.0009 0.0007 0.0030• -

00 6 0.030 0.013 32.30 21.30 0.0009 0.0006 0.0030-5 0.034 0.015 29.20 21.20 0.0012 0.0007 0.0012 0.00304 0.037 0.016 29.10 19.70 0.0013 0.0008 0.0013 0.0030

3 0.026 0.026 25.00 21.80 0.0010 0.0012 0.0012 0.0030

2 0.027 0.054 22.70 29.50 0.0012 0.0018 0.0018 0.0030

1 0.039 0.066 29.60 39.60 0.0013 0.0017 0.0017 0.0022-- --------- -Ky'ramc (fl) 0.0017 Ky'ramc: RI) (t.1)

K/ramc (t.1+a) 0.0022 0.0029

e

Page 212: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.25 Coefficients Ky based on Q.1+o') Ymax and (f.l+o') Amn

(a) Four-storey frame:

StoreyMax Ymax (rad) Max Amax (mm) Ky = (Il+0') 'Ymax / (J!+0') Amax

(a) Low a/v (b) Interm. a/v (c) Lowa/v (d) Interm. a/v (e) Low a/v (f) Intcrm. a/v Max [(e), (f)]

4 0.167 0.172 79.56 79.91 0.0021 0.0021 0.0021

3 0.149 0.102 70.36 54.41 0.0021 0.0019 0.0021

2 0.075 0.073 41.51 41.46 0.0018 0.0018 0.00181 0.137 0.109 72.45 61.06 0.0019 0.0018 0.0019.__._-------------

K/ramc (f-l) 0.0020

K/nmc (f.l+ la) 0.0022

0\ (b) Eight-storey frame:

~Max Ymax (rad) Max Amn (mm) Ky = (f.l+o') 'Ymax / (f.l+o') Amax

Storey(a) Lowa/v (b) Interm. a/v (c) Lowa/v (d) Intcrm. a/v (e) Lowa/v (f) Interm. a/v Max [Ce), (f)]

8 0.120 0.205 65.06 90.29 0.0018 0.0021 0.00217 0.121 0.092 66.70 51.04 0.0018 0.0016 0.00186 0.086 0.060 53.01 40.54 0.0016 0.0013 0.00165 0.059 0.031 41.30 28.60 0.0014 0.0008 0.00144 0.058 0.024 38.29 23.60 0.0015 0.0008 0.00153 0.046 0.013 32.71 17.57 0.0014 0.0006 0.00142 0.081 0.027 43.19 21.15 0.0019 0.0010 0.00191 0.095 0.049 54.68 33.54 0.0017 0.0012 0.0017.-.-_.__._...._-----------_._---------_.._--_.

K/ranu: (J.l) 0.0017

K/nml: (J!+O') 0.0019

e

Page 213: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.25 Cout' cl

(c) Fourteen-storey frame:

StoreyMax 'Ymax (rad) Max Âmax (mm) Ky = (Il+cr) Ymax / (Il+a) Âmax

(a) Lowa/v (b) Intenn. a/v (c) Lowa/v (d) Interm. a/v (e) Low a/v (f) Interm. a/v Max [Ce), (f)]

14 0.006 0.029 22.70 25.00 0.0003 0.0012 0.0012

13 0.064 0.111 40.71 48.01 0.0016 0.0023 0.0023

12 0.098 0.116 52.85 50.21 0.0019 0.0023 0.0023

Il 0.085 0.104 50.64 50.87 0.0017 0.0020 0.0020

10 0.079 0.092 49.08 50.46 0.0016 0.0018 0.00189 0.058 0.053 41.74 38.10 0.0014 0.0014 0.00148 0.043 0.020 37.28 26.49 0.0011 0.0007 0.0011

C\7 0.031 0.015 33.43 22.32 0.0009 0.00071

1110 6 0.029 0.010 31.73 19.41 0.0009 0.0005

5 0.030 0.011 29.14 18.04 0.0010 0.0006 0.00104 0.028 0.013 25.65 17.76 0.0011 0.0008 0.00113 0.023 0.024 22.68 20.25 0.0010 0.0012 0.00122 0.027 0.042 21.61 25.20 0.0012 0.0016 0.00161 0.039 0.056 28.84 34.79 0.0014 0.0016 0.0016-----_.- ------------

K/nmc (Jl) 0.0016

Ky'nmc: (J.l+a) 0.0020

e

Page 214: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

Table 6.26 Drift indexes associated with desircd pcrfonnances of the links

e

Inter-storey inelastic drift (mm)

Earthquake Four-storey frame Eight-storey frame Fourteen-storey frame

record  inll at fltst yield ~nll at y >0.09 ~11 at first yield ~ntl at y >0.09  intl at first yield ~11 at y >0.09

AL1 1.05 - 1.61 - 0.94

~LPCt 1.00 4.98 1.61 6.12 1.06 5.36

" LPC2 1.24 5.35 1.52 5.41 1.19~

j LPSI 1.19 - 1.03 5.88 1.05 5.25Cl 1.04 5.15 1.12 5.55 1.42 4.83C2 1.14 5.68 1.13 5.70 1.15........... __ .............................................. _---_._---- .............................................. __ .. __ .........................................

AL2 1.55 4.85 1.57 - 1.13

~LPS2 1.56 - 1.44 4.10 1.20 5.43

CIl1 ~ MS1 1.34 5.25 1.31 4.27 1.04U1.... ~

~ MS2 1.29 5.17 1.28 - 0.95 4.20u NHBl 1.07 5.61 1.20 4.83 1.04

~ NHB2 1.15 5.24 1.05 4.88 0.98 4.41~ NGOI 1.17 5.03 1.23 4.93 0.82 4.04

NG02 1.19 5.49 1.74 6.03 0.86 4.51..-..................... _......•........................ _---.-.- .......••.............•••....•. _------------.-.-_._ .••••...... _~ ......._--- ....._-----_. __ ..... ----J.1-o 1.04 5.22 1.11 4.55 0.90 4.24

Drift index (% hJ 0.28 lAI 0.31 1.27 0.24 1.15

Page 215: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

... -_._ ...._._]

1.2 1.3 lA 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8Vmu./Vp

----- l)csim A. --~-oe,liwl-1Ç-- .-.----

-.- Dcsi21l C

(b) Intermediate a/v records

01 1 , , , l , , 1

1.0 1.1

3

..., . - ....- -- _.-.._.._._ .... -

êo 2...en

1.7J.()1.51.3 1.4Vmu./Vp

l.:!1.1

o 1 i i i i i 1

1.0

(a) Low a/v records.. T------------- ._{\ \" "j

3 i ------~--·,.>·--·l

t . ~ -If- D.,:, A--f\.-.----'S - - DCSI""T 1fi) -e-- Dc,iltQ C ,

1

C\1

CJ11\)

Fig. 6.1 Four-storey frame: Comparison of maximum Iink shcar forces for [)csib1JlS A, n and C

(b) Intermediate a/v records

-.-DesignA

---~Dc-siR" ir-Desil!l1C

----

..

~S 2fi)

3 .,. -. __.. - .... - _..

(a) Low a/v records

1 ....~ .-----.•

3+1----

4'------

~ j ~ --Mo- Design Ao 2 - --':>CSI~ n

ci) Dcsil[l\ C

0.250.2(J.I 0.15

Y(rad)o.os

o'i i i 1

o0.250.20.1 0.15

Y(rad)0.05

o 1 i , , 1 1

o

Fig. 6.2 Four-storey frame: Comparison of maximum ine1astic link shcar dcformations for Designs A, Band C

Page 216: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

---- De!lisrnAOcsi.R" B

--- - --'---Dl!SiQtT"C---

(b) Intermediate a/v records-r----- • ------ ~..,

(a) Low a/v records8 ---_-.._--- 8

7 7 -0-

6 li

~ 5-----

~ 5-

o 4 o .... --- Desilrl\A ..fi) 3-

fi)3- Desip;n B

2 -De"iItlIC 2

1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

Vmu./Vp1.2 1.3 lA 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

V m8JI./Vp

o " 'i '" 1

1.0 t.t

o , , , i ' i' 1

1.0 1.1

Cf'U1~

Fig. 6.3 Eight-storey frame: Comparison of maximum link shear forces for Designs A, Band C

._- ...._... _----- --,-------

---- Dcsivll A-- .....---- ···--_·-·--oëSi.R" B

.-~ -e--..-()e!li.".('~-

-- -- ----.__ . ·_----_·_--------~I

R 0.-- ..

7

(b) Intermediate a/v records

o l , , i , 1

2

(,

~ 5o ....

en 3Desi,"' AoC!liwïlr--

~<;~1

o 1 i , , , !

(a) Low a/v records8 -r---- ---- --III

7-0-------

6

~ 5

~ : J____ // / ----2

o 0.05 0.1 0.15

Y(rad)0.2 0.25 () n.fl5 0.1 0.15

Y(rad)0.2 0.25

Fig. 6.4 Eight-storcy frame: Comparison of maximum inclmaic link shear deformations for l)esigns A, Band C

e e

Page 217: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

3.02.5

NBCC

2.01.5

Period (8)

1.00.5

(b) Intumediale a/v records

1.5 r-" ._--.-.-._.-._-.-..-.__.---·--------1

0.5 -r·#-----·-~-·--

0.0 J 1 i i i i 1

0.0

~CI

f

3.U2.52.0

------.- --.-•. --.. 1

1.5

Period (s)

._~--------------------

1.0

NBCC

0.5

1.5 ' ------.------ _--

<a) Low a/v records

0.0Iii 1 i i 1

0.0

0.5 +-- _t~~

~ 1.0

tI

~Cf'V1~

Fig. 6.5 Smooth pscudo-acccleration spectra for: (a) Low a/v records and (b) Intcnnediatc a/v records

Page 218: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

--.- -- .•. - .0- _. '-~J

------------..--- ------

----- N1JCr~~.,_-==__~:~IA·I1

,.

-I-'--~ -_.-

Intermediate a/v records

--.

~S

en

------------t~---.J---._~-.---___f

Low a/v records

1 ..+-- ~ t-------~:.-=---J-----N nc.c.-.1

-600 .....00 -200 o 200 ..ou ClOU -wu -ltX, -200 o 2lXJ -«JO 600

laierai force (kN) Lateral force (kN)

9'U1U1

Fig. 6.6 Four-storey frame: Lateral force distributions (maximum positive and maximum ncgativc force)

Low a/v records Intermediale a/v records

4 T---.-.------------~~.

f :l =- ;;~------~-CI)

-f .111' ------..

..

3 -M- NBCe.-

f 2 -- NBc:r:m...

~-NiTI1Ari)

..00300200JO()o 1 i 1 1 1

o400300200100

o 1 i 1

o

Laierai force (kN) Laierai force (kN)

Fig. 6.7 Four-storey frame: Lateral force distributions (absolute ma.ximum force)

Page 219: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

(a) Low a/v records

e

(b) Inlermediate a/v reœrds

9'U10\

~Sfi) -e- NUC.Ct.n,.

Nl.THA

~Sfi)

~ - ~- .. -_._---------_.., ---- Nncc"",... __l .. ~_. _

-- NL'n'A

~oo -600 -400 -200 o 2UO 400 c.oo 800 -800 .(100 -400 -:!oo o ~o "(JO 600 800

laierai force (kN) Lateral force (kN)

Fig. 6.8 Eight-storey frame: Lateral force distributions (maximum positive and maximum negative force)

Page 220: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

(a) Low a/v records (b) IDlermediale a/v reœrda

8

7

6

5>.

5 .-..CI)

9'3

V1..... 1 2

Î1

--" ~ ~---.

11

1~~---- -1

- -- --------J1

--- -.--. -----~_.Jl "'AI J

---.-.....----NI-\C(~:::--~- 1

-..- _..N-BCC 1In11L. _

-- NLTHA

1 .' ~ ------------------

7 of-- - -- - ---------

Cl

5

~~ ..

3 .-._-_.~---

1

----- NBCf'_<l--- _N8C~L ~

Nl:I1-1A

700600500400300200100oo l, 'j" 1

600500400300200100

o l , , , i 1 1

o

Lateral force (kN) Lateral force (kN)

Fig. 6.9 Eight-storcy frame: Lateral force distributions (absolutc maximum force)

Page 221: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

lotermediate a/v records

8007llOwo500400300200100o

:;:-:;~~-=~~=:=~~~:_-~~ _::-~~=~5 *--~--~ ---- ---- -K-=--RCsPôiisclIPt!clnimTlntc:ml:-iTvT-]

t' .. __~_ _n --.- ~.IlAuL- _

~ -- NLTHA 1,} ----- -'~- --~-------- --1

21---------1---------\------7-- ---------~---l-------.-L~-~---"_------------------------------.

01 , , 1 1 , l , • 1

-100

9'U100

Lateral force (kN)

Fig. 6.10 Eight-storcy frame: Lateral force distribution obtaincd from modal analysis using rcsponsc spcctrum derivcdfor histoncal records ~ntcnncdiatca/v group)

Page 222: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

C\1

U1\0

e

~~

(a) Low a/v records

1 ~------12-1--~~--~~--.

X4"r----~-~__~~\-~~~n- ~1 . 3-'-;;»--- _ NI.l1lA

1 l ,.t--, -----

~9

CI';

(b) Intermc:diate a/v records

-~. _.-- --.- _._---------------'--..

e

-600 -400 ·200 o 200 ..00 600 .(100 -t(H) ·200 o 200 400 600

Lateral force (kN) Lateral force (kN)

Fig. 6.11 Fourtecn-storey frame: Lateral force distributions (maxilnum positive and maximum negative force)

Page 223: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

(a) Low a/v recol'ds (b) Intermediate a/v reoords

500400300

._--- ._-_.._---,--_.,

200

-1'- NBC~

~------- NOCe lm..

NLlllA

~---------------_._--

100

..........-----}--~------_ .._--_._- ..._..-

~~. ---i

2

0·1 i , , i 1

o

1)

Il .\- ----~-~-,·------rr~

10 .-.. '-- ..-------.,,4

12

14

13

~ 8o 7..

(1) 6

5 f- --------~

..3

soo400300

,-----_..--~----_ ... _-

200

-M-- NUee:",.,..~ --=-"-~-···-Niië.(:'~:·----

------- NL11 lA .-----

100

1 • ~-------

+- If--é- --.~.-----

12-1-----·

14

13j~---,

::l-Jt-t 8'

S 7

Cf'

1

(1)6

S 5

4

3

2'

1

0

0

Lateral force (kN) Lateral force (kN)

Fig. 6.12 Fourtccn-storey frame: Lateral force distributions (absolutc maximum force)

Page 224: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e e

14 _....

13 ,-.--. ----------.---. '~--'

12 f----··_---------------~---".....' '---

1

-----

7' .------~

J'

----------- 1

-_._----.~-------~

-------=~.~=_ ....._.....__ .... ._. ._. .... -1

9 -f--------.-~--~-

JI 1------~-~-------

10 ---------------J-

~ 8

Y'

g 7fi}

0\

6

-5

1of

3

2

1

0

Lateral force

Fig. 6.13 Fourtccn-storey frame: Suggestcd lateral force profile

Page 225: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

..••.,

••••..••~....

u

>

6-62

<1

Page 226: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

(a) Four«orey frame

· 1·rrrst y =O.09rad ··~ - ··

" First link yield ·· 1

/ • j·V · 1·

1 3.0

:: 2.5

~ 2.0

.gI! 1.5

= 1.0~'ë 0.5CIIIIca 0.0

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2S

Roof drift index (0.10)

(b) Eight«orey frame

1)3.0u

1~ ·z

> ., - ·-~

i"~ 2.0

oS.-

1-- -! 1.5

~ 1..1.0Il

/ 1Col..c:: 1III 0.5

/CIIIIIl 0.0= 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 20 25

Roof drift index C%)

(c) Fourteen«orey frame

····~ ···

" ·1 1

/ ·1·7 ··

1 3.0

~ 2.5

"~ 20C-; 1.5..= 1.0~';l 0.5CIIIIca 0.0

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.S 20 25

Roof drift index (".10)

Fig. 6.15 Force-deformation relationships

6-63

Page 227: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

1.2, R,H 'l,

e

9'~

/~lJ

"'-------------Note: n corresponds to RJ

......1

o---~-r

Period

Fig. 6.16 Typical qualitative rclationship betwecn RIJ and n (after Fischinger and Fajfar, 1994)

Page 228: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

(a) Four..orey frame.J~-----------.-,-------,

3+-----------~~------4

876

O~---......,.....-----------------I

o

(b) Eight-storey frame8 ~~--~----,,7+----------::.",,-.=---------;

6+------~"'--------------j

5+---------,f-------------it'~ 4 "'-------1-------------1..

r.t'J 3 +-----..........~----------'"""'i

1+-------~"'c---------'"""'i

8763 .J 5J.lworey

04-------.-------.,--~-~--:----I

o

(c) Founeen1tol'ey frame--- 1./ i

-" 1./

~ 1./

1 !11

!~

""""- 1

""'"1

1

141312Il109

t' 8S 7rn 6

54321o

o 2 3 .. 5f.L-tolq'

6 7 8

Fig. 6.17 Distribution ofstorey duetiIity, IlstoR7

6-65

Page 229: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

e

~, , ,

---+1 1 1

--+1 1 1

~I 1 1

v"(a) SDOF Simulation

~

V"

me

h~

F

Ar

(b) Effective stiffeness, Ke

e

C\1 70C\C\

601 1~I:llilic·PI:ll;lic

'Ci' SOi /' Stl'Cl Frame~'--"bD

40~ 1 ~ Concrcle Frame.S

~ 30 1 lU filruClUral Wall0 20

10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Ductility

(c) Equivalent damping vs. ductility

2%

I1

1 / 5%'--"4Jc::ueu AilUco:s

~en.~

ClTd

Period (sec)

(d) Design displacement response spectra

Fig 6.16 Fundamentals of direct displacement-hase design (priesdy, 1998)

Page 230: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chapter 7

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS......iiiiiiii__liiiiiiiiii_iiiiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiilliiilliiiiiiiiliiiiii _

This Chapter summarizes the study undertaken and recapitulates the main findings and

conclusions. Directions for future research are discussed, and the original contnbutions of

the thesis are outlined.

7.1 Summary

lbis thesis bas proposed and devdoped an alternative approach to seismic design of EBFs,

which incorporates non-lînear rime history analysis (NLTHA) direetly into the design

process. Member forces introduced by a chosen earthquake record are monitored

throughout the loading history, and the frame dements are sdected so that they have

adequate resistances for peak forces. This process is carried out itetativdy. The desired

seismie response of EBF can be characterized by the stable elastic response of columns and

braces, and with inelastic action confined primarily to links. The proposed procedure leads

to a design which achieves this behaviour for the earthquake records used.

The first part of this study concentrated on the proposed design method. Basic steps of the

iterative procedure were defined, and the analytica1 tooIs were devdoped ta enable its

practical application. The procedure was implemented by means of three computer

programs, two of which (design and data modification algorithms) were written within the

scope of this projeet. The sensitivity of the procedure to the initial member sdection was

investigated and the methodology to sdeet an appropriate earthquake record, specifie to the

7-1

Page 231: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

site, to use in the analysis was proposed. The feasibility and the efficiency of the procedure

were demonstrated by means of the design of three chevron-type EBFs with four, eight and

fourteen storeys. In aIl cases, the proposed procedure allowed rapid design, and produced

structures with overall seismic response superior to that of EBF designed following current

codified design procedures.

In the second part of the study, the analytical tools developed were used to further

investigate and enhance the understanding of EBFs seismic behaviour. Attention was

directed to the following topies: (i) the magnitudes of axial forces and moments for column

design, (ri) the vertical distribution of design seismic forces, (üi) the seismic force reduction

factors, (iv) the re1ationship between inelastic storey drift and link inelastic rotation angle and

Cv) improvements to the EBF design req1.Ùrements in CAN/CSA 516-1.

7.2 Conclusions

The main findings of the study are summarized below. The extent to which these

conclusions can be considered general is discussed in the dosure of this Chapter.

7.2.1 Development and application of the proposed design procedure

(i) It is possible to integrate successfully NLTHA into seismic design procedures for EBFs.

The proposed desÏgn method is iterative and it is based upon the dynamic response of

the frame members. It does not sttictly adhere to capacity design principles

implemented in current Canadian codified procedures for EBF seismic design, but it

achieves design objectives and yields structures with more desirable seismic response

compared to Code based designs. It cao he used as an altemative design tool, or in

combination with current design practice.

(u) Due to the iterative nature of the proposed design method, automation of the design

process is essential. The analytical taols developed provide means for rapid and efficient

EBF seismic design, thus making the procedure feasihle for practical application.

7-2

Page 232: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARYAND CONCLUS/ONS

(w) For a given geometty and earthquake record, the proposed design procedure is not

sensitive to initial member selection. For widely different structures seleeted to initiate

the design process, oo1y small variations in the final designs were observed.

(tv) Without limiting the validity of the above, the recommended approach to initial

member selection is that the columns, braces and outer beam segments he designed for

sttength and stiffness requirements and links then verified to have adequate inelastic

shear resistance for seismic loading.

(v) To define an earthquake record for use in the analysis, which could be considezed

specifie for the design location, the following procedure is suggested: (a) find

earthquake magnitudes and distances that conttibute most strongly to peak ground

velocity at the design location; (b) select historical records to match these magnitude

and distance ranges; (c) generate artificial records to match smoothed elastic response

spectta derived for the selected historical records.

(Vl) For the chosen design location in western Canada (Vieto~ B.C.), where typical seismic

events are expected to have intennediate to low a/v ratio, the methodology outlined

ahove yielded two different artificial records, one for each a/v ratio group. These cao be

considered representative of the chosen location, and are appropriate for use in the

iterative procedure. The final design should exhibit the desired response to both

records.

(vU) The design objective to stticdy avoid inelastic behaviour in outer beam segments causes

a significant increase of beam section sizes. Acceptance of yielding in these mem.bers

results in greater economy, and cao he justified considering the low magnitude of outer

beam inelastic rotations observed in this study.

(vÜ1) Although, in comparison to the cmrent codificd procedure, the proposed design

method decreased the magnitudes ofpeak shear forces in links by only a small margin, a

more uniform distnbution of link forces over the height of the frame was achieved in

7-3

Page 233: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARYAND CONCLUSIONS

all cases studied. The maximum ine1astic shear rotations were better controlled, and so

was the inter-storey inelastic drift. The most signifiant improvement in the structural

behaviour was observed in the response of braces and columns, which in an cases

studied exhibited significandy smaller distress.

7.2.2 Study of EDF seismic behaviour using developed analytical tools

7.2.2.1 Proposed modifications ofEDF design requirements in CSA/CAN St6-t

(i) For the four- and eight-storey frames, the proposed modifications of current codified

procedures (Design A) and the iterative procedure proposed in this study (Design C)

were both, in general, more successful than the current codified procedure (Design B)

in achieving structures with the desirable atttibutes of seismic response. In an cases

studied, columns and braces of Design C experienced the smallest distress. Both Design

A and Design C reduced the magnitudes of link shear forces, but by a small margin.

More significant improvement was achieved in the distnbution of link shear forces over

the height of the frame.

CU) For the fourteen-storey frame however, the proposed modifications of the current

codified procedure did not yield a feasible design. This is prim arily related ta the

modified procedure ta calculate y which imposes very severe conditions for design.

While for the lower and medium height frames, satisfying the y limit is not difficult and

MaY improve the overall behaviour of the frame, for taller frames, the y limit is very

difficult ta meet, and results in signifiant mass inaease without any significant

improvement in seismic behaviour. For this frame height, Designs B and C were very

similar and exhibited satisfaetory seismic response.

7.2.2.2 Distribution of the lateral force

Ci) Compared ta the starie lateraI force profile (NBCCtmeaJ, the force profile obtained from

a modal analysis for the NBeC design spectrum (NBCC~matched more closely that

obtained from the NLTHA and is preferred ta use for design.

7-4

Page 234: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

(11) When a concenttated force applied at the top of the structure is calculated using the

fundamental structural period detennined analytically instead of the empirical Code

formula, the resulting NBC~ force profile better reflects the observed structural

respoose. This modification does not affect the magnitude of the total base shear or the

overall distribution of the remainjog force.

(w) The modification discussed above improves the force profile at the upper storeys of the

frame without producing any significant increase of the force magnitudes in the bottom

storeys. In the bottom storeys, dynamic analysis indicates that a uniform force profile

would be more appropriate than a Iinearly varying one.

7.2.2.3 Axial forces and moments for ductility design ofcolumns

(i) Simple summarion was identified as an appropriate combinarion rule to determine axial

forces in columns introduced by yidding and straÎn-hardened links in storeys above.

(ri) The following amplification factors are suggested for application to the link resistance,

Vf' when detenninjng column axial forces introduced by the links: (a) 1.65 in the top two

storeys columns, and (b) 1.3 for ail other storeys.

(m) The contnbution of bending moment to axial force-moment interaction is greater in the

top column tier than in the lower columns. Bending moments as high as 40 percent of

the section plastic moment could be expected in the top rier. While reserving 15 percent

of column resistance for bending is justifiable for the columns in other storeys, a larger

percenrage of column resistance should he allocated for bending for top rier column.

7.2.2.4 Seismic force reduction factors

(i) Within the range of structural periods considered (1 to 3 s), the overstrength factor Rs is

not significandy dependent on the structural period. VaIues of Rs determined from

NLTHA are comparable ta those assigned in NBC (l/U).

7-5

Page 235: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARYAND CONCLUS/ONS

(li) The ductility factor ~ showed dependence on sttuetural perio~ with magnitudes

increasing as the period decreased VaIue speci.fied in NBC (R=4) was exceeded for the

four-storey frame.

(w) The assumption made in NBC that the ductility factor~ and duetility displacement ratio

f.L are identical in magnitude is justifiable for taller EBFs (fourteen-storey), but not for

Iower frames for which J.l may ~xceed ~ by a large margin (45 percent iocrease was

observed for the four-storey frame).

7.2..2..5 Relationship between inelastic inter-storey drift and inelastic Iink rotation

(i) For aIl the frame heights studied, very sttong positive correlation was observed between

the ioe1astic inter-storey drift, Ô, and the inelastic link rotation, y. From NLTHA, it was

established that y = K,framc A, where y is in ra~ A in mm and Krfamc is a period­

independent parameter in the range of the fundamental periods considered, and for the

Chevron-type EBF can he taken as 0.002. The relationship between y and ~

approximated by rigid-plastic mechanism, corresponds fairly well to results from

NLTHA

(n) The following ioter-storey drift indexes associated with the desired performances of the

links were established from NLTHA as: (a) 0.25 to 0.3% for elastic response of the links

and (b) 1.2% for the ine1astic link rotations within ~~erimentallydetermined bounds to

ensure stable hysteretic behaviour (O.09rad). In the range of the Stnlctural periods

studied, these indexes are virtually independent of periode These estimates of inter-storey

drifts could be used to detennine design displacements in the context of direct

displacement-based design.

7.3 Concluding comments and recommendations for future work

The application of the proposed design method presented in this study was demonstrated

with the example of symmettic chevron-type of eccenttic bracing with shear links, located in

7-6

Page 236: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARYAND CONCLUS/ONS

a severe seismic zone, with fundamental periods predominandy in the ve1ocity-sensitive

region of spectrum ranging from 1 to 3 seconds. A study of seismic response using the

developed analytica1 tools was also ca.rried out for these structures. Although the principles

of the proposed method remain unchanged, the application of the procedure should be

verified for structures with different dynamic charaeteristics located in different seismic

zones. Similar studies are needed before more genera1 conclusions regarding structural

response can be drawn since those presented in the previous section are related to EBFs

with similar type of configuration, dynamic characteristics and identical seismic location.

The method could be adapted, with appropriate modeling, to other structural systems, for

example, concenttically braced frames. For wider genera1 use, the deve10ped software would

have to be made more user-friencily, by, for example implementation in a Windows

environment.

The methodology ta define and validate acceleration records specific ta the sites used in this

study requires a great deal of work and MaY impede the use of the procedure for practica1

design applications. It would he therefore necessary to apply the same method for other

Canadian locations and provide desÎgners with ready-made sets of artificial accelerograms

appropnate for use in the iterative procedure. The use of inelastic spectra as target response

spectta for accelerogram generation should aIso he investigated.

The proposed design method partly relies on a force-based approach, although ta a lesser

extent than the current Canadian desÎgn procedure. The present study bas confinned

inherent difficu1ties of the force-based approach ta seismic desÏgn regarding the use of

adequate reduction factors to evaluate design hase shear, choice of lateraI force profiles, and

estimation of inelastic displacements and deformation. While the proposed method yielded

structures with generally improved seismic response compared to that of cun:ent Code

designs, magnitudes of peak link defonnations and shear forces still remain in excess of the

design limits. Further studies could he undertaken to investigate the feasihility of the direct

displacement-hased design approach for EBFs. The drift indexes found in this study,

7-7

Page 237: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

7. SUMMARYAND CONCLUS/ONS

associated with desired performances of the links could be then used to define design

displacement profiles.

7.4 Original contributions

The original contributionc; in this thesis include:

(i) The formulation of an alternative design method for seismic design of EBFs which

incorporates non-linear rime history analysis directiy into the design process;

(u) Two computer programs (design and data modification moduh) developed for

implementation and automation of the proposed design. procedure;

(w) Evaluation of the proposed procedure in achieviog the design objectives in comparison

with the current Canadian codified procedure for seismic design of EBFs;

(IV) Extensive analytical studies conducted using the tools developed to understand better

seismic behaviour of Chevron-type EBFs in zones with high seismic risk;

(v) Recommendations, based on the results of the analyrical srudies, to improve current

Canadian design procedures for EBFs.

7-8

Page 238: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

REFERENCES.-----_......_-~---------

Adams, J., Weichert., D. Halchu.k, S. and Basham, P. 1996. Trial seismic maps of Caoada­

1995: final values for selected Canad;an cities. Open file 3283, Geological Survey ofCana~

Ottawa, Ont.

AISC. 1992. Seismic provisions for structural steel buildings. Amerian Institute of Steel

Construction, Chicago, Ill.

Atkinson, G.M. and Beresnev, I.A. 1998. CompaQble gmund-motion rime-histories for new

national seismic hazard maps. Cano J. Civ. Eng. ,25 (2): 305-318.

Applied Technology Counci1 (ATC). 1995. Structural response modification factors. Report

No. ATC-19, Redwood City, Calif:

Basham, P.W., Weichert, D.H., Anglin, F.M. and Berry, M.]. 1985. New probabilistic sttong

seismic gtound motion maps of Canada. Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America,

75(2): 563-595.

Basham, P.W., Weichert, D.H., Anglin, F.M. and Berry, M.]. 1982. New probabilistic sttong

seismic gtound motion maps of Canada: a compilation of eartbQuake source zones. methods

and results. NRCC No. 23178. Ottawa, Ont.

Chien, E. 1987. Multi-storey steel building design aid. Canadian Institute of Steel

Construction, Willowdale, Ont.

8-1

Page 239: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Chopra, A. K.; Lopez, O. A. 1979. EvaluatiQn of simulated gtQund motions for predirting

elastic res.pQnse of long periQd strUctures and inelastic res.pQose of structures. Earthquake

Engineering & Structural Dynamics . 7 (4): 383-402

ChristoPQulos, C. 1998. A study on the cbaraeteristics Qf vertical accerIer2tiQns and theîr

effects Qn civil engineering structures. ÉCQle Polytechnique de Montréal, Montréal, Que.,

Report No. EPM/CGS-1998-0S.

Cleveland, W.S. 1979. Loca1ly wejghted r~ession and smoothing scattet;plots., J. Am. Stat.

Assn. Vol 74, No. 368, Theory and Method SectiQn, 829-836

CQmell, C.A. 1968. Engineering Seismic Risk Analysis. Bulletin of SeismQIQgical Society of

America, 58: 1583-1606.

CSA. 1994. CAN/CSA 516.1-94. Limit states design of steel stmetures. Canadian Standards

Association, Rexdale. Ontario.

Engelhardt, M. D. and Popov, E. P. 1992. Experimental perfonnance of IQng links in

eccentrically braced frames. J. Str. Eng., ASCE, 118(11): 3067-3088.

Engelhardt, M. D. and Popov, E. P. 1989. Behavior Qf long links in eccentrically braced

frames. Report No. UCB/EERC-89/01, University ofCalïfQmïa, Berkeley, Calif.

Fishinger, M. and Fajfar, P. 1994. Seismic force reduction factors. Earthquake Engineering.

A. Rutenberg, ed., A..A. Balkema, Rotterdam, The Netherlands, 279-296

Gasparini, D. A. and Vanmarcke, E. 1976. SIMQKE: A program fQr artificial motion

generation. User's manual and documentation. M.I.T. Dept. of Civil Engineering,

Cambridge, Ma, 32 pages.

8-2

Page 240: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Han, X. 1998. Design and behaviour of eccentrically braced frames in moderate seismic

~. M. Eng. Thesis. McGill University, Dept. of Civ. Eng. and App. Mech, Montt~

Que. 113 pages

Han, x., Redwood, G.R. and Kasai K. 1997. Design of chevron tlPe eccentrically braced

~. Structural engineering series no. 97-14. McGill University, Dept. of Civ. Eng. and

App. Mech, Montreal, Que.

CISC. Handbook of Steel Construction. 1997. Canadian Institute of Steel Construction.

Willowda1e, Ont.

Hames, KA, Mitchell, D., Redwood, R.G., and Cook, W.D. 1997. Seismic design of coupled

walls - a case for mixed construction. Cano J. Civ. Eng. 24(3): 448-459.

Heidebrecht, A. C.; Naumos~ N. 1988. Evaluation of site-specific seismic design

requirements for three Canadian cities. Can. J. Civ. Eng. 15 (3): 409-423.

Hjelmstad, K.D. and Popov, E.P. 1983. Seismic behavior of active beam links in

eccenttically braced frames. UCB/EERC-83/15, University of Califomia, Berkeley, Calif.

Humar, J.L. and Rahgozar, M.A. 1996. Application of inelastic response spectta derived

(rom seismic huard spectral ordinates for Canada. Cano J. Civ. Eng., 23: 1051-1063.

Kasaï, K. and Han, X. 1997. New EBF design method and application: tedesign and analysis

of US-Iapan EBF. Behaviour of Steel Structures in Seismic Aleas: SlESSA '97, EdizionÏ,

Salemo, ltaly, pp 242-249.

Kasai K. and Popov, E.P. 1986a. Cyclic web buckling control for shear link beams. J. Stuct.

Eng. ASCE, 112(3): 505-523.

8-3

Page 241: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Kasai K. and Popov, E.P. 1986b. A study of seismically resistant eccenttically braced frames.

Report No. UCB/EERC-86/01, University ofCalifo~ Berkeley, Calif:

Kasaï, K. and Go~ A. 1993. Link Imp design and EBF seismic performance. Sttuctuel1

Engineering in Natural Hazards Mitigation: Proceedings '93 Structural Congres. ASCE, New

York, (1): 397:402.

Koboevic, S. and Redwood, R.G. 1997. Design and seismic response of sbear critical

eccenttically braced frames. Cano J. Uv. Eng. 24: 761-771.

Malley, J.O. and Popov, E. 1984. Sbear links in eceentrically braced frames. J. Struet. Eng.,

ASCE, 110(9): 2275-95.

Mondkar, D.P. and Powell, G.H. 1975. ANSR-I General pwpose computer progrnm for

analysis of non-linear structural response. Report No. UCB/EERC-75/37. University of

Califomia, Berkeley

McGuire, R. K. 1976. EQRISK evaluation of earthquake risk to site: Fortran computer

progmn for seismic risk analysis. USGS Open-file Report 76-67, U.S. Geological Survey, 91

pages.

NBCC. 1995. National Building Code of Canada, 1995. Associate Comminee on the

National Building Code, National Research Council ofCanada, Ottawa.

Newmark, N. M.; Hall, W. J. 1982. Earthquake spectra and design. Report No. UCB/EERC­

78/07. University of Califomia, Berkeley, Calif.

Earthquake Engineering Research Inst., Berkeley, Califomia, [1982], 103 pages

NGDS. 1996. The Earthq.uake Sttong Motion Database. CD-ROM collection. U.S. National

Geophysical Data Center, Boulder, Colorado.

8-4

Page 242: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

NGDS. 1996. Sttong-motion data catalog. SMCAT. ManuaI and 3 tloppy disks. V.S.

National Geophysical Data Center, Boulder, Colorado

Popov, E.P., Rides, J.M. and Kasaï, K. 1992. Methodology for optimum EBF link design.

Report No. UCBjEERC-92j13. University ofCalifomia, Berkeley, Calif:

Popov, E. P., Engelhardt, M. D. and Rides, J.M. 1989. Eccenttically braced frames: V.S.

practice. AISC EngineeringJoumal, 26(2): 66-80.

Popov, E. P. and Engelhardt, M. D. 1988. Seismic eccentrically braced frames. Journal of

ConstIUctional Steel Research, 10: 321-354.

Prakash, V.; Powell, G. H.; Filippou, F. C. 1992. Drain-2DX: base program user ~de.

Report No. UCB/SEMM-1992/29, University ofCalifomia, Berkeley, Calif.

Priesdey, M. J. N. 1998. Displacement-based approaches to rational limit states design of

new structures. Proceedings of the Eleventh European Conference on Earthquake

Engineering (computer file), A. A. Balkema, Rotterdam.

Priesdey, M. J. N. 1993. Myths and fallacies in earthquake engineering - conflicts between

design and reality. Bulletin of the New Zealand National Society for Earthquake

Engineering, 26(3): 329-341.

Ramadan, T. and Ghobarah, A. 1991. Seismic analysis pf links of various len~s ln

eccentricalIy braced frames. Cano J. Civ. Eng., 18:140-148.

Redwood, R.G. 1999. Draft proposal for revisions to the Canadian standard for steel

structures. CAN/ CSA-S16.1. Private communication.

Redwood, R.G. and Channagïri, V.S. 1992. Earthquake resistant design of concentrically

braced frames. Cano J. Civ. Eng. 19(6): 1062-1077.

8-5

Page 243: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Redwoo~ R.G. 1993. Earthquake resistant design of structures - notes on design of steel

structures. Dept. Civ.Eng. App. Mech., McGill University.

Rides, J.M. and Popov, E.P. 1994. Inelastic link element for EBF seismic analysis.. J. Str.

Eng. ASCE, Vol 120, No. 2, Feb., pp. 441-463.

Rides, J.M. and Bolin, S. 1991. Seismic perfonrance of eccentticaIly braced steel frames.

Report No. SSRP-91/09, Str. Sys. Res. Project, Dept. of AMES. University of Califo~

San Diego, Calif.

Rides, J.M. and Bolin, S. 1990. Energy dissipation in eccenttically braced frames. Proc., 4th

U.S. Nat. Conf. on Earthq. Eng., PaIm Springs, Califomia. Vol 2, May., pp. 309-318.

Rides, J.M. and Popov, E.P. 1987a. Experiments on eccenttically braced &ames with

composite floors. Report No. UCB/EERC-87/06. University ofCalifomia, Berkeley, Calif.

Rides, J.M. and Popov, E.P. 1987b. Dynamic analysis of seismica1ly resistant eccenttically

braced frames. Report No. UCB/EERC-87/07. University of Califomia, Berkeley, Calif.

Roeder, C. W., Foutch, D. A.and Goe~ S. C. 1987.Seismic testing of full-scale steel

building - Part II. J.Str. Eng. ASCE. 113(1): 2130-2145.

Roeder, C. W. and Popov, E. P. 1977. Inelastic behavior of eccentrically braced steel frames

under çyclic loadings. Report No:UCB/EERC-77/18, University ofCalifomia, Berkeley,

Calif.

SAP2000. 1997. Structural analysis program. Computers and structures, Inc., Berkeley, Calif.

SEAOC Vision 2000 Comitee. 1995. Performance-based seismic engineering. Structural

Engineers Association of California, Sacramento, Cal.

8-6

Page 244: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Schiff, S. D. 1988. Seismic drsgn studies oflow-rise steel &ames. Ph.D. thesis. Dept. of

CivilEngine~ UnivetSÏty ofDIinois atUrbana-Cham~DL 220 pg

Tayebi, Al<. 1994. An evaluation Qf s.pecttwn-compattble accelerogmrn$ for non-linear

anaJysis of short-period structures located in Eastem Canada. M. Eng. Thesis, MeGill

University, Montreal 144 p.

Tremblay, R. 1994. EQDES: A computer progmn for the assesment of seismic risk. École

Polytechnique de Monttéal, Montréal, Que., Report NQ. EPM/CGS-1994-14.

Tso, W. K., Zhu, T. J. and Heidebrecht, A. C. 1992. Eggineering implication of gmund

motion AN ratio. Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering, 11(3): 133-144.

Uang, C. M. 1991. Establishing R (or Rw) and Cd factQrs fQr building seismic provisions.

Joumal ofStrUctural Engineering, 117(1):19-28.

Waterloo Engineering Software. 1991. SODA. Struetuml o.ptimization. desjgg. and analysis.

users manual release 3.2. WaterlQo Engineering Software, WaterlQo, Ont.

Whittaker, A. S., Uang,C.M. and Bertero, V.V. 1987. Earthqnj!ke smulation tests and

associated studies of a O.3-scale mode! of a six-storQ' eccentrically braced steel structure.

Report NQ. UCB/EERC-87/02, UniveISity ofCalifomia, Berkeley, Calif.

Whittaker, A. S., Hart, G., and Rojahn, C. 1999. Seîsmic response modification factors. J. Stt.

Eng. ASCE, 125 (4): 438-444.

Wong, A. 1997. 350W Wide FJagge Sections at no cost pmpium: How to· capiralize the

henefits•Advantage Steel, No 7: 11-16, CISC, Willowdale, Ont.

Yang. M. S. 1982. Seismic behaviour of an eccentricaUy X-braced steel structure.

UCB/EERC-82/14, Univemty ofCalifomia, Berkeley, Calif.

8-7

Page 245: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

APPENDIXA

CANADIAN DESIGN REQUIREMENTSFOR SEISMIC DESIGN OF EBFs

Page 246: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Table 4.1.9.1.8.Force Modification Flclorsll)

Fonning Part of Sentence 4.1.9.1.(8)

4.1.9.1.

Case Type of Lateral-Force-Resisting System RSteel Structures Cesigned and Detailed According to CAN/CSA-S16.1-M

1 ductile moment-resisting frame 4.02 ductile eccentrically braced frame 4.03 ductile steel plate shear wall 4.04 ductile braced frame 3.0·5 moment-resisting frame with nominat ductility 3.06 nominalJy ductile steel plate shear wall 3.07 braced frame with nominal duetirlty 2.08 ordinary steel plate shear wall 2.09 other lateral-force-resisting systems not defined in cases 1to 8 1.5

Reinforced Concrete Structures Designed and Detailed According ta CSA A23.310 ductile moment-resisting frame 4.011 ductile coupled wall 4.012 other ductile wall systems 3.513 moment-resisting frame with nominal duetility 2.014 wall with nominal ductility 2.015 other lateraJ-force-resisting systems not defined in Cases lOto 14 1.5

limber Structures Oesigned and Detailed According to CSA 086.116 nailed shear panel with plywood, waferboard or osa 3.017 concentrically braced heavy timber frame with ductile connections 2.018 moment-resisting wood frame with ductUe connections 2.019 other systems not included in Cases 16 ta 18 1.5

Masonry Structures Designed and Detailed According to CSA 8304.120 reinforced masonry wall with nominal ductility 2.021 reinforced masonry 1.522 unreinforced masonry 1.023 O1her Lateral-force-resistina SYStems not Defined in Cases 1to 22 1.0

Notes to Table 4.1.9.1.8.:(1) See Appendix A.

Table 4.1.9.1.C.Foundation Factors(1)

Forming Part of Sentence 4.1.9.1.(11)

Categories Type and Depth of Rock and Soil Measured from the Foundation or Pile Cap Levet F

1 Rock, dense and very dense coars&grained soUs, very stiff and hard fine-grained soilS; compact 1.0coarse-grained soifs and firm and stiff fine-grained soils from 0 to 15 mdeep

2 Compact coarse-grained soifs, finn and stiff fine-grained soifs with a depth greater than 15 m; very 1.310058 and 10058 coarse-grained soils and very soft and soft fine-grained soils from 0 to 15 mdeep

3 Very loose and loose coarse-grained soifs with depth greater than 15·m 1.5

4 Very soft and soft fine-grained soifs wi1h depth greater than .15 m 2.0

Notel to Tlble 4.1.9.1.C.:(1) see AppencfIX A.

9-1 f.

Page 247: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Umit Staw D6ign ofStH/ StruàUm

27.5.4The beam attached to chevron or V·braces shall be contfnuous between columns and fu top andbottom flanges shall be designed ta resist a f~teral load of 1.596 of the ffange yield force at thepoint of intersection with the braces.

27.5.5Whe" a beam is supported from below by chevron braces, it shall be a Class 1 section and shaJlhave adequate nominal mistance to support its tributary gravity loads without the supportprovided by the braces. The beam connections at the columns shall resist forces corresponding taplastic bending at the brace intersection point.

Braces in chevron braced frames in velocity related seismic zones 4 and higher shall confarm tothe requirements of Clause 27.4.3.1.

27.6 Ductile Eccentrically Braced FramesMembers in the braced bays of eccentrically braced frames shall be designed in accordance withthe following requirements.

27.6.1 Uak Beam

27.6.1.1The Iink beam in an eccentrically braced frame is a beam containing a segment (link) that isdesigned ta yield, either in flexure or in shear, prior to yield of other parts of the structure. A linkshall be provided at least at one end of each brace. The section used for a link beam shaU be Crass 1,and its yield strength, Fy, shall not exceed 3S0 MPa.

27.6.1.2Axial forces in fink beams due to forces from the braces and due ta transfer of seismic force ta theend of the frames shall be considered in the design.

27.6.2 Uak ResistanceThe shear resistance of the link shalf be taken as the lesser of V; and 2M; lewhere

V{ =Vr ", - (:A~,J and

M; =1.18.• Mp(, - A~) S • Mp

Vr is given in Clause 13.4.1.2Pf is the factored axial tensile or compres.sive force in the fink, ande is the length of the link.

When :~ S 0.15, the effect of Pf on the fink resistance may be negleeted.

27.6.3 LeDgth of LiDkWhen Pt IAFy > 0.1 S, the len9th of Iink shall not exceed:

for~ <! 0.3 ~, [1.1 S- 0.5 ~ ~t~~r)At" Vf 1.6Mr

for A < 0.3 Pt' v;-

9-2

\

Page 248: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

CAN/CSA·S16.1-94

27.6.4 lJDk RotationThe rotation of the IInk segment relative ta the rest of the beam, ·at a total frame drift of O.SR timesthe drift determined for faetored loading, shan not exceed the following:(a) 0.09 radians for links having a cfear length of 1.6MrNr or less;(b) 0.03 radians for links having a clear length of 2.6MrNr or greater; and(c) a value obtained by IInear interpolation between the above limits for links having clear lengthsbetween the above Iimits.Note: Ris ddintd in aaus~ .,. 7.9 of th~National Buildrng Code ofCanada, 1995.

27.6.5 LiDk StiffeDers

27.6.5.1Full-depth web stiffeners shall be provided on bath sides of the be~m web at the brace end of theIink. The roffeners shan have a combined wfdth of not less than b - 2w and a thfckness of not lessthan O.75w or 10 mm.

27.6.5.2Intermediate Iink web rolfeners shaU be full depth and shall be provided as foflows:

(a) when e < l·~rMr stfffeners shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding (30w - O.2d) when the link

rotation angle is 0.09 radians, or (52w - 0.2d) when the rotation is 0.03 radians, or less. Unearinterpolation shall be used for values between 0.09 and 0.03.

(b) When 2.~~r < e < 5';:r ~tiffenersshall be placed at a distance of 1.Sb trom each end of the Iink.

(c) When 1.~~r < e < 2.~~r roffeners shall be provided as in (a) and (b).

(d) When e> Sv~r noInt~rmediate stiffeners are required.

27.6.5.3Full.depth intermediate web stiffeners are required on only one side of the web for link beams lessthan 650 mm in depth and on bath sides of the web for beams 650 mm or greater in depth. Thethickness of one.side stiffeners shall not be leu than w or 10 mm whichever fs larger, and thewidth shall not be less than O.Sb - w.

27.6.5.4Fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the beam web shall develop a stiffener force of AsFy. FiUetwelds connecting the stiffener ta the flanges shall develop a stiffener force of 0.25AsFy•

27.6.6 Lateral Support for LlDkLateral support shall be provided ta both top and bottom flanges at the ends of a link. Theselateral supports shall have a resistance at lean equal ta O.06btFy.

27.6.7 LiDk Beam-to-CoIIIIDD Coanec:tioa

27.6.7.1Unks conneaed ta columns shall not exceed a length of 1.6MrNr, unless it can be demonstratedthat the link·to·column connection Is adequate to undergo the required inelastic link rotation.

1·96 9-3

\

Page 249: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

Umlt States Oaign ofStftl St11letuta

27.6.7.2Where a link is adjacent to the column, the following requirements shall be met:Ca> The beam flanges shall have complete joint penetration groove welds ta the column.

(b) The web connedion shaU be welded to develop the nominal axial, f1exuraJ and shear resistancesof the beam web.

Cc) The capacity of the co'umn ta resist the flange yield load shall be deterrnined from Clause21.2.4.3.

27.6.7.3Where the·link is connected to the column web, the beam tlanges shalf have complete Joint .penetration groove welds to the conneetion plates and the web conneetion shall be welded tadeve'op the factored axial, f1exural and shear resistance of the beam web. The rotation betweenthe IInk beam and the column shall not exceed 0.015 radians at O.SR times the drift due tafaetored loading.

27.6.7.4Unk beam connections to columns may be designed ta resist transve~e shear only if the link is notadjacent ta the column. Such connections must have capacity ta resist a torsional moment of0.015 btdlY.

27.6.8 Braœ-to-lJak Beam. CoDDectioDSBrace-ta-Iink beam connections shan develop the nominal resistance of the brace and transfer thisforce ta the beam web. If the brace Is designed to resist a portion of the link end momen~ fullend restraint shan be provided. No part of the brace-to-beam connection shall extend into theweb area of a Iink beam. The intersection of the brace and beam centre-Iines shall be at or withinthe link. The beam shall not be spJiced within or adjacent to the conneetian between beam andbrace.

27.6.9 LiDk Beam. Resistance

27.6.9.1The beam outside the Iink shall have nominal axial, bending, and shear resistance which equals orexceeds the forces corresponding to 1.5 times the controlfing resistance of the Hnk.

27.6.9.2The.beam outside of the link shall be provided with sufficient lateral support_to maintain stabilityof the beam under farces corresponding to 1.5 times the cantrolling resistance of the link. Lateralbracing shall be provided ta both top and bottom f1anges and shan have a resistance at least equalta 0.015 btF}t.

27.6.10 Diago~BracesEach diagonal brace shall have a nominal resistance to support axial force and momentcorresponding ta 1.5 times the controlling resistance of the link beam (Clause 21.6.2). Sectionsshall be Class 1 or 2.

27.6.11 ColaDIDSMoments and axial laads introduced into a column at the cannection with a Iink or brace shall notbe less than those generated by 1.25 tfmes the controlling resistance of the linle.

1-97

9-4

\

Page 250: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

CANICSA-Sf 6. f -94

27.6.12 RoofLiDk Be8mAIink beam is not required in roof beams of frames over flve storeys ln height.

27.6.13 Coaceatric Drace iD CombfaatioaThe tint storey of 1 frame over five storeys ln height may be concentrically braced if this $lorey canbe shown to have a resistance of at leut 1.5 times the loading associated with yielding of anyother storey of the structure. .

27.7 Special ~rudDgSystems

2-7.7.1 Steel Plate Sheu WallsSteel plate shear walls shall meet the requirements of Appendix M.

27.7.2 Other FnmdDg SystemsOther framing systems and frames that incorporate special bracing, base isolation, or otherenergy.absorbing devices shall be designed on the basis of published research mults, observedperformance in past earthquakes, or special investigation.

28. Fabrication

28.1 GeneralUnless otherwise specified, the provisions of Cause 28 shall apply ta bath shop and field fabrication.

28.2 Straigbmess ofMaterialPrior to layout or fabrication, rolled material shall be straight within established rolling mill .toleranclS. If straightening is necessary, ft shall be done by means that will not injure the material.When heat is applied locally, the temperature of the heated area shall not !Xceed the limits givenin CSA Standard W59. Sharp kinks and bends stiall be cause for rejection.

28.3 Gas CuttingGas cutting shall be done by machine where praeticable. Gas-cut edges shall confonn ta CSAStandard W59. Re.entrant corners shall be free trom notches and shall have the largest praeticalradii, with a minimum radius of 14 mm.

28.4 Shearecl or Gas-Cut Edge FiDish

28.4.1Planing or finishing of sheared or gas-cut edges of plates or shapes shall not be required, unlessspecificaUy noted on the drawings or included in a stipulated edge preparation for weJding.

28.4.2The use of sheared edges in the tension area shall be avoided in locations subjeet to plastic hingerotation at factored loading. If used, such edges shall be finished smooth by grinding, chipping, orplaning. These requirements shall be noted on design drawings and shop details where applicable.

28.4.3Burrs shall be removed<a> as required in Clause 23.3.3;(b) when required for proper fit-up for welding; and(c) when they create a huard during or after construction.

1-989-5

\

Deœtrrber f994

Page 251: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

APPENDIXB

FLOW CHARTS, FORMATS OFINPUT AND OUTPUT FILES

Page 252: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/0. APPENDIXB

READ FILEN.TlME.T:NCAS.NELTOT.BMS.SME.BMDES,BRB.BRE,BRDES,CLB,CLE.CLDES FROM TItIEH

DESIGN MODULE

PROGRAM RES~EXE

FLOWCHART

STEP = TIMEIT+1NR=NELTOT

SUBROTINES:

CD INPUT~ PROP@ RATIO@ SELECT@ STASEL

INITIAlIZE R (NR.5)

SUBROUTINE INPUTPREPARES DATAFUSING INFORMATIONPROVIDED IN DATA.USR

NO

YES

YES

REAC FROM DATAF:NE.FLR.W8R.TR,C'f,CRX,CR'f,MP,ONEMU.CEX,F'f,ZA,SEC.SECIND

f-----t J > STEP?

FUNeTIONS:

CD U1 1lœOMEGA2(3) MRR@ CLASS@ IDDTB

INPUT FILES:

<D TIMEH@ DATA.USR@ STAT@ DATAF (internai input file)

DETERMINE DATABASEOUTPUT FILES: USING FUNCTION IDDTB

<D DATA.USR (updated after each iteratiQ~__....... ..,<Z) HIST READ FROM FILE FILEN:@ RATIO NODEI.NODEJ,MOMI.MOMJ.

AX

LL=BME-BMB+1 _

YES

ML=1

ML=ML+1

REAC L1NES FROMDATAF AND FILENFILES

10-1

Page 253: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

USE FUNCTION MRR TO EVALUATE MRMOMAX =MAX(ABS(MOMI).ABS(MOMJ))

USE SUBROUTINE RAnoTO CHECK CL 13.8 & 13.9(CAlCULATE RA.RB.RC)

RCRIT = MAX (RA.RB,RC)

/0. APPENDIXB

NO

YES

USE SUBROUTINE SELECT TOLIST THE POSSIBLE SECTIONSWlTH 0.85 < RMAX < 1.0

CHOSE SECTION AND READPROPERTIES FROM APPROPRIATEDATABASE FllE. UPOATE RCRITZA =ZXIAREA

USE SUBROUTINE PROPTO CAlCULATE DATANEEDED FOR FilE DATAF

UPDATE FILE DATAF FOR ELEMENT KAND FOR ALL FOLlOWING ELEMENTSTHAT ARE CONSTRAINED TO HAVE THESAME SECTIONNOTE; OATAF 15 OPENEO AS DIRECT ACCESS FILE

REWIND DATAFTO THE LOCATION

NO

YESR (K.1) = RCRITR (K.2) = J·O.04 - 0.04R (K.3) =MOMIR (K.4) =MOMJR (K,5) =AX

10-2

Page 254: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/0. APPENDIXB

WRITE TO FILE RAnOTlME. RMAX,MOMI.MOMJ,AX

COPY FILE DATA.USR (OLO) TOTEMP.USR

FIND RMAX FOR THE ELEMENTSN1 • N2, AND APPROPRIATE FORCES

NO

USE SUBROUTINE STASELTO SELECT NEW SECTIONS

CHOOSE SeCTIONFIND seCTION IN THEDATABASE

USE SUBROUTINE PROP TO CALCULATE PROPERTIES FOR NEW SECTIONUPDATE FILE DATAFFOR ELEMENTS N1-N2

UPDATE FILE DATA.USR BASED ON DATAF

10-3

Page 255: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

U1X (MOMI,MOMJ,CaAX)

KAPA =MOMIIMOMJ

OMEGA1=0.6 - O.4-KAPA

FUNCfIONS

KAPA =MOMJ/MOMI

/0. APPENDIXB

U1X =OMEGA11 (1-ABS(AX)/CEX)

OMEGA2 (MOMI.MOMJ)

KAPA =MOMI/MOMJ

OMEGA2 =1.75+1.0S·KAPA+O.3·KAPA~

KAPA =MOMJ/MOMI

10-4

Page 256: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

K~R (MP,MOMI,MOMJ,ONEMU)

RMU == OMEGA2 (MOMI,MOMJ)·ONEMURL1 ==O.6rMP

MRR == 1.1S*MP*(1-o.281RMU)

IDDTB (NUM,BIIB,BME.BRB,BRE,CLB,CLE,BIIDES,BRDES,CLDESt

RMU == OMEGA2 (MOMI,MOMJ)·ONEMURL1 == O.67*MP

~---a.I IDDTB == BMDES

~-....... IDDTa =BRDES

~---a.I IDOTB =CLDES

"CHECK ELEMENT NUMBER"

10-5

/0. APPENDLXB

Page 257: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

~LASS (FLR,WBR,FY.SEC.CV.AXD

CL1W = {1100ISQRT(FY»*(1-D.39*ABS{AXYCY}CL2W =(17001S0RT{FY»*(1-D.61*ABS{AX)/CY)CL3W ={19001S0RT(FY»·(1-D.6S*ABS{AXYCY}

CL1F =145/S0RT(FY)~-...... CLF2 = 1701S0RT(FY}

CLF3 = 200/SQRT(FY}

CL1F =420ISQRT(FY)CLF2 =525/SQRT(FY)CLF3 =670/SQRT(FY)

IClASS =MAX (ClF,ClWJI

G10-6

/0. APPENDIXB

Page 258: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

SUBROUTINES

INPUT (BMDES.BRDES.CLDES.8MB.BME.BRB.BRE.CLB.CLE.DATF)

REAC NOL FORM DATA.USR

READ UNE FROM DATA.USR

DBIND =IDDTB (N2.BMB.BME.BRB.BRE.CLB.CLE.BMDES.BRDES.CLDES)

LOCATE SECTION SECOeS INAF?ROPRIATE DATASASE

CALL SUBROUTINE PROP

RITE TO FILE DATAF N1,FLR.WBR,TR,CY.CRX.CRY.MP.ONEMU.CEX.FY.ZA.SEC.SeCDES

10-7

YES

/0. APPENDIXB

Page 259: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

yes

PROP (SNAMe,FY.E,G,LX.KX.L~KY .AREA,RX,RY,IX.J~T J.D,ZX,B,TF,CW,FLR.WBR,TR,CY.CRX,CR~MP.ONEMU.SEC.CEX)

sec =SNAME (1:1)LAMBe = SNAME (2:2)

~YE_S__ NUM1=SNAME(4:6)NUM2=SNAME(8:10)

NO

FLR =B/(2-TF).>--....... WBR =(D-2*TF)IWT

FLR =(B-4·TF)I(TF)W8R =(D-4ltTF)IWT

CAlCULATE CEX.TR.CY,LAMBX,LAMBY.CRX.CR~MP.ONEMU

10-8

/0. APPENDIX8

Page 260: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/0. APPENDIXB

RAno (AX,FlR,WBR,F'{,SEC,C~MOMI.MOMJ.CEX.NE.BMB,

BME,MOMMAX,MP,MR.ZA.CRX,CRY,ClRA.RB.RC)

DEFINE FUNCTIONSCOMP1, COMP2SG =SIGN (1.0,AX)

~--.t CAlCULATE RA, RB. RC FOR t-----------__.TENSION AND BENDING

U1XA= 1.0CAlCULATE Cl USING CLASSCALCULATE U1XB USING U1X

CALCULATE RA---- USING COMP2

CALCULATE RA, RB.USINGCOMP2

10-9

Page 261: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

SELECT (AX,MOMI,MOMJ,FY,LX,KX,LY,KY,E,G,DTBAS,8MB,BME,POSSEC,RMAXP)

ZA=AXJAREACALLPROPCALCULATE MR USING MRRMOMMAX =MAX (MOMI,MOMJ)CALLRATIORMAX =MAX (RA,RB,RC)1= 1

/0. APPENDIXB

NO

10-10

YES POSSEC (1) =SNAMERMAX (1) =RMAX

Page 262: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/0. APPENDIXB

STASEL (AX,MOMI,MOMJ,F'f,LX,KX,l'f,K'f.E,G,DTBAS,BMB,BME.ELAX,ELMOMI.ELMOMJ,ELVEL,ELVIEL,POSSEC,RMAXP)

ZA=AXlAREACALlPROPCALCULATE MR USING MRRCALCULATE MRS USING MRRMOMMAX = MAX (MOMI,MOMJ)MOSMAX = MAX (ELMOMI,ELMOMJ)CALL RAno (...AX,MOMI,MOMJ,-CLA,RA,RB.RC)CALL RAno (-ELAX,ELMOMI,ELMOMJ,"CLB,RSA,RSB,RSC)CLTOT = MAX (CLA,CLB)CALL SHEAR (WBR,WT.D,F'f.ELVEL,ELVIEL,RATSHE,RATSHI)RMAX = MAX (RA,RB,RC,RSA,RSB,RSC.RATSt-IE,RATSHI)

NO

YES POSSEC (1) = SNAMERMAX (1) = RMAX

( END )~ -.J

10-11

Page 263: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

JO. APPENDIXB

INPUT FILES

(i) DESIGN MODULE

TIMEH

- NAME OF TIME HISTORY FILE (ENCLOSE IN ' ')- TOTAL DURATION OF EARTHQUAKE RECORD- TIME STEP FOR rvŒMBER FORCES OUTPUT- CASE: 1 - BEAMS ELASnC, BRACES ANn COLUMNS ELASTIC

2 - BEAMS INEUSnC, BRACES AND COLUMNS EL\STIC- TOTAL NUMBER OF ELEMENTS TO RESPOND ELASTICALLY- FIRST BEM.-f ELE~[ENT, LAST BEAM ELEMENT, BRACE SECTIONS

DATABASE- FIRST BRACE ELE~ŒNT, LAST BRACE ELEMENT, BRACE SECTIONS

DATABASE- FIRST COLU~fN ELE~ŒNT, LAST COLU1fN ELEJ\fENT, COLU~fN SECTIONS

DATABASE

EXAMPLE:

'cO'

20.000.0423217 32 '\Vl.CAN'33 48 'HSS.CAN'1 16 'WWFW.CAN'

DATA.usa

- NU~mER OF LINES TO FOLLOW IN THIS FILE- FIRST ELE~fENT IN THE GROUP, LAST ELE~[ENT IN THE GROlJP,

SECTION DESIGNATION, Fy, E, G, Lx, Kx, Lv, Ky

EXAMPLE:

201, 4,'WWF400X273',350.,200000.,77000.,4500.0,1.0,4500.0,1.05, 8,'WWF350X176',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.09,12,'\V31OXI07',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.013,16,'W200X52',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.017,18,'W61OX10l',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.0

10-12

Page 264: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

/0. APPENDIXB

19,20,'W530À'74',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.021,22,'W530X74',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.023,24,'W460X68',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.025,26,'W460X67',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.027,28,'W360X72',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.029,30,'W31OX60',350.,200000.,77000.,3600.0,1.0,3600.0,1.031,32,'W200X42',350.,200000.,77000.,36oo.0,t.O,3600.0,1.033,34,'HSS305X305X10',3S0.,200000.,77000.,5763.0,1.0,S763.0, .935,36,'HSS30SX305XI0',3S0.,200000.,77000.,S091.0,1.0,S091.0, .937,38,'HSS305X305Xl0',350.,200000.,77000.,S091.0,1.0,5091.0, .939,40,'HSS305X203Xl1 ',350.,200000.,77000.,5091.0,1.0,5091.0, .941,42,'HSS305X203XI0',3S0.,200000.,77000.,S091.0,1.0,SO91.0,.943,44,'HSS254X152Xl1',350.,200000.,77000.,S091.0,1.0,5091.0, .945,46,'HSS203XI52Xl0',350.,200000.,77000.,S091.0,1.0,5091.0, .947,48,'HSSt 78XI78XI0',3S0.,200000.,77000.,S091.0,1.0,5091.0, .9

STAT

Ibis file follows the format of file DATA.USR. Forces produced by goveming load

combinatians are obtained from elastic analysis for each element group and specified as

follows:

- ~XIAL FORCE (CO~IPRESSION- positive), MOMENT AT END l, MOMENT ATEND J (same sign for double curvature), ELASTIC SHEAR FORCE, INEL\STICSHEAR fORCE (for all elements other than beams, inelastic shear force is set ta zero)

EXAMPLE:

8497.4 05625.3 3.7304S.6 2.51234.7 -0.3-7 453.2-1.9 367.31.8 350.9-1097.9381.2-979.8 348.7-807.9 277.3-598.8 206.261.1 86.21966.3 0.01727.7 0.01687.2 0.01539.8 0.0

-72.4-27.7-6.5-0.4603.3462.6461.6oooo141.2-58.8-87.1-82.2-86.4

16.1 06.7 01.1 00.2 01331.6 11481047.1 890.21025.3 839.4149.7 766.1140.7 670.1120.8 551.7101.1 410.6294 24710.2 0.017.1 0.016.1 0.017.0 0.0

10-13

Page 265: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

1374.0 0.01133.5 0.0863.3 0.0543.4 0.0

-67.7 13.3 0.0-50.9 10.0 0.0-30.7 6.0 0.0-35.3 6.9 0.0

/0. APPENDIX 8

NOTE: Resistances are calculated using resistance factor f equal to J. O. This has to hetaldng into accounl when definingforcesfor file STAT (i.e., divide magnitude offorces by0.9)

DATAF (internai input file prepared br design module.)

The file contains as many lines as there are e1ements other than links.Following data is

provided:

- NUMBER OF ELEMENT, bit, h/w, Tet Cy, Ca' C~., Mp, ~~ (00=1.0), Ca' Fy, ZxlA,FIRST LErrER OF SECTION DESIGNATION, SECTION DESIGNATION

(ü) DATA MODIFICATION MODULE

- In addition to DATA.USR and DATAF, following input file is needed to calculate braceinclination angles, in order to update beam and brace end eccentricities:

ANGLE

OUTER BEAIvI SPAN, STOREY HEIGHT (starting with first storey)

EXAMPLE: (for four storey frame)

36004500360036003600360036003600

10-14

Page 266: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

NOTE Ta USERS

Page (5) not included in the original manuscript isunavailable trom the author or university. The

manuscript was microfilmed as received.

Pg 10-15 in Chapter 10

This reproduction is the best copy available.

Page 267: INFORMATION TO USERS - McGill Universitydigitool.library.mcgill.ca/thesisfile36817.pdf · The sensitivity ofthe procedure to initial section selection ... incorporées dans les normes

DATA MODIFICATION MODULE

PROGRAM MODFF.EXEFLOWCHART

TRANSFORMTEMPLATEINPUT FILE DATA.TSTINTO DIRECT ACCESS FILE

ID. APPENDIXB

REAC DATA FROM CONTROLUNES TO DETERMINE LOCATIONOF DATA TO MOQIFY

READ DATA FROM CONTROLUNES TO DETERMINE LOCATIONOF DATA TO MOOIFY

flEAD DATA FROM FILE DATAF jTO DETERMINE RIGID OFFSETSAT BEAM-TO-BRACE CONNECTIO

Jo

CALCULATE RIGID OFFSETSAT BEAM-TO·BRACE CONNECTIONAND STORE IN MATRIX ECC

•UPDATE STIFFNESS AND YIELOINGSURFACES FOR COLUMN ELEMENTS(ACCOUNT FOR THE CLASS OF THE seCTION)

•UPDATE STlFFNESS AND YIELDINGSURFACES FOR BEAM AND L1NK ELEMENTSALSO UPDATE RIGID OFFSETS

~

UPDATE STIFFNESS AND YIELOINGSURFACES FOR BRACe ELEMENTS(ACCOUNT FOR THE CLASS OF THE SECTION)AlSO UPDATE RIGID OFFSerS

( END )

10-16


Recommended